Glass. 
 Book. 
 
RUDIMENTS 
 
 LATIN TONGUE: 
 
 A PLAIN AND EASY INTROD UCTION 
 
 LATIN GRAMMAR; 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF THE LANGUAGE ARE METHODICALLY DIGESTED, 
 BOTH IN ENGLISH AND LATIN. 
 
 WITH 
 
 USEFUL NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 Explaining the Terms of Grammar, and farther improving its Rules, 
 
 BY THOMAS RUDDIMAN, A.M. 
 
 ©tereotj^e Virion. 
 
 EDINBURGH: 
 
 Printed at the University Press, 
 TOR BELL & BRADFUTE, AND STIRLING & KENNEY, 
 EDINBURGH ; AND WHITTAKER & CO., JAMES 
 DUNCAN, AND SIMPKIN & MARSHALL, LONDON. 
 
 1832. 
 
<b 
 
 K 
 
 -?&V:v 
 
 *> 
 
 F546 
 
PREFACE, 
 
 Among the several instructors of Youth in this Nation, 
 n many have for a long time complained, that the two Ru- 
 diments of the Latin Tongue, commonly taught in our 
 ' Schools, are many ways insufficient in respect to the end 
 proposed by them : That the one is written wholly in La- 
 tin, the very Language it is designed to teach ; that the 
 other is defective, particularly in the Syntax ; and that 
 the Rules of both are often obscure and intricate, and 
 sometimes false and erroneous. Whereupon some know- 
 ing Masters of that profession, by their repeated solicita- 
 tions, prevailed with me to undertake the compiling of a 
 new Rudiments, which they conceived might, in a great 
 measure, be freed from the faults and defects of the for- 
 mer, and so contrived as to bring down its Rules to the 
 level of a boy's capacity, and make them enter with 
 more ease and familiarity into his mind. This is the end 
 I had in view : With what success it has been prosecuted, 
 is a province for others, not me, to determine. However, 
 if any thing inclines me to hope its acceptance in the 
 world, it is owing to the kind assistance I have had, from 
 time to time, of the above mentioned and other gentle- 
 men, as the duty of their respective employments would 
 permit them. What discouraged me most in this under- 
 taking, was the different opinions of Grammarians, with 
 the sharp contests and disputes they have had about the 
 method of Instruction, and the most proper way to com- 
 municate the Latin Tongue to others with the greatest 
 facility and expedition. It would be almost an endless 
 
 As 
 
Vi PREFACE. 
 
 task to reckon up the various Schemes that have been 
 projected for that purpose ; therefore I shall engage no 
 farther in tins subject, than as it seems necessary to give 
 my Reader a clear and distinct view of the reasons that 
 determined me to the method I have followed. 
 
 I have long observed that those of our country whose 
 business it is to direct the studies of Youth, are greatly 
 divided about what an Introduction to Latin Grammar 
 ought properly to contain, and in what Language ks pre- 
 cepts should be conveyed. Some are for contracting it 
 into as narrow limits as is possible, and not to burden the 
 memory of the learner with any thing but what is essen- 
 tial and absolutely necessary ; while others contend that 
 this is too general, and not sufficient to direct his practice, 
 without the addition of more particular rules. Again, 
 though the greater part incline to have the first principles 
 of Grammar communicated in a known language, there 
 are not a few, and of these some persons of distinction, 
 who are still for retaining them in Latin, which, though 
 attended at first with more difficulty, makes (in their judg- 
 ment) a more lasting impression on the mind, and carries 
 the learner more directly to the habit of speaking Latin, a 
 practice much used in our Schools. It appeared next to an 
 impossibility to satisfy so many different opinions : How- 
 ever, the method I have taken seems to bid fairest for it ; 
 for I have reduced the substance of these Rudiments into 
 a sort of Text, and have given the Latin an English Ver- 
 sion, leaving the Master to his own choice and discretion 
 which to use. And, that none may complain that the 
 Text is too compendious, I have subjoined large Notes, 
 which I humbly conceive will supply that defect. 
 
 To render my design of more general use, I was obliged 
 to fall in with this expedient, which has produced one in- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 convenience, namely, that the Book is thereby swelled 
 to a much greater bulk than I could have wished, or some 
 perhaps will excuse ; though the reasons are so obvious 
 that it is needless to relate them. I confess I have been 
 larger in the Notes than the nature of a Rudiments seemed 
 to require ; but as I presume there is nothing in them but 
 what may be useful either to Master or Scholar, and since 
 it was never my intention that they should be all taught, 
 or any of them, with the same care as the Essential Parts, 
 I thought they might the more easily be dispensed with. 
 There is one thing more which has considerably increased 
 them, viz. the Remarks I have added on English Nouns, 
 Pronouns, and Verbs, which I judged useful on a double 
 account ; 1 . As they serve to illustrate Latin Grammar, 
 the first notions and impressions whereof we r&ceive from 
 the language we ourselves speak : 2. Because the greater 
 number of those who are taught the Latin Tongue reap 
 little other benefit from it, than as it enables them to speak 
 and write English with the greater exactness, I supposed 
 it would not be amiss to throw in something in order to 
 that end. 
 
 Having thus given a general plan of my undertaking, all 
 I shall say of the particular management of it is, that I 
 have laboured all along to render every thing as plain and 
 easy as I possibly could, considering with a tender regard, 
 for whose benefit it is designed. I have consulted the best 
 Grammarians, both ancient and modern, and have bor- 
 rowed from them whatever I conceived fit for my purpose ; 
 though, not contenting myself with their bare authority, I 
 frequently had recourse to the fountain itself, I mean, the 
 purest writers of the Latin Tongue. As thus I have been 
 solicitous to avoid error, so I have been cautious not to 
 incur the censure of having affected novelty, and therefore 
 
 A4 
 
Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 have reseded no farther from the common Systems than I 
 think they have receded from truth ; retaining the usual 
 Terms of Art, which have so long obtained in the Schools, 
 though sometimes I have taken the liberty, as I saw occa- 
 sion for it, to explain them in my own way. That I might 
 lay no more weight on the memories of children than they 
 could well bear, I have reduced the Rules to as small a 
 number as the subject would allow of, and conceived them 
 in as few words as was consistent with perspicuity ; leaving 
 it to the industry of the Teacher to explain them more 
 fully, as he shall find necessary, without which no Rules 
 can be sufficient. The Syntax is indeed longer than was 
 to be wished ; but I frankly own that I do not see how it 
 can be made much shorter, without either confounding its 
 order, or leaving out the Elliptical Rules. However, to 
 remove the objection as much as I could, I have subjoined 
 a more compendious Syntax, consisting only of a few 
 Fundamental Rules, which may be taught alone, or before 
 the other, as the judgment and discretion of the Master 
 shall direct him. 
 
THE 
 
 RUDIMENTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 LATIN TONGUE; 
 
 A PLAIN AND EASY INTRODUCTION 
 
 LATIN GRAMMAR. 
 
 PARS PRIMA. 
 
 DE LITERIS ET SYLLABIS. 
 
 QMagister. 
 UOT sunt Literae apud La- 
 tinos'? 
 
 Discipulus. Quinque et vi- 
 ginti ; a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j 9 
 k,l,m 9 n, o,p, q, r, s, t, u 9 v, 
 
 *> y> *• 
 
 M. Quomodo (ttvidunjur? 
 D. In Vocales et Conso- 
 nantes. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Vocales ? 
 
 Z). Sex ; a y e, i, o, u 9 y. 
 
 PART t 
 
 OF LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 
 
 YY Master. 
 
 JUL o w many Letters are there 
 among the Latins ? 
 
 Scholar. Five and twenty ; 
 a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, 
 m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, x, 
 
 M. How are they divided f 
 
 S. Into Vowels and Conso- 
 nants. 
 
 M. How many Vowels are 
 there ? 
 
 S. Six ; a, e, i, o, u, y. 
 As 
 
10 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 M. Quot sunt-Consonantes-? 
 
 D. Novemdecim ; h, c, d, f 9 
 g, K j, &> h ™* n> P> q, r> s, t, 
 v, x, z. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Diphthbngi ?* 
 
 D. Quinque ; ae vel ce, oe 
 vel oe, au, eu, ei : ut, aetas, 
 vel cetas, 'poena velpceiia, audio, 
 euge, hei. 
 
 M. How many Consonants 
 are there? 
 
 S. Nineteen; b, c, d, f, g, 
 K h K 1, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, 
 v, x, z. 
 
 M. Hoio many Diphthongs 
 are there? 
 
 S. Five ; ae or ae, oe or oe, 
 au, eu, ei : as, aetas or aetas, 
 poena or poena, audio, euge, 
 hei. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 GRAMMAR is the art of speaking any Language rightly ; as, He- 
 brew, Greek, Latin, English, &c. 
 
 Latin Grammar is the art of speaking rightly the Latin Tongue. 
 
 The R UDIMENTS of that Grammar are plain and easy instructions, 
 teaching beginners the first principles, or the most common and necessary 
 rules of Latin. 
 
 The Rudiments mav be reduced to these four heads : I. Treating of 
 Letters. II. Of Syllables. III. Of Words. IV. Of Sentences. 
 
 These are naturally made up one of another ; for one or more Letters 
 make a Syllable, one or more Syllables make a Word, and two or more 
 Words make a Sentence. 
 
 A Letter is a mark or character representing an uncompounded sound. 
 
 A" Y, Z, are only to be found in words originally Greek ; and H by 
 some is not accounted a letter, but a breathing. 
 
 We reckon the J", called Jod, or Je, and the V, called Vau, two let- 
 ters distinct from / and U; because not only their figures, but their 
 powers or sounds are quite different ; J sounding like G before E, and 
 V almost like F. 
 
 A Vowel is a letter that makes a full and perfect sound by itself. 
 
 A Consonant is a letter that cannot sound without a Vowel. 
 
 A Syllable is any one complete sound. 
 
 There can be no Syllable without a Vowel : And any of the six Vowels 
 alone, or any Vowel with one or more Consonants before or after it 
 makes a Syllable. 
 
 There are for the most part as many Syllables in a Word as there are 
 Vowels in it : only, there are two kinds of Syllables in which it is other- 
 wise, viz. 1. When Z7with any other Vowel comes after G, Q, or S ; as 
 in Lingua,, Qui, Suadeo ; where the sound of the U vanishes, or is little 
 heard. 2. When two Vowels join to make a Diphthong or double Vowel. 
 
 A Diphthong is a sound compounded of the sounds of two Vowels, so 
 as both of them are heard. 
 
 Of Diphthongs three are proper, viz. au 3 eu, ei, in which both Vowels 
 are heard ; and two improper, viz. ce, ce, in which the a and o are not 
 heard, but they are pronounced as e simple. 
 
 Some, not without reason, to these five Diphthongs add other three ; 
 as, at in Maia, oi m Troia, yi or ui, in Harpyia, or Harpuia. 
 
Part IL 
 PARS SECUNDA. 
 
 DE DICTIONIBUS. 
 
 M. Quot sunt. Partes Ora* 
 tionis.? ' 
 
 D. ' Octo ; Nomen, Prono- 
 men, Verbum, Participium ; 
 Adverbium, Praepositio, Inter- 
 jectio, Conjunction 
 
 M. Quoniodo dividuntur ? 
 
 D. In Declinabiles et Inde- 
 clinabiles. 
 
 M. Quot .sunL-DeclinabiLes ? 
 
 D. Quatuor ; Nomen, Pro- 
 nomen, Verbum, Participium, 
 
 M. Quot sunt jin declinable 
 les? 
 
 D. Item quatuor; Adver- 
 bium, Praepositio, Interjectio, 
 Conjunctio. 
 
 Of Words. 1 1 
 
 PART SECOND, 
 
 OF WORDS. 
 
 M. How many Parts of 
 Speech are there? 
 
 S. Eight ; Noun, Pronoun, 
 Verb, Participle ; Adverb, 
 Preposition, Interjection, Con- 
 junction. 
 
 M. How are they divided ? 
 
 S. Into Declinable and Inde- 
 clinable. 
 
 M. How many- are Declin- 
 able? 
 
 S. Four ; Noun, Pronoun, 
 Verb, Participle. 
 
 M. How many are Indeclin- 
 able f 
 
 S. Likewise four ; Advert} 
 Preposition, Interjection, Con 
 junction. 
 
 A Word, Vox or dictio, is one or more Syllables joined together, which 
 men have agreed upon to signify something. 
 
 Words are commonly reduced to eight Classes, called Parts of Speech : 
 but some comprise them all under three Classes, viz. Noun, Verb, and 
 Adverb. Under Noun, they comprehend also Pronoun and Participle ; 
 and under Adverb, also Preposition, Interjection, and Conjunction. 
 Others to these add a fourth Class, viz. Adnoun, comprehending Ad- 
 jectives under it, and restricting Nouns to Substantives only. These by 
 some are otherwise called Names, Qualities, Affirmations, and Particles. 
 
 The declinable parts of Speech are so called, because there is some 
 change made upon them, especially in their last Syllables : And this is 
 what we call Declension, or declining of Words. But the indeclinable 
 parts continue unchangeably the same. 
 
 The last Syllable on which these changes do fall, is called the Ending-, 
 or Termination of Words. 
 
 These changes are made by \v T hat Grammarians call Accidentia, i. e. 
 The Accidents of Words. 
 
 These Accidents are commonly reckoned six, viz. Gender, Case, Num- 
 ber ; Mood, Tense, and Person. Of these, Gender and Case are peculiar 
 to three of the declinable Parts of Speech, viz. Noun, Pronoun, and 
 Participle ; and Mood, Tense, and Person, are peculiar to one of them, 
 viz. Verb ; and Number is common to them all. 
 
 Note 1. That Person may also be said to belong to Noun or Pronoun : 
 but then it is not properly an Accident, because no change is made by 
 it, in the word. 
 
 A 6 
 
1 2 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue ', 
 
 Note 2. That Figure, Species, and Comparison, which some call 
 Accidents, do not properly come under that name, because the words 
 have a different signification from what they had before. — See Chap. IX. 
 
 Note 5. That the changes that happen to a Noun, Pronoun, and 
 Participle, are, in a stricter sense, called Declension or Declination of 
 them ; and the changes that happen to a Verb, are called Conjugation. 
 
 CAP. I. 
 
 DE NOMINE. 
 
 M. (x,uomodo decliaatur No- 
 men? r 
 
 D. Per Genera, Casus, et 
 Numeros. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Genera? 
 
 D. Tria; Mascidinum, Foe- 
 mininum, et Neutrum. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Casus ? 
 
 D. Sex; Nominativus, Ge- 
 nitivus, Dativus, Accusativus, 
 Vocativus, et Ablativus. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Numeri ? 
 
 D. Duo; Singularis et Plu- 
 ralis. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Declinatio- 
 nes? 
 
 D. Quinque ; Prima, Secun- 
 da, Tertia, Quarta, et Quint a. 
 REGULAE GENERALES. 
 
 1. Nomina Neutri Generis 
 habent Nominativum, Accu- 
 sativum, et Vocativum, simi- 
 les in utroque Numero: et hi 
 Casus, in Plurali, semper desi- 
 nunt in a, 
 
 2. Vocativus in Singulari 
 plerumque, in Plurali semper, 
 est similis Nominativo. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF NOUN. 
 
 M. Idow is a Noun declin- 
 ed? 
 
 S. By Genders, Cases, and 
 Numbers. 
 
 M. How many Genders are 
 there ? 
 
 S. Three; Masculine, Fe- 
 minine, and Neuter. 
 
 M. How many Cases are there? 
 
 S. Six; Nominative, Geni- 
 tive, Dative, Accusative, Vo- 
 cative, and Ablative. 
 
 M. How many Numbers are 
 there ? 
 
 S. Tivo ; Singular and Plu- 
 ral. 
 
 M. How many Declensions 
 are there? 
 
 S. Five; First, Second, 
 Third, Fourth, and Fifth. 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 1. Nouns of the Neuter Gen- 
 der have the Nominative, Accu- 
 sative, and Vocative, alike in 
 both Numbers : And these Cases 
 in the Plural end always in a. 
 
 2. The Vocative for the most 
 part in the Singular, and al- 
 ways in the Plural, is like the 
 Nominative. 
 
 
Part II.— Chap. L— Of Noun. 13 
 
 S. Dativus et Ablativus j 3. The Dative and Ablative 
 
 Pluralis sunt similes. | Plural are alike. 
 
 4. Nomina Propria plerum- } 4. Proper Names for the 
 
 que carent Plurali. | most part want the plural. 
 
 A NO UN is that Part of Speech which signifies the name or quality 
 of a Thing ; as, Homo, a Man ; Sonus, Good. 
 
 A Noun is either Substantive or Adjective. 
 
 A Substantive Noun is that which signifies the name of a Thing ; as, 
 Arbor, a Tree ; Virtus, Virtue ; Bonitas, Goodness. 
 
 An Adjective Noun is that which signifies an Accident, Quality, or 
 Property of a Thing ; as, Albus, white ; Felix, happy ; Gravis, heavy. 
 
 A Substantive may be distinguished from an Adjective these two 
 ways : 1. A Substantive can stand in a Sentence, without an Adjective, 
 but an Adjective cannot without a Substantive ; as, I can say, A stone 
 falls ; but I cannot say, Heavy falls. 2. If the word Thing be joined with 
 an Adjective, it will make sense ; but if it be joined with a Substantive, 
 it will make nonsense : Thus we say, A good Thing, A white Thing; but 
 we do not say, A Man Thing, A Beast Thing. 
 
 A Substantive Noun is divided into Proper and Appellative. 
 
 A Proper Substantive is that which agrees to one particular thing of 
 a kind ; as, Virgilius, a Man's Name; Penelope, a Woman's Name ; Sco- 
 tia, Scotland ; Edinburgum, Edinburgh ; Taus, the Tay. 
 
 An Appellative Substantive is that which is common to a whole kind 
 of Things ; as, Vir, a. Man ; Femina, a Woman ; Regnum, a Kingdom ; 
 Urbs, a City ; Fluvius, a River. 
 
 Note, That, when a Proper Name is applied to many, it becomes an 
 Appellative ; as, Duodecim Caesares, the Twelve Caesars. 
 
 GENDER in a natural sense is the distinction of Sex, or the difference 
 between Male and Female ; but in a grammatical sense we commonly 
 understand by it, the fitness that a Substantive Noun hath to be joined to 
 an Adjective, of such a Termination, and not of another. — Therefore, 
 
 Of Names of Animals, the Hees are of the Masculine, and the Shees of 
 the Feminine Gender : But of things without life, and where the diver- 
 sity of Sex is not considered, even of things that have Life, some are of 
 the Masculine, others of the Feminine, and others of the Neuter Gender, 
 according to the use of the best Authors of the Latin Tongue. 
 
 Besides these three principal Genders, there are reckoned also other 
 three less principal, which are nothing else but Compounds of the three 
 former, viz. the Gender common to two, the Gender common to three, 
 and the doubtful Gender. 
 
 I. The Common Gender, or Gender common to two, Genus commune, 
 or Commune duum, is Masculine and Feminine, and belongs to such 
 Nouns as agree to both Sexes ; as, Parens, a Father or Mother ; Bos, an 
 Ox or Cow. 
 
 II. The Gender common to three, Genus commune trium, is Masculine, 
 Feminine, and Neuter, and belongs only to Adjectives ; whereof some 
 have three Terminations, the first Masculine, the second Feminine, and 
 the third Neuter ; as, Bonus, bona, bonum, good. Some have two, the first 
 Masculine and Feminine, and the second Neuter ; as, Mollis, molle, soft. 
 
14? Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 And some have but one Termination, which agrees indifferently to any of 
 the three Genders ; as, Prudens, wise. 
 
 III. The Doubtful Gender, Genus dubium, belongs to such Nouns as are 
 found in good Authors, sometimes in one Gender, and sometimes in another; 
 as, Dies, a Day, Masc. or Fern. ; Vulgus, the Rabble, Masc. or Neut. 
 
 [We have excepted out of the number of Genders the Epicene or Pro- 
 miscuous Gender; for, properly speaking, there is no such Gender dis- 
 tinct from the three chief ones, or the Doubtful. There are indeed Epi- 
 cene Nouns, that is, some names of animals, in which the distinction of 
 sex is either not at all, or very obscurely considered : And these are ge- 
 nerally of the Gender of their termination ; as, Aquila, an Eagle, Fern, 
 because it ends in a; Passer, a Sparrow, Masc. because it ends in er. 
 (See p. 16. and 19.) So Homo, a Man or Woman, Masc; Mancipium, 
 a Slave, Neut. ; Anguis, a Serpent, Doubtful.] 
 
 To distinguish these Genders, we make use of these three words, Hie, 
 haec, hoc ; which are commonly, though improperly, called Articles. Hie 
 is the sign of the Masc. haec of the Fern, hoc of the Neuter Gender; 
 Hie et haec, of the Common to two ; Hie, haec, hoc, of the Common to 
 three; Hie aut haec, hie ant hoc, Sec. of the Doubtful. 
 
 By CASES we understand the different Terminations that Nouns re- 
 ceive in declining : So called- from cado, to fall, because they naturally 
 fall or flow from the Nominative, which is therefore called Casus rectus, 
 the straight case ; as the other five are named Obliqui, crooked. 
 
 The Singular Number denotes one single thing ; as, Homo, a Man : 
 The Plural denotes more things than one; as, Homines, Men. 
 
 Before the Learner proceed to the Declension of Latin Nouns, 
 it may not perhaps be improper to give him a general view of 
 THE DECLENSION OF ENGLISH NOUNS. 
 
 I. The English Language hath the two Genders of Nature, viz. Mas- 
 culine and Feminine ; for Animals in it are called HE or SHE, accord- 
 ing to the difference of their sex : And almost every thing without life is 
 called IT. But because all the Adjectives of this Language are of one 
 termination, it has no occasion for any other Genders. 
 
 II. The English, properly speaking, has no cases, because there is no 
 alteration made in the words themselves, as in the Latin ; but instead 
 thereof we use some little words called PARTICLES. 
 
 Thus, the Nominative Case is the Simple Noun itself: The Particle 
 OF put before it, or 's after it, makes the Genitive : TO or FOR before 
 it, makes the Dative: The Accusative is the same with the Nominative: 
 The Vocative hath before it : And the Ablative hath WITH, FROM, 
 IX, BY, &c. 
 
 Note 1. That when a Substantive comes before a Verb, it is called 
 the Nominative : When it follows after a. Verb active, without a Preposi- 
 tion intervening, it is called the Accusative. 
 
 Note 2. That the Apostrophus, or sign ['], is not used in the Geni- 
 tive Plural; as, Mens ivorks, the Apostles Creed. 
 
 Note 5. That TO, the sign of the Dative, and of the Vocative, are 
 frequently omitted or understood. 
 
 Besides these, there are other two little words called AR TICLES, which 
 
Part IL—Chap. L—Of Noun. 1 5 
 
 are commonly put before Substantive Nouns, viz. A, or AN before a 
 vowel or H, called the Indefinite Article, and THE called the Definite. 
 
 A or An signifies as much as the Adjective One, and is put for it ; as 
 A Man, that is, One Man. The is a Pronoun, and signifies almost the 
 same with This or That, and These or Those. 
 
 Note 1. That proper names of men, women, towns, kingdoms, 
 and appellatives, when used in a very general sense, have none of these 
 articles ; as, Man is mortal, i. e. every man ; God abhors sin, i. e. all sins : 
 But proper names of rivers, ships, hills, §c. frequently have The ; as, 
 the Thames, the Britannia, the Alps. 
 
 Note 2. That the Vocative has none of these articles, and the Plural 
 wants the Indefinite. 
 
 Note o. That when an Adjective is joined with a Substantive, the 
 article is put before both ; as, A good Man, the good Man : And the 
 Definite is put before the Adjective when the Substantive is understood ; 
 as, The just shall live by Faith, i. e. The just Man. 
 
 III. The English hath two Numbers as the Latin, and the Plural is 
 commonly made by putting an s to the Singular ; as, Book, Books. 
 
 Exc. 1. Such as end in ch, sh, ss, and x, which have es added to 
 their Singular; as, Church-es, Brush-es, Witness-es, Box-es ; where it is 
 to be noticed, that such words have a syllable more in the Plural than 
 in the Singular Number; which likewise happens to all words ending 
 in ce, ge, se, ze ; as, Faces, Ages, Houses, Mazes. The reason of this pro- 
 ceeds from the near approach these terminations have in their sound to 
 an s, so ttiat their Plural could not be distinguished from their Singular 
 without f\he addition of another syllable. And, for the same reason, 
 Verbs of these terminations have a syllable added to them in their third 
 person sing, of the present tense. 
 
 Exc. 2. Words that end mf, or fe, have their plural in ves ; as, Calf, 
 Calves ; Leaf, Leaves ; Wife, Wives : But not always ; for Hoof, Roof, 
 Grief, Mischief, Dwarf, Strife, Muff, &c. retain/. Staff has Staves. 
 
 Exc. 3. Some have their plural in en ; as, Man, Men ; Woman, Wo- 
 men ; Child, Children ; Chick, Chicken ; Brother, Brothers or Brethren, 
 (which last is seldom used but in sermons, or in a burlesque sense.) 
 
 Exc. 4. Some are more irregular ; as, Die, Dice ; Mouse, Mice ; 
 Louse, Lice; Goose, Geese; Foot, Feet; Tooth, Teeth; Penny, Pence ; 
 Soiv, Soivs, and Swine ; Cow, Cows, and Kine. 
 
 Exc. 5. Some are the same in both Numbers ; as, Sheep, Hose, Swine, 
 Chicken, Pease, Deer ; Fish and Fishes, Mile and Miles, Horse and Horses. 
 
 Note, That as Nouns in y do often change y into ie, so these have 
 rather ies than ys in the Plural ; as, Cherry, Cherries. 
 
 An English Noun is thus Declined : 
 
 A, The The 
 
 Nom. King,"] TNom. Kings, 
 
 Gen. of King, , j Gen. of Kings, 
 
 Dat. to, for, King, I *§ J Dat to, for, Kings, 
 
 Ace. King, | £ j Ace. Kings, 
 
 Voc. King, ^ Voc. Kings, 
 
 w Abl. with, from, in, by King : J [_Ab\. with, from, in, by, Kings. 
 
16 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 THE FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 M. How is the First De» 
 clension known ? 
 
 S. By the Genitive and Da- 
 tive Singular hi ae Diphthong, 
 
 PRIMA DECLINATIO. 
 
 M. Quomodo dignoscitur 
 Prima Declinatio ? 
 
 D. Per Genitivura et Da- 
 tivum singular em in ae Diph- 
 thongo. 
 
 M. Quot habet Termina- 
 tiones ? 
 
 D. Quatuor; a, e, as, es; ut, 
 
 M. How many Terminations 
 hath it ? 
 
 S. Four; a, e, as, es; as, 
 Penna, Penelope, Aeneas, Anchises. 
 
 Penna, a Pen, Fern. 
 
 Sing. Plur. Terminations. 
 
 Norn, penna, a pen, Nom. pennae, pens, a, ae, 
 
 Gen. pennae, of a pen, Gen. pennarum, of pens, ae, arum, 
 
 Dat. pennae, to a pen, Dot. pennis, to pens, ae, is, 
 
 Ace. pennam, a pen, Ace. pennas, pens, am, as, 
 
 Voc. penna, Open, Voc. pennae, Opens, a, ae, 
 
 Abl. penna, with a pen: AM. pennis, tvithpens. a: is. 
 
 ^f After the same manner you may decline Litera, a Let- 
 ter; Via, a Way; Galea, an Helmet; Tunica, 2l Coat; To- 
 ga, a Gown. 
 
 A is a Latin termination : e, as, and es, are Greek. 
 
 Nouns in a and e are Feminine, in as and es Masculine. 
 
 Rule, Filia, a Daughter ; Nata, a Daughter ; Deo, a Goddess; Ani- 
 ma, the Soul, with some others, have more frequently abus than is in 
 their 'Dat. and Abl. Plural, to distinguish them from Masculines in us 
 of the Second Declension. 
 
 C In declining Greek Nouns, observe the following Rules : 
 
 1. Greek Nouns in as, and a, have sometimes their Accusative, with 
 the Poets, in an; as, Aeneas, Aeneam velAenean.; Ossa, Ossam vel Ossan. 
 
 2. Those in es have their Accusative in en, and their Vocative and 
 Ablative in e ; as, 
 
 Nom. Anchises, Ace. Anchisen, 
 
 Voc. Anchise, Abl. Anchise. 
 
 5. Nouns in e have their Genitive in es, their Accusative in en, their 
 Dative, Vocative, and Ablative in e ; as, 
 
 Nom. Penelope, Gen. Penelopes, 
 
 Dat. Penelope, Ace. Penelopen, . 
 
 Voc. Penelope, 
 Abl. Penelope. 
 [As to the Dative of words in e, I have followed Probus and Priscian, 
 among the ancients ; Lilly, Alvarus, Vossius, Messieurs de Port Royal, 
 Johnson, &c. among the moderns. And though none of them cite any 
 example, yet I remember to have observed three such Datives, viz. Cy- 
 
Part II.— Chap. I— Of Noun. 17 
 
 bele in Virg. iEn. XL 768. Penelope in Martial, Epig. XI. 8. 9 : and 
 Epigone in Reinesi Syntag. Incript. Class. 14. Num. 85. But Diomedes 
 and Despauter seem to be of opinion that these Nouns have ae in their 
 Dative. The reason that moved the former is, because they thought it 
 incongruous, that seeing Nouns in e generally follow the Greek in all 
 their other cases, they should follow the Latin in their Dative only, espe- 
 cially since their Ablative, which answers to the Greek Dative, ends in e. 
 As, on the contrary, they maintain, that if such Nouns have ae in their 
 Dative, it must come from a Nominative in a ; of which there are some 
 examples yet extant : And then they may likewise have their Accusative 
 in am ; as, Penelopam, Circam, in Plautus ; Lycambam, in Terentianus 
 Maurus. Thus, Helenae or Helenes, Helenam or Helenen, are frequently 
 to be met with in Poets, who also turn such words as commonly end in a 
 into e in the Nominative and Vocative, when the measure of their verse 
 requires it. And here it may not be improper to remark, that even Greek 
 words in es have sometimes their Nominative and Vocative in a, (whence 
 comes their Genitive and Dative in ae : ) And if Mr. Johnson's citations 
 are right, both es and e have sometimes their Accusative in em.'] 
 
 SECUNDA DECLINATIO. 
 
 M. Quomodo dignoscitur Se- 
 cunda Declinatio ? 
 
 D. Per Genitivum singula- 
 rem in i, et Dativum in o. 
 
 M. Quot habet Terminati- 
 ones? 
 
 D. Septem; er, ir, «r, us, 
 um, os, on; ut, 
 
 THE' SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 M. Hotv is the Second Declen- 
 sion known? 
 
 S. By the Genitive Singular 
 in i, and Dative in o. 
 
 M. Hoiu many Terminations 
 hath it? 
 
 S. Seven; er, ir, ur, us, urn, 
 os, on; as, 
 
 Gener, a Son-in-law; Vir, a Man; Satur, Full; Dominus, 
 2l Lord; Regnum, a Kingdom; Synodos, a Synod; Albion, 
 the Island Albion, or Great Britain. 
 
 Gener, a Sbn-in-law, Masc. 
 
 Sing. 
 Norn, gener, 
 Gen. generi, ( 
 Dat. genero, 
 Ace', generum, 
 - Voc. gener, 
 All. genero : 
 
 Plur. 
 Nom. generi, 
 Gen. generorum, 
 Dat. generis, 
 Ace. generos, 
 Voc. generi, 
 Abl. generis. 
 
 Terminations. 
 
 er, ir, us, i, 
 
 i, orum, 
 o, is, 
 um, os, 
 
 er, ir, e, i, 
 o: is. 
 
 After the same manner you may decline Puer, a Boy ; Socer, a Father- 
 in-law; Vir, a Man, &c. But Liber, a Book; Magister, a Master; Alex- 
 ander, a man's name ; and most other Substantives in er, lose the e before 
 r .• Thus. Sing. Nom. Liber, Gen. libri, Dat. libro, Ace. librum, Voc. li- 
 ber, Abl. libro ; Plur. Nom. libri, Gen. librorum, §c. 
 
IS Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Dominus, a Lord, Masc. 
 
 Sing. 
 Nom. dominus, 
 Gen. domini, 
 Dot. domino, 
 Ace, dominum, 
 Voc, domine, 
 Abl. domino : 
 
 Plur. 
 Nom. domini, 
 Gen. dominorum, 
 Dat, dominis, 
 Ace. dominos, 
 Voc. domini, 
 Abl. dominis. 
 
 Regnum, a Kingdom, Neut. 
 
 Sing. 
 Nom. regnum, 
 Gen. regni, 
 Dat. regno, 
 Ace. regnum, 
 Voc. regnum, 
 Abl. regno : 
 
 Plur. 
 Nom. regna, 
 Gen. regnorum, 
 Dat. regnis, 
 Ace. regna, 
 Voc. regna, 
 Abl. regnis. 
 
 Thus, ' 
 Ventus, the Wind. 
 O cuius, the Lye. 
 Fluvius, a River. 
 Puteus, a Well. 
 Focus, a common Fire. 
 Rogus, aF uncr al Pile. 
 
 Thus, 
 
 Templum, a Church. 
 Ingenium, Wit. 
 Horreum, a Barn. 
 Canticum, a Song. 
 Jugum, a Yoke. 
 
 REGULAE. 
 
 I. Nominativus in us facit 
 Vocativum in e; ut, Ventus, 
 rente. 
 
 II. Propria in his perdunt 
 us in Vocativo; ut, Georgius, 
 Georgi. 
 
 RULES. 
 
 I. TJie Nominative in us 
 makes the Vocative in e ; as, 
 Ventus, vente. 
 
 II. Proper names in ius lose 
 us in the Vocative ; as, Geor- 
 gius, Georgi. 
 
 Filius hath zhofili, and Deus hath Dens, in the Vocative; and 
 in the Plural more frequently Dii and Diis, than Dei and Deis. 
 
 The most common terminations of the Second Declension are er and 
 us of the Masc. and urn of the Neut. Gender. 
 
 There is only one Noun in ir of this Declension, viz. Vir, a Man, 
 with its compounds, Levir, Duumvir, Triumvir, Sec. and only one in ur, 
 viz. Satur, full, (of old Saturus) an Adjective. Os and on are Greek ter- 
 minations, and generally changed into us and um in their Nominative. 
 These, with other Greek Nouns in us, have sometimes their Ace. in on. 
 
 [We have excluded the termination eus from this Declension, as be- 
 longing more properly to the Third ; as, Orpheus, Orpheos, Orphei, Or- 
 phea, Orpheu : For when it is of the Second Declension, it is e-us of two 
 syllables, and so falls under the termination us ; Orpke-us, Orphe-i, (con- 
 tracted Orphei and OrphiJ Orphe-o, Orphe-um (or Orphe-on), Orphe-o.'] 
 
 TERTIA DECLINATIO. 
 
 M. Quomodo dignoscitur 
 Tertia Declinatio? 
 
 THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 M. How is the Third Declen- 
 sion known? 
 
Part IL—Ckap.L—Of Noun. 
 
 19 
 
 S. By the Genitive Singular 
 in is, and Dative in i. 
 
 M. How many Terminations 
 or final Syllables hath it? 
 
 S. Seventy and one. 
 
 M. How many final Letters 
 hath it ? 
 
 S. Eleven; a, e, o, c, d, 1, 
 I n, r, s, t, x; as, 
 
 D. Per Genitivum singula- 
 rem in is, et Dativiim in i. 
 
 M. Quot habet Termina- 
 tiones seii Syllabas finales ? 
 
 D. Septuaginta et unam. 
 
 M. Quot habet Litems fi- 
 nales? 
 
 D. Undecim; a, e, o, c, d, 
 I, n, r, s, t, x; ut, 
 
 Diadema, a Crown; Sedile, a Seat; Sermo, s. Speech; Lac, 
 Milk; David, a Man's Name; Animal, a living Creature; Pec- 
 ten, a Comb; Pater, a Father; Rupes, a Rock; Caput, the 
 Head; Bex, a King. 
 
 Sermo, a Speech, Masc. 
 Sing. 
 Nom. sermo, Norn. 
 
 Gen. sermcTnis, Gen. 
 
 Dat. sermoni, Dat. 
 
 Ace. sermon em, Ace. 
 Voc. sermo, Voc. 
 
 AM. sermon e: AM. 
 
 Plnr. 
 
 Terminations. 
 
 sermones, 
 
 a,e,o,&c. es, a, 
 
 sermonum, 
 
 is, um, ium 
 
 sermonibus, 
 
 i, ibus, 
 
 sermones, 
 
 em, es, a, 
 
 sermones, 
 
 a,e,o,&c. es, a, 
 
 sermonibus. 
 
 e,i : ibus. 
 
 Sedile, a Seat, Masc. 
 
 Sing. 
 Nom. sedile, 
 Gen. sedilis, 
 sedili, 
 sedile, 
 sedile, 
 sedili: 
 
 Dat 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 AM. 
 
 Plur. 
 Nom. sedilia, 
 Gen. sedilium, 
 sedilibus, 
 sedilia, 
 sedilia, 
 sedilibus. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 
 AM. 
 
 As Sermo, so most Substantives of 
 this Declension in a, o, c, d, n, t, x, 
 er, or, ur, as, os, us; (except their Ace. 
 and Voc. when they are Neuters, or 
 when they want the Plur. Number.) 
 Also (when they have more Sylla- 
 bles in their Gen. than Nom.) all 
 Words in es. and most of those in is. 
 
 Of the final Letters of the Third Declension, six are peculiar to it, o, c, d, 
 I, t, x ; the other five are common to other Declensions, viz. a, e, n, r, s. 
 
 The copious final Letters are, o, n, r, s, x. 
 
 The copious final Syllables are, to, do, go, en, er, or, as, es, is, os, us, 
 ns, rs, ex. 
 
 All Nouns in a of this Declension are originally Greek, and have al- 
 ways an m before it. There are only two words in c ; Lac, Milk ; and 
 Halec, a Herring. Words in d are proper names of men, and very rare. 
 There are only three words in t, viz. Caput, the Head ; Sinciput, the 
 Fore-head; Occiput, the Hind-head. 
 
 1. The Terminations er, or, os, o, n, 
 
 2. The Terminations io, do, go, as, es, is, ys, ous, 
 
 x, and s after a consonant, 
 5. The Terminations a, c, e, I, men, ar, nr, us, ut, 
 But from these there are many exceptions. 
 
 "} TMasculin 
 ' >■ are -< Feminine 
 it, j ^Neuter. 
 
20 Rudimetits of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Note 1. That for the most part the Genitive hath a syllable more than 
 
 the Nominative ; and where it is otherwise they generally end in e, es or is. 
 Note 2. That whatever letter or syllable comes before is in the Gen. 
 
 must run through the other Cases, except the Ace. and Voc. Sing, of 
 
 Neuters; as, Thema, -atis, -ati, -ate, a Theme; Sanguis, -guinis, Blood; 
 
 Iter, -tineris, a Journey ; Carmen, -minis, a Verse ; Judex, -dicis, a Judge. 
 
 REGULAE. 
 1. Nomina in e, et Neutra 
 
 in al et ar, habent i in Abla- 
 tive 
 
 2. Quae habent e tantum in 
 Ablativo, faciunt Genitivum 
 pluralem in um. 
 
 8. Quae habent i tantum, 
 vel e aut i simul, faciunt ium. 
 
 4. Neutra quae habent e in 
 Ablativo singulari, habent a in 
 Nominativo, Accusativo, et 
 Vocativo plurali. 
 
 5. At quae habent i in Ab- 
 lativo, faciunt ia. 
 
 R ULES. 
 1.- Nouns- in e, and Neuters 
 in al and ar, have i in the Abla- 
 tive. 
 
 2. Those which have e only 
 in the Ablative, make their Ge- 
 nitive plural in um. 
 
 3. Those which have i only, 
 or e and i together, make ium. 
 
 4. Neuters ivhich have e in 
 their Ablative singular have a in 
 the Nominative, Accusative, and 
 Vocative plural. 
 
 5. But those which have i in 
 the Ablative, make ia. 
 
 1. EXCEPTIONS in the Accusative Singular. 
 
 1. Some Nouns in is have im in the Accusative ; as, Vis, vim, Strength ; 
 Tussis, the Cough ; Sitis, Thirst ; Buris, the Beam of a Plough ; Ravis, 
 Hoarseness; Amussis, a. Mason's Rule. To which add names of Rivers 
 in is; as, Tybris, Thamesis, which the Poets sometimes make in in. 
 
 2. Some in is have em or im ; as, Navis, a Ship ; Puppis, the Stern ; 
 Securis, an Ax ; Clavis, a Key ; Febris, a Fever ; Pelvis, a Bason ; Res- 
 tis, a Rope ; Turris, a Tower ; Navem vel Navim, &c. 
 
 2. EXCEPTIONS in the Ablative Singular. 
 
 1. Nouns which have im in the Accusative, have i in the Ablative; as, 
 Vis, vim, vi, &c. These that have em or im have e or i; as, Navis, na- 
 vem vel navim, nave vel navi. 
 
 2. Canalis, Vectis, Bipennis, have i : Avis, Amnis, Ignis, Unguis, Rus, 
 and Imber, with some others, have e or i, but most commonly e. 
 
 5. These Neuters in ar have e; Far, Jubar, Nectar, and Hepar: Sal 
 also has sale. 
 
 5. EXCEPTIONS in the Genitive Plural. 
 • 1. Nouns of one Syllable in as, is, and s, with a Consonant before it, 
 have ium; as, As, assium; Lis, lit ium; Urbs, urbium. 
 
 2. Also Nouns in es and is, not increasing in their Genitive ; as, Vallis, 
 vallium ; Rupes, Rupium. Except, Panis, Canis, Vates and Volucris. 
 
 5. To which add Caro, Cor, Cos,Dos,Mus,Nix,Nox,Linter,Sal,Os,Ossis. 
 
 Note, That when the Genitive Plural ends in ium, the Accusative 
 frequently, instead of es, has eis or is; as, omneis, parteis, or omnis, par- 
 tis, for omnes, partes. 
 
 
Part II.— Chap. L— Of Noun. 21 
 
 Of Greek Nouns, 
 
 1. Greek Nouns have sometimes their Genitive in os : And these are, 
 1. Such as increase their Genitive with d; as, Areas, Arcadis vel Arca- 
 dos, an Arcadian ; Briseis, -eidis vel -eidos, a Woman's Name. 2. Such 
 as increase in os pure, i. e. with a vowel before it ; as, Haeresis, -eos vel 
 -ios, an Heresy. 3. To these add Sphyngos, Strymonos, and Panos. 
 
 Note, That is is more frequent, except in the second kind, and pa- 
 tronymics of the first. 
 
 II. 1. Greek words which increase their Genitive in is or os not pure, 
 (i. e. with a consonant before it) have frequently their Accusative sing, in a, 
 and plural in as; as, Lampas, lampadis, lampada, lampadas ; also Minos, 
 Minois, Minoa ; Tros, Trois, Troa, Troas ; Heros, herois, heroa, heroas. 
 
 2. Words in is or ys, whose Genitive ends in os pure, have their Ac- 
 cusative in im or in, and ym or yn; as, Haeresis, -eos, haeresim or -in ; 
 Chelys, -lyos, a Lute ; chelym or -lyn. Of words in is, which have their 
 Genitive in dis or dos, Masculines have their Accusative for the most part 
 in im or in, seldom in dem, and never in da, that I know of; as Paris, 
 Parim, vel Parin, vel Paridem : Feminines have most commonly dem or 
 da, and seldom im or in ; as, Briseis, Briseidem, vel Briseida. 
 
 III. Feminines in o have us in their Genitive, and o in their other Cases; 
 as, Dido, Didus, Dido, &c. or they may be declined after the Latin form Di- 
 donis, Didoni, &c. which Juno (as being of a Latin original) always follows. 
 
 IV. Greek Nouns in s frequently throw away s in their Vocative ; as, 
 Calchas, Achilles, Paris, Tiphys, Orpheus ; Caleha,Achille, Pari, Tiphy, 
 Orpheu. 
 
 V. Greek Nouns have um (and sometimes on in their Genitive Plural ; 
 as, Epigrammaton, Haereseon, ) and very rarely ium. 
 
 VI. Greek Nouns in ma have most frequently is in their Dative and 
 Ablative plural ; as, Poema, Poematis, because of old they said Poematum, 
 -ti, JBos has bourn, and bubus or bubus. 
 
 QUARTA DECLINATIO. 
 
 M, , Quomodo dignoscitur 
 Quarta Declinatio? 
 
 D, Per Genitivum singula- 
 rem in us, et Dativum in ui. 
 
 M. Quot habet Termina- 
 tiones? 
 
 J). Duas; us et u; ut, 
 
 Fructus, Fmdt; 
 
 THE FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 M. How is the Fourth Declen- 
 sion known ?. 
 
 S. By the Genitive singular 
 in us, and the Dative in ui. 
 
 M. How many Terminations 
 hath it? 
 
 S. Two; us and u; as, 
 Cornu, a Horn, 
 
 
 Fructus, Fruit, Masc, 
 
 Nom, fructus, 
 
 j Gen, fructus, 
 
 ^d J JDat, fructui, 
 
 s§ ^ Ace, fructum, 
 
 Voc, fructus, 
 
 Abl. fructu: 
 
 KJ i 
 
 Mas< 
 
 
 Terminations 
 
 Nom 
 
 fructus, 
 
 us, 
 
 us, 
 
 Gen, 
 
 fructuum, 
 
 us, 
 
 uum, 
 
 Bat, 
 
 fructibus, 
 
 ui, 
 
 ibus, 
 
 Ace, 
 
 fructus, 
 
 um, 
 
 us, 
 
 Voc, 
 
 fructus, 
 
 us, 
 
 us, 
 
 Abl, 
 
 fructibus. 
 
 u; 
 
 ibus. 
 
22 
 
 fcrv 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 Cornu, a Horn, Neut. As Fructus, so Vul- 
 
 Nom. cornu, 
 Gen. cornu, 
 cornu, 
 cornu, 
 cornu, 
 cornu : 
 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 All 
 
 :]..[ 
 
 Nom. cornua, 
 Gen. 
 
 cornuum. 
 
 m 
 
 j Dat. cornibus, 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 cornua, 
 cornua, 
 cornibus. 
 
 tus, the Countenance, 
 Manus, the Hand, Fern. 
 Casus, zFall or Chance. 
 
 As Cornu, so Genu, 
 the Knee; Veru, a Spit ; 
 Tonitru, Thunder. 
 
 
 Nouns'in us of this Declension are generally Masculine, and those in u 
 all Neuter, and indeclinable in the singular number. 
 
 Rule, Some Nouns have ubus in their Dative and Ablative plural, viz. 
 Arcus, a Bow ; Artus, a Joint; Lacus, a Lake ; Acus, a Needle ; Portus, 
 a Port or Harbour; Partus, a Birth ; Tribus, a Tribe ; Veru, a Spit. 
 
 Note, That of old, Nouns of this Declension belonged to the third, 
 and were declined as Grus, grids, a Crane ; thus, Fructus, fructuis, fruc- 
 tui, fructuem, fructue : Fructues, fructuum, fructuibus, fructues, fruc- 
 tues, fructuibus : So that all the cases are contracted, except the Dative 
 sing, and Genitive plural. There are some examples of the Genitive in 
 uis yet extant ; as, on the contrary, there are several of the Dative in i*. 
 
 The blessed Name Iesus Domus, a House, Fern, is thus declined : 
 
 is thus declined : Sing. Plur. 
 
 ''Nom. Iesus, ~\ t°c fNom. domus, Nom. domus, 
 
 Gen. Iesu, | 'js Gen. domus, v. -mi, Gen. domorum, v. -uum, 
 Iesu, I § J Dat. domui, v. -mo, Dat. domibus, 
 Iesum, 1,1 Ace. domum, Ace. domos, v. -us, 
 
 Iesu, h | Voc. dunus, Voc. domus, 
 
 Iesu. J ^ \_Abl. domo : Abl. domibus. 
 
 [Note, That the Genitive domi is only used when it signifies at home; 
 domo the Dative is found in Horace, Epist. I. 10. 15.] 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 AM. 
 
 QUINTA DECLINATIO. 
 
 M. Quomodo dignoscitur 
 Quinta Declinatio ? 
 
 D. Per Genitivum et Dati- 
 vum singular em in ei. 
 
 M. Quot habet Terminatio- 
 nes ? 
 
 D. Unam, nempe, es : ut, 
 
 Res, a Thing, Fern. 
 
 f Nom. res, 
 
 I Gen. rei, 
 ti J Dat. rei, 
 jg ', Ace. rem, 
 
 1 Voc. res, 
 
 I Abl. re: 
 
 THE FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 M. How is the Fifth Declen- 
 sion known f 
 
 S. By the Genitive and Da- 
 tive singular in ei. 
 
 M. How many Terminations 
 hath it? 
 
 S. One, namely, es : as, 
 
 Terminations. 
 
 es, es, 
 
 ei, erum, 
 
 ei, ebus, 
 
 em, es, 
 
 es, es, 
 
 e : ebus. 
 
 f Nom. res, 
 
 I Gen. rerum, 
 . Hat. rebus, 
 £j ] Ace. res, 
 I Voc. res, 
 L Abl. rebus. 
 
Part II.— Chap. I.— Of Noun. 23 
 
 Nouns of the Fifth Declension are not above fifty ; and are all Femi- 
 nine, except Dies, a Day, Masc. or Fern, and Meridies, the Mid-day or 
 Noon, Masc. 
 
 All Nouns of this Declension end in ies, except three ; Fides, Faith ; 
 Spes, Hope ; Res, a Thing. 
 
 And all Nouns in ies, are of the Fifth, except these four; Abies, a Fir-tree; 
 Aries, a Ram ; Paries, a Wall ; and Quies, Rest ; which are of the Third. 
 
 Most Nouns of this Declension want the Genitive, Dative and Abla- 
 tive Plural, and many of 'them want the Plural altogether. 
 General Remarks on l 11 the Declensions. 
 
 1. The Genitive Plural of the first four is sometimes contracted, espe- 
 cially by Poets ; as, Coelicolum, Deum, Mensum, Currum ; for Coelico- 
 larum, Deorum, Mensium, Curruum. 
 
 2. When the Genitive of the Second ends in ii, the last i is sometimes 
 taken away by Poets ; as, Tuguri for TuguriL We read also Aulai for 
 AxdcB in the First, and Fide iaxjidei in the Fifth ; and so of other like words. 
 
 DECLINATIO ADJECTIVORUM. 
 
 Adjectiva sunt vel primae et 
 secundae Declinationis, vel ter- 
 tiae tantum. 
 
 Omnia Adjectiva habentia 
 tres Terminationes, praeter 
 *undecim, sunt primae et se- 
 cundae: At quae unam vel 
 duas Terminationes habent, 
 sunt teniae. 
 
 Adjectiva primae et secun- 
 dae habent Masculinum in us 
 fveler; Foemininum semper 
 in a ; Neutrum semper in um; 
 ut, j ways in um ; as, 
 
 Bonus, bona, bonum, good ; Tener, tenera, tenerum, tender. 
 Si?ig. Bonus, bona, bonum, good. Plur. 
 
 Nom. bon-i, -ae, -a, 
 
 Gen. bon-orum, -arum, -orum, 
 Bat. bon-is, -is, -is, 
 Ace. bon-os, -as, -a, 
 Voc. bon-i, -ae, -a, 
 Abl. bon-is, -is, -is. 
 
 * Viz. acer, alacer, celer, celeber % saluher, volucer, campester, eques- 
 ter, pedester, paluster, silvester; which are of the Third, and have their 
 Masculine in er or is, their Feminine in is, and Neuter in e. 
 
 f For satur, full, was of old saturus. 
 
 THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES, 
 
 Adjectives are eitlier of the 
 first and second Declension, or 
 of the third only. 
 
 All Adjectives having three 
 Terminations, except * eleven, 
 are of the first and second : 
 But those which have one or 
 two Terminations are of the 
 third. 
 
 Adjectives of the first and se- 
 cond have their Masculine in us 
 f or er ; their Feminine al- 
 ways in a ; and their Neuter al- 
 
 Nom 
 
 bon-us, 
 
 -a, 
 
 -um, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 bon-i, 
 
 -ae, 
 
 -h 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bon-o, 
 
 -ae, 
 
 -o, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 bon-um, 
 
 -am, 
 
 -um, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 bon-e, 
 
 -a, 
 
 -um, 
 
 Abl 
 
 bon-o, 
 
 -a, 
 
 -o: 
 
24 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Tener, tenera, tenerum, tender. 
 Sing. 
 N. ten-er, -era, -erum, 
 G. ten-eri, -erae, -eri, 
 JD. ten-ero, -erae, -ero, 
 A. ten-erum, -eram, -erum, 
 V. ten-er, -era, 
 A. ten-ero, -era, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. ten-eri, -erae, -era, 
 G. ten-er orum, -erarum, -erorum, 
 
 JD. ten-eris, -eris, -eris, 
 
 A. ten-eros, -eras, -era, 
 
 erum, V. ten-eri, ' -erae,- -era, 
 
 -ero: A. ten-eris, -eris, -eris. 
 
 Adjectives are declined as three Substantives of the same Terminations 
 and Declensions: As in the examples above, bonus like dominus ; tener 
 like gener ; bona and tenera, like penna; bonum and tenerum, like reg- 
 7ium. Therefore the ancients, as is clear from Varro, lib. o. de Anal, de- 
 clined every Gender separately, and not all three jointly, as we now com- 
 monly do : And perhaps it may not be amiss to follow this method at first, 
 especially if the boy is of a slow capacity. 
 
 Of Adjectives in er, some retain the e, as tener. So miser, -era, -erum, 
 wretched ; liber, -era, -erum, free ; and all compounds in ger, and fer. 
 Others lose it; as, pulcher, pulclira, pulchrum, fair; niger, -gra, -grum, 
 black. 
 
 These following Adjectives, iinus, one ; totus, whole ; solus, alone ; ul- 
 lus, any ; nulfus, none ; alius, another of many ; alter, another, or one of 
 two; neuter, neither; uler, whether, with its compounds ; uterque, both; 
 uterlibet, utervis, winch of the two you please ; alteruter, the one or the 
 other; have their Genitive singular in ins, and Dative in I. 
 
 Adjectiva Teniae Declina- 
 tionis. 
 
 1. Unius Terminationis. 
 
 Adjectives of the Third De- 
 clension. 
 
 1. Of one Termination. 
 
 
 
 Felix, happy. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 N, fel-ix, 
 
 -ix, 
 
 4a, 
 
 iV. fel-ices, 
 
 -ices, 
 
 -icia, 
 
 G. fel-icis, 
 
 -icis, 
 
 -icis, 
 
 G. fel-icium, 
 
 -icium, 
 
 -icium, 
 
 D, fel~ici, 
 
 -ici, 
 
 -ici, 
 
 D. fel-icibus, 
 
 -icibus, 
 
 -icibus, 
 
 A. fel-icem 
 
 , -icem, 
 
 -ix, 
 
 A. fel-ices, 
 
 -ices, 
 
 -icia, 
 
 V. fel-ix, 
 
 -ix, 
 
 -ix, 
 
 V. fel-ices, 
 
 -ices, 
 
 -icia, 
 
 A. fel-ice, vel -ici, Sfc 
 
 
 A. fel-icibus, 
 
 -icibus, 
 
 -icibus. 
 
 2. Duarum Terminationum, \ 2. Of two Terminations. 
 
 
 
 Mitis 
 
 , mite, meek. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 N. mitis, 
 
 mitis, 
 
 mite, 
 
 N. mites, 
 
 mites, 
 
 mitia, 
 
 G. mitis, 
 
 mitis, 
 
 mitis, 
 
 G. mitium, 
 
 mitium, 
 
 mitium, 
 
 JD. miti, 
 
 miti, 
 
 miti, 
 
 D . mitibus, 
 
 mitibus, 
 
 mitibus, 
 
 A. mitem, 
 
 mitem 
 
 mite, 
 
 A. mites, 
 
 mites, 
 
 mitia, 
 
 V. mitis, 
 
 mitis, 
 
 mite, 
 
 V, mites, 
 
 mites, 
 
 mitia, 
 
 A. miti, 
 
 miti, 
 
 miti: 
 
 A, mitibus, 
 
 mitibus, 
 
 mitibus. 
 
Part IL—Chap. I.—Of Noun. 
 Mitior, mitius, meeker. 
 
 25 
 
 Sing. 
 miti-or, -or, -us, 
 miti-oris, -oris, -oris, 
 miti-ori, -ori, -ori, 
 miti-orem, -orem, -us, 
 miti-or, -or, -us, 
 A. miti-or e, vel -ori, fyc. 
 S. Trium Terminationum. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D, 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. miti-or es, -ores, 
 G. miti-orum, -orum, 
 D. miti-oribus, -oribus, 
 A. miti-ores, -ores, 
 
 V. miti-ores, -ores, 
 A. miti-oribus, -oribus, 
 
 | 3. Of three Terminations. 
 
 -ora, 
 
 -orum, 
 
 -oribus, 
 
 -ora, 
 
 -ora, 
 
 -oribus. 
 
 Acer vel acris, acris, acre, sharp. 
 
 Sing, 
 
 N. a-cerv6?/-cris,-cris, -ere, 
 
 G. a-cris, -cris, -cris, 
 
 D. a-cri, -cri, -cri, 
 
 A. a-crem, -crem, -ere, 
 
 V. a-certfe/-cris,-cris, -ere, 
 
 A. a-cri, -cri, -cri: 
 
 KEGULAE. 
 
 1. Adjectiva tertiae Decli- 
 nationis habent e vel i in Ab- 
 lativo singulari. 
 
 2. At si Neutrum sit in e, 
 Ablativus habet i tantum. 
 
 3. Genitivus pluralis desi- 
 nit in turn; et Neutrum No- 
 minated, Accusativi, et Vo- 
 cativi, in ia. 
 
 4. ExcipeComparativa, quae 
 um et a postulant. 
 
 N. a-cres, 
 
 -cres, 
 
 -cria, 
 
 G. a-crium, 
 
 -crium, 
 
 -crium, 
 
 D. a-cribus, 
 
 -cribus, 
 
 -cribus, 
 
 A. a-cres, 
 
 -cres, 
 
 -cria, 
 
 V. a-cres, 
 
 -cres, 
 
 -cria, 
 
 A. a-cribus, 
 
 -cribus, 
 
 -cribus. 
 
 Plur. 
 -cr 
 -cr: 
 -cr 
 -cr 
 -cr 
 -ci 
 
 RULES. 
 
 1 . Adjectives of the third De- 
 clension have e or i in the Abla- 
 tive singular. 
 
 2. But if the Neuter be in e, 
 the Ablative has i only. 
 
 3. The Genitive plural ends 
 in ium; and the Neuter of the 
 Nominative, Accusative, and 
 Vocative, in ia. 
 
 4. Except Comparatives, 
 which require um and a. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. Dives, hospes, sospes, super stes, juvems, senex, and pauper, have e 
 m the Ablative singular, and consequently um in the Genitive plural. 
 
 2. Compos, impos, consors, inops, vigil, supplex, uber, degener,a.ndpuber: 
 also compounds ending in ceps, fex, pes, and corjwr ; as, Princeps, ar- 
 tifex, bipes, tricorpor, have um, not. ium. 
 
 Note, That all these have seldom the Neut. sing, and never almost 
 the Neut. plur. in the Nom. and Ace. To which add memor, which has 
 memori and memorum ; and locuples, which has locupletium ; also, deses, 
 reses, hebes, perpes, praepes, teres, concolor, versicolor ,- which being hard- 
 ly to be met with in the Genitive plural, it is a doubt whether they should 
 have um or ium, though I incline most to the former. 
 
 3. Par has pari, vetus, Vetera and veterum ; plus, which hath only the 
 Neut. in the sing, has plure and plures, plura or pluria, plurium. 
 
 B 
 
Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 26 
 
 Note 1. That Comparatives and Adjectives in ns have more frequent- 
 ly e than i; and Participles, in the Ablatives called Absolute, have ge- 
 nerally e ; as Carolo regnante, not regnanti. 
 
 Note 2. That Adjectives joined with Substantives Neuter, hardly ever 
 have e, but i; as, victrici ferro, not victrice. 
 
 Note 3. That Adjectives, when they are put substantively, have oft- 
 times e; as, qffinis, familiaris, rivalis, sodalis, &c. So £>ar, a match ; 
 as, Cum pare quaeque suo coeunt. Ovid. 
 
 OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 1. The Ordinal and Multiplicative Numbers (see Chap. IX.) are regu- 
 larly declined. The Distributive wants the singular, as also doth the 
 Cardinal, except Unus, which is declined as in p. 24. and has the plural, 
 when joined with a Substantive that wanteth the sing. ; as, JJnae literae, 
 one letter ; Una moenia, one wall : Or when several particulars are 
 considered complexly as making one compound ; as, Uni sex dies, i. e. 
 One space of six days ; Una vestimenta, i. e. One suit of apparel. Plaut. 
 Duo and Tres are declined after this manner : 
 
 
 Nom. tres, tres, tria, 
 Gen. trium, trium, trium, 
 tribus, tribus, tribus, 
 tres, tres, tria, 
 tres, tres, tria, 
 tribus, tribus, tribus. 
 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 [_Abl. 
 
 "Nom. duo, duae, duo, 
 
 Gen. duorum, duarum, duorum, 
 Dat. duobus, duabus, duobus, 
 Ace. duos vel -o, duas, duo, 
 Voc. duo, duae, duo, 
 
 ^Abl. duobus, duabus, duobus. 
 Ambo, both, is declined as duo. 
 
 2. From Quatuor to Centum are all indeclinable. 
 
 3. From Centum to Mille they are declined thus : ducenti, ducentae, 
 ducenta ; ducentorum, ducentarum, ducentorum, &c. 
 
 4. As to Mille, Varro, and all the grammarians after him down to the 
 last age, make it (when it is not before a Gen. plur.) a Substantive inde- 
 clinable in the sing., and in the plur. declined, Millia, millium, millibus ; 
 but when it hath a Substantive joined to it in any other case, they make 
 it an Adjective plur. indeclinable. But Scioppius, and after him Grono- 
 vius, contend, that mille is always an Adjective plural ; and, under that 
 termination, of all cases and genders : But that it hath two Neuters, had 
 mille, and haec millia; that the first is used when one thousand is signi- 
 fied, and the second when more than one ; and that where it seems to be 
 a Substantive governing a Gen. multitudo, numerus, manus, pecunia, 
 pondus, spatium, corpus, or the like, are understood. I own, that for- 
 merly I was of this sentiment ; but now the weighty reasons adduced by 
 the most accurate Perizonius incline me rather to follow the ancient gram- 
 marians. 
 
 After the declension of Substantives and Adjectives separately, it may 
 not be improper to exercise the learner wdth some examples of a Substan- 
 tive and Adjective declined together ; which will both make him more 
 ready in the Declensions, and render the dependence of the Adjective upon 
 the Substantive more familiar to him. Let the examples at first be of the 
 same terminations and declensions ; as, Dominus Justus, a just Lord ; 
 Penna bona, a good Pen ; Ingenium eximium, an excellent wit. After- 
 wards let them be different in one or both ; as, Puer probus, a good boy ; 
 Lectio facilis, an easy Lesson; Poeta optimus, an excellent Poet; Fruc- 
 tus dulcis, sweet fruit; Dies faustus, a happy Day, &c. And if the boy 
 has as yet been taught writing, let him write them either in the school or 
 ai home, to be revised by the master next day. 
 
Part II.— Chap. I.— Of Noun. 
 
 27 
 
 OF IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 
 These (for we cannot here make a full enumeration of them) may be 
 reduced to the following Scheme : 
 
 P 
 
 O 
 
 < 
 
 D 
 O 
 N 
 
 > 
 M 
 
 1. Number^ 
 
 CSing. as, Liberi, Minac, Anna. 
 1 £Plur. as, ^gr, Humus, Aevum. 
 
 1. Gender, * 
 
 2. Number, 
 5. Case, 
 
 "Nom. and Voc.' 
 Gen. 
 
 'vot 
 
 Gen. Dat and Abl. Plural, as, Mel. 
 r Three; as, Dica, dicam, dicas. 
 or having only 4. Two ; as, Suppetiae, Suppetias. 
 
 One ; as, Diets, Inficias, Noctu. 
 j'Masc. as, Caetera, caeterum. 
 
 Fern, as, Quisguis, quicquid. 
 
 Neut as, Compos. 
 
 Masc. and Fem. as, Plus. 
 
 Mase. and Neut. as, Sicelis. 
 
 Fem. and Neut. as, Tros. 
 
 Sing, as, Centum. 
 
 Plur. as, Unusquisque. 
 J Voc. as, Nullus. 
 £Dat and Abl. as, Tantundem. 
 ^or having the Vocative only ; as, Made, Macti. 
 
 n 
 
 el 
 
 
 Masc' 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Neut 
 
 >M 
 
 In Declension, be- 
 ing of the 
 
 'Neut as, Maenalus, Maenala. 
 Masc. and Neut as, Locus,-ci, and ca. 
 Neut. as, Carbasus, Carbasa. 
 Masc. as, Coelum, coeli. 
 Fem. as, Epulum, epulae. 
 Mas. etNeut. &s,Fraenum,-ni,8c-na. 
 2. and 1. as, Delictum, deliciae. 
 2. and 4. as, Laurus, -ri, and -rits. 
 ,3. and 2. as, Fhs, -s/$; -sa, -sorum. 
 
 2. Too little, as, hide- C altogether; as, Fas. 
 clinables, \m the sing, as, Cornu. 
 
 In Termination 
 In Gender 
 In Declension 
 
 "only; as, Helena, Helene. 
 | and Gender; as, JVgnws, lignum. 
 ) and Decl. as, Materia, mater ies. 
 _Gend. and Decl. as, Aether, aethra. 
 
 only i as, hie et hoc Valgus. 
 "only; as, Fames, famis, of the 3d; 
 \ Ablative, fame, of the 5th, because 
 I the last Syllable is always long with 
 [ the Poets. 
 
 Note 1. That the Defective Nouns are not so numerous as is com- 
 monly believed. 
 
 B 2 
 
23 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Note 2. That those which vary too little, may be ranked under the 
 Defective; and those which vary too much, under the Redundant ; e. g. 
 Coeli, coelorum, comes not from Coelum, but from Coelus ; and Vasa, 
 Vasorum, not from Vas, Vasts, but from Vasum, Vast: But custom, 
 which alone gives laws to all languages, has dropped the Singular, and re 
 tained the Plural ; and so of others. 
 
 DE COMPARATIONE. 
 
 JT4*. Quot sunt Gradus Coin- 
 parationis ? 
 
 D. Tres; Positivus, Corn-pa- 
 rativus, et Superlativus, 
 
 M, Quotae Declinationis 
 sunt hi Gradus? 
 
 D, Positivus est Adjectivum 
 Primae et Secundae Declina- 
 tionis, vel Tertiae tantum; 
 Comparativus est semper Ter- 
 tiae; Superlativus semper Pri- 
 mae et Secundae. 
 
 M. Unde formatur Compa- 
 rativus Gradus? 
 
 D, A proximo Casu Positivi 
 in i, addendo pro Masculino et 
 Foeminino Syllabam or, et us 
 pro Neutro : ut, 
 
 OF COMPARISON. 
 
 M. How many Degrees of Com- 
 parison are there? 
 
 S. Three; the Positive, Com- 
 parative, and Superlative. 
 
 M. Of what Declension are 
 these Degrees ? 
 
 S. The Positive is an Adjec- 
 tive of the First and Second 
 Declension, or Third only ; the 
 Comparative is always of the 
 Third; the Superlative always 
 of the First and Second, 
 
 M. Whence is the Compara- 
 tive Degree formed ? 
 
 S. From the next Case of the 
 
 Positive in i, by adding for the 
 
 Masculine and Feminine the 
 
 j Syllable or, and us for the Neu- 
 
 | ter; as, 
 Doctus, learned; Gen. docti, doctior, et doctius, more learned. 
 Mitis, meek; Dat. mitt; mitior, et mitius, more meek. 
 
 M. Whence is the Superla- 
 tive formed ? 
 
 S. 1. If the Positive ends in 
 er, the Superlative is formed by 
 adding rimus : as, 
 Pulcher, fair: p.ulcher rimus, most fair; Pauper, poor; pau- 
 perrimus, most poor. 
 
 M, Unde formatur Super- 
 lativus? 
 
 D. 1. Si Positivus desinat 
 in er, Superlativus formatur 
 addendo rimus: ut, 
 
 2. Si Positivus non desinat 
 in er, Superlativus formatur a 
 proximo Casu in i, addendo 
 ssimus: ut, 
 
 2. If the Positive ends not in 
 er, the Superlative is formed 
 from the next Case in i, by ad- 
 ding ssimus : as, 
 
Part II.— Chap. I.—Of Noun. 29 
 
 Gen. docti ; doctissimus, most learned : Dat. miti ; mitissi- 
 mus, most meek. 
 
 By Grammatical Comparison we understand three Adjective Nouns, 
 of which the two last are formed from the first, and import comparison 
 with it, that is, the heightening or lessening of its signification. 
 
 Consequently those Adjectives only which are capable of having their 
 signification increased or diminished, can be compared. 
 
 The POSITIVE signifies the quality of a thing simply and absolute- 
 ly ; as, Durus, hard ; Parvus, little. 
 
 The COMPARATIVE heightens or lessens that quality ; as, Bwrior, 
 harder ; Minor, less. 
 
 The SUPERLATIVE heightens or lessens it to a very high or very low 
 degree ; as, Durissimus, hardest, or most hard ; Minimus, very little, or least. 
 
 The Positive hath various terminations ; the Comparative ends always 
 in or and us ; the Superlative always in mus, ma, mum. 
 
 [The Positive, properly speaking, is no degree of comparison, for it 
 does not compare things together : However, it is accounted one, because 
 the other two are founded upon and formed from it.] 
 
 The sign of the Comparative in our language is the syllable er added 
 to an Adjective, or the word more put before it. 
 
 The sign of the Superlative is the syllable est added to an Adjective, 
 or the words very ox most put before it. 
 
 Note, That when the Positive is a long word, or would otherwise sound 
 harsh, by having er or est added to it, we commonly make the Compara- 
 tive by the word more, and the Superlative by most or very put before it. 
 
 And for the like reason, the Latin Comparative is sometimes made by 
 magis, and the Superlative by valde or maxime, put before the Positive. 
 And these are particularly used when the positive ends in us, with a vowel 
 before it ; as, Pius, godly ; Arduus, high ; Idoneus, fit ; though not always. 
 
 IRREGULAR COMPARISONS. 
 
 1. Bonus, melior, optimus: Good, better, best. 
 
 Malus, pejor, pessimus : Evil, worse, worst. 
 
 Magnus, major, maximus : Great, greater, greatest. 
 Parvus, minor, minimus: Little, less, least. 
 
 Multus, plurimus; multa, plurima; multum, plus, plurimum : much, 
 more, most. 
 
 2. Facilis, easy ; Humilis, low ; Similis, like ; make their Superlative 
 by changing is into limus ; thus, facillimus, humillimus, simillimus. 
 
 3. Exter, outward; Citer, hither; Superus, above; Inferus, below, 
 Posterns, behind ; have regular Comparatives : But their Superlatives 
 are, extremus, or extimus, uttermost ; citimus, hithermost ; supremus, or 
 summus, uppermost, highest, last ; infimus, or imus, lowest ; jwstremus, 
 or postumus, latest or last. 
 
 4. Compounds in dicus, loquus, jicus, and volus, have entior and £n- 
 tissimus ; as, maledicus, one that raileth ; magniloquus, one thatboasteth ; 
 beneficus, beneficent ; malevolus, malevolent. But these seem rather to 
 come from Participles or Nouns in ens. Besides, the Comparatives and 
 Superlatives of Adjectives derived from loquor and facio are very rare, 
 and Terence has mirificissimus. and Plautus has mendaciloquius. 
 
 B3 
 
30 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 5. Prior, former, has jirimus, first ; Ulterior, farther, ultimus, farthest 
 vr last ; Propior, nearer, proximv -, nearest or next ; Ocior, swifter, ocis- 
 simus, swiftest ; their Positives bei ig out of use, or quite wanting. Proxi- 
 mus has also another Comparative formed from it, viz. proximior. 
 
 6. There are also a great many other Adjectives capable of having their 
 signification increased, which yet want one or more of these degrees of 
 comparison ; as, Almus, gracious, without Comparative and Superlative ; 
 Ingens, great; ingentior, greater, without the Superl. ; Sacer, holy; sa- 
 cerrimus, most holy, without the Compar. ; Anterior, former, without 
 Posit, and Superl. 
 
 ^ These three Degrees of Comparison being nothing else but three 
 distinct Adjectives, may be declined either severally each by itself, or 
 jointly together ; respect still being had to their Declensions. But the 
 first way is much easier, and will answer all the purposes of Comparison 
 as well as the other. 
 
 CAP. II. 
 
 DE PRONOMINE. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Pronominaf 
 simplicia ? 
 
 D. Octodecim; Ego, Tu, 
 Sui; Hie, Ipse, Iste, Hie, Is, 
 Quis, Qui; Meus, Tuus, Suus, 
 Koster, Fester; Nostras, Ves- 
 tras, et Cujas. 
 
 ^f Ex his, tria sunt Substan- 
 tiva, Ego, Tu, Sui; reliqua 
 quindecim sunt Adjectiva. 
 
 Ego 
 f Nom. ego, I, 
 i Gen. mei, of me. 
 t& I Dat, mihi, to me, 
 H i Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 All. me, with me : J 
 
 Tu, 
 
 sa 
 
 ♦ l.'.'l 
 
 "* MM 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 OF PRONOUN. 
 
 M. How many simple j- Pro- 
 nouns are there? 
 
 S. Eighteen; Ego, Tu, Sui; 
 Ille, Ipse, Iste, Hie, Is, Quis, 
 Qui ; Meus, Tuus, Suus, Nos- 
 ter, Vester ; Nostras, Vestras, 
 and Cujas. 
 
 ^[ Of these, three are Sub- 
 stantives, Ego, Tu, Sui ; the 
 other fifteen are Adjectives. 
 
 I. 
 
 Nom. nos, we, 
 
 Gen. nostrum v. nostri, of us t 
 
 Dat. nobis, to us, 
 
 Ace. nos, us, 
 
 I Voc. 
 
 L AM. nobis, with us. 
 
 Thou. 
 
 
 " N. tu, thou, 
 G. tui, of thee, 
 D. tibi, to thee, 
 A. te, thee, 
 V. tu, O thou, 
 A. te, with thee : 
 
 " N. vos, ye, you, 
 
 G. vestrum, v. vestri, of y<>u y 
 
 D. vobis, to you, 
 
 A. vos, you, 
 
 V. vos, ye, you, 
 ^ A. vobis, with you. 
 
 f See Chap. IX. 
 
IP 
 
 S3 
 
 Part II. — Chap. II. — Of Pronoun. 
 Sui, of himself, of herself of itself 
 
 31 
 
 G. sui, of himself, &c. 
 D. sibi, to himself, 
 A. se, himself, 
 
 V. 
 
 A. se, with himself: 
 
 1, 
 
 G. sui, of themselves, 
 D. sibi, to themselves, 
 A. se, themselves, 
 
 V. 
 
 A. se, with themselves. 
 
 A PRONOUN is an irregular kind of Noun : Or, it is a part of 
 Speech, which has respect to, and supplies the place of a Noun ; as, in- 
 stead of your name, I say, Tu, Thou or You ; instead of Jacobus fecit, 
 James did it, I say, Hie fecit, He did it, viz. James. 
 
 Note 1. That the Dat. mihi is sometimes by the poets contracted into mi. 
 
 Note 2. That of old the Gen. plur. of ego was nostrorum and nos- 
 trarura ; of tu, vestrorum and vestrarum, (of which there are several ex- 
 amples in Plautus and Terence) which were afterwards contracted into 
 nostrum and vestrum. 
 
 Note 5. That we use nostrum and vestiwm after Numerals, Partitives, 
 Comparatives, and Superlatives ; and nostri and vestri after other Nouns, 
 and Verbs ; though there want not some examples of these last with no- 
 strum and vestrum, even in Cicero himself, as Vossius shows. 
 Ille, ilia, illud; He, she, that or it. 
 
 ■ 
 
 iV. ille, ilia, illud, 
 G. illius, illius, illius, 
 D.illi, illi, illi, 
 A. ilium, illam, illud, 
 V. ille, ilia, illud, 
 [ A. illo, ilia, illo: 
 
 N. illi, illae, ilia, 
 G. illorum, illarum, illorum, 
 D. illis, illis, illis, 
 A. illos, illas, ilia, 
 V. illi, illae, ilia, 
 
 L A. illis, illis, illis. 
 
 Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, he himself, she herself, it itself ; and iste, 
 ista, istud, he, she, that ; are declined as ille; save only that 
 ipse hath ipsum in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. sing. Neuter. 
 Hie, haec, hoc; This. 
 
 Si 
 
 * 1 
 
 | A T . hie, haec, hoc, 
 
 G. hujus, hujus, hujus, 
 
 Z). huic, huic, huic, 
 
 A. hunc, hanc, hoc, 
 
 • V. hie, haec, hoc, 
 
 L A. hoc, hac, hoc : 
 
 r -ZV. hi, hae, haec, 
 
 G. horum, hai'um, horum, 
 
 D. his, 
 A. hos, 
 F.hi, 
 A. his, 
 
 Is, ea, id; He, she, it or that. 
 
 his, 
 has, 
 hae, 
 his, 
 
 •1 
 
 r n. is, 
 
 ea, 
 
 G. ejus, 
 
 ejus, 
 
 D.ei, 
 
 ei, 
 
 I A. eum, 
 
 earn 
 
 jr.— 
 
 L A. eo, 
 
 
 ea, 
 
 id, 
 ejus, 
 ei, 
 id, 
 
 ** 
 
 ># 
 
 N. ii, eae, 
 
 G. eorum, earum, 
 Z). iis vel eis, &c. 
 ^ A. eos, eas, 
 
 I F -. 
 
 ^ ^4. iis vel eis, &c. 
 B4 
 
 his, 
 haec, 
 haec, 
 his. 
 
 ea, 
 eorum. 
 
S2 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Quis, quae, quod vel quid? Who, which, what? 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 N. quis, quae, quod v. quid, N, qui, quae, quae, 
 
 G. cujus, cujus, cujus, G. quorum, quarum, quorum, 
 
 D. cui, cui, cui, D. queis vel quibus,&c. 
 
 A. quem, quam, quod v. quid, ^4. quos, quas, quae, 
 
 A. quo, qua, quo: A. queis iW quibus,&c. 
 Qui, quae, quod; W^o, which, that. 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 N. qui, quae, quod, N. qui, quae, quae, 
 
 G. cujus, cujus, cujus, G. quorum, quarum, quorum, 
 
 D. cui, cui, cui, D. queis vel quibus,&c. 
 
 A. quem, quam, quod, A. quos, quas, quae, 
 
 A. quo, qua, quo: A. queis vel quibus,&c. 
 
 Meus, my or mine ; Tuns, thy or thine ; jSW-j, his own, her 
 own, its own, their own ; are declined like Bonus, -a, -urn : 
 and Koster, our or ours ; Vester, your or yours ; like Pulcher, 
 -chra, -chrum, of the first and second Declension. But Tuus, 
 Suu-s, and Vester want the Vocative ; Koster and Mens have 
 it, in which this last hath mi, and sometimes meus, in the Masc. 
 singular. 
 
 Nostras, of our country ; Vestras, of your country ; Cujas, 
 of what or which country ; are declined like Felix, of the 
 third Declension, Gen. Xostratis, Dat. Nostrati. 
 
 Note 1. That all Nouns and Pronouns which one cannot call upon 
 or address himself unto, want the Vocative. In consequence of which 
 rule, many Nouns, as, melius, nemo, qualis, quantns, quot, Sec. and several 
 Pronouns, as, ego, sui, quis, &c. want the Vocative ; but not so many, 
 either of the one or the other, as is commonly taught. For which reason, 
 we have given Vocatives to ille, ipse, hie, and idem, therein following the 
 judgment of the great Vossius, Messieurs de Port Royal, and Johnson, 
 which they support by the following authorities : 
 
 Esto nunc, Sol, testis, et haec mihi terra precanti. Virg. Aen. 12. 
 
 Tu mihi libertas ilia paterna vale. Tibul. lib. 1. El. 4. 
 
 O nox ilia, quae pene aeternas huic urbi tenebras attulisti. Cic.pro Flac. 
 
 Ipse meas aether accipe summe preces. Ovid, in Ibin. 
 And the Vocative of Idem seems to be confirmed by that of Ovid. Met. 15. 
 
 ■ quique fuisti 
 
 Hippolytus, dixit, nunc idem Virbius esto. 
 Though all authors before them will only allow four Pronouns, viz. Tu, 
 Mens, Noster, and Nostras, to have the Vocative. 
 
 Note 2. That Qui is sometimes used for Quis ; as, Cic. Qui tantus 
 fuit labor ? Ter. Qui erit rumor populi, si id feceris ? 
 
Part IL—Chap. II*— Of Pronoun. 33 
 
 Note 3. That Quod, with its compounds, aliquod, quodvis, quoddam, 
 &c. are used when they agree with a Substantive in the same Case ; Quid, 
 with its compounds, aliquid, quidvis, quiddam, &c. either have no Sub- 
 stantive expressed, or govern one in the Genitive : Whence it is that these 
 last are commonly reckoned Substantives. But that quid, as well as quod, 
 is originally an Adjective, its signification plainly shows ; otherwise we 
 shall make multum, plus, tantum, quantum, &c. also Substantives, when 
 they govern the Genitive ; which yet most grammarians agree to be Ad- 
 jectives, having the common word negotium understood. 
 
 Note 4. That Qui the Relative hath oftentimes qui in the Ablative, 
 and that (which is remarkable) in all Genders and Numbers, as Mr. John- 
 son evinces by a great many examples out of Plautus and Terence ; to 
 which he might have added one out of C. Nepos, in. 3. 
 
 Note 5. That nostras, vestras, and cujas, are declined like Gentile or 
 National Nouns in as of the Third Declension, in imitation of which 
 they are formed ; as, Arpinas, Fidenas, Privernas, a man, woman, or 
 thing, of or belonging to the towns of Arpinum, Fidenae, or Privernum, 
 and may have the Neuter as well as these : For as Cic. has Iter Arpinas, 
 and Liv. Bellum Privernas ; so Colum. has Arbustum nostras, and Cic. 
 Nostratia verba ; contrary to what Linacer teaches. 
 
 [I pass over taking notice, that in old authors, especially Plautus, we 
 find quis and quisquis sometimes of the Fern. Gender ; mis and tis, for 
 viei and tui ; hisce for hi ; hibus, ibus, for his, Us ; illae, ipsae, istae, 
 quae, in the Gen. or Dat. Sing. Fem. ; em for eum ; istes for istos; 
 quoius, quoi, for cujus, cui, because they are extraordinary.] 
 
 OF COMPOUND PRONOUNS. 
 
 I. Some are compounded of Quis and Qui, with some other word or 
 syllable. In these, quis is sometimes the first and sometimes the last part 
 of the word compounded : But qui is always the first. 
 
 1. The compounds of quis, when it is put first, are, quisnam, who? 
 quispiam, quisquam, any one ; quisque, every one ; quisquis, whosoever : 
 Which are thus declined : Nom. Gen. Dat. 
 
 Quisnam, quaenam, quodnam vet quidnam ; cujusnam, cuinam. 
 
 Quispiam, quaepiam, quodpiam vel quidpiam ; cujuspiam, cuipiam. 
 
 Quisquam, quaequam, quodquam vel quidquam ; cujusquam, cuiquam. 
 
 Quisque, quaeque, quodque vel quidque ; cujusque, cuique. 
 
 Quisquis, ■ quidquid vel quicquid ; cujuscujus, cuicui. 
 
 And so forth in their other Cases, according to the simple quis. But 
 quisquis has no Feminine at all, and the Neuter only in the Nom. and 
 Ace. Quisquam has also quicquam for quidquam. Ace. quenquam, 
 without the Fem. The Plural is scarcely used. 
 
 2. The compounds of quis, when it is put last, are, aliquis, some ; ec- 
 quis, who ? To which some add, nequis, siquis, and numquis ; but these 
 are more frequently read separately, ne quis, siquis, num quis. They are 
 thus declined : Nom. Gen. Dat. 
 
 Aliquis, aliqua, aliquod vel aliquid ; alicujus, alicui. 
 
 Ecquis ecqua vel ecquae, ecquod vel ecquid ; eccujus, eccui. 
 Si quis, si qua, si quod vel si quid ; si cujus, si cui. 
 
 Ne quis, ne qua, ne quod vel ne quid ; ne cujus, ne cui. 
 
 Num quis,num qua, num quod vel num quid; num cujus,numcui. 
 
 Note, That these, and only these, have qua in the Nom. Sing. Fem, 
 and Nom. and Ace. Plur. Neut. 
 
 B5 
 
34 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 3. The compounds of qui, are quicunque, whosoever ; quidam, some ; 
 quilibet, quivis, any one, whom you please ; and are thus declined : 
 Nom. Gen. Dat. 
 
 Quicunque, quaecunque, quodcunque ; cujuscunque, cuicunque. 
 
 Quidam, quaedam, quoddam vel quiddam ; cujusdam, cuidam. 
 
 Quilibet, quaelibet, quodlibet vel quidlibet ; cujuslibet, cuilibet. 
 
 Quivis, quaevis, quodvis t;^quidvis; cujusvis, cuivis. 
 
 Some of these are twice compounded ; as, ecquisnam, who ? unusquis- 
 que, every one. The first is scarce declined beyond its Nom, and the 
 second wants the Plur. 
 
 Note 1. That all these compounds want the Vocative, except quisque, 
 aliquis, quilibet, unusquisque, and perhaps some others. Vid. Voss. p. 335. 
 
 Note 2. That all these compounds have seldom or never queis, but 
 quibus, in their Dat. and Abl. Plur. 
 
 Note 3. That quidam hath quendam, quandam, quoddam vel quid- 
 dam, in the Ace. Sing, and quorundam, quarundam, quorundam, in the 
 Gen. Plural, n being put instead of m for the better sound, as it is for the 
 same reason in the Cases of Idem. 
 
 II. Some reckon among Compound Pronouns, ego, tu, and sui, with 
 ipsi ; but in the best books they are generally read separately; which 
 seems necessary, because of te ipse and se ipse where the two words are 
 of different Cases. 
 
 III. Is is compounded with the syllable dem, and contracted into idem, 
 the same ; which is thus declined : 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 Nom. idem, eadem, mem, Nom. iidem, eaedem, eadem, 
 
 Gen. ejusdem, ejusdem, ejusdem, Gen. eorundem, earundem, eorundem, 
 Dat* eidem, eidem, eidem, Dat. eisdem vel iisdem, &c. 
 Ace. eundem, eandem, idem, Ace. eosdem, easdem, eadem, 
 Voc. idem, eadem, idem, Voc. iidem, eaedem, eadem, 
 
 Abl. eodem, eadem, eodem : Abl. eisdem vel iisdem, &c. 
 
 IV. Most of the other Compound Pronouns are only to be found in 
 certain Cases and Genders ; as, 
 
 1. Of iste and hie is compounded, Nom. isthic, isthaec, isthoc vel ist- 
 huc. Ace. isthunc, isthanc, isthoc vel isthuc. Abl. isthoc, isthac, isthoc. 
 Nom. and Ace. Plur. Neut. isthaec. 
 
 2. Of ecce and is is compounded eccum, eccam ; Plur. eccos, eccas : 
 And from ecce and ille, ellum, ellam ; ellos, ellas, in the Accusatives. 
 
 3. Of modus and is, hie, iste, and quis, are compounded these Genitives, 
 ejusmodi, hujusmodi, istiusmodi, cujusmodi ; and sometimes with the 
 syllable ce put in the middle, ejuscemodi, hujuscemodi, &c. 
 
 4. Of cum, and these Ablatives, me, te, se, nobis, vobis, qui or quo, and 
 quibus, are compounded, mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, qui- 
 cum or quocum, and quibuscum. 
 
 5. To these add some Pronouns compounded with these syllabical ad- 
 jections, met, te, ce, pte, cine, to make their signification more pointed 
 and emphatical ; as, egomet, tute, hujusce, meapte, hiccine. 
 
 REMARKS ON ENGLISH PRONOUNS. 
 1. In the Nominative, or Foregoing State, (as the English Gramma- 
 rians call it) we use I, Thou, He, She, We, Ye, They, and Who ; But 
 in the other Cases, (which they name the Following State) we use Me, 
 Thee, Him, Her, Us, You, Them, and Whom. 
 
Part II. — Chap. II. — Of Pronoun. 35 
 
 2. When we speak of a Person, we use Who and Whom, whether we 
 ask a question or not ; as, Who did it ? The man who did it. But if we 
 speak of a Thing, with a question, we use What; as, What book is that? 
 Without a question, we use Which ; as, The book which you gave me. 
 And then it is frequently understood ; as, The book you gave me. 
 
 Note, That What is often used, even without a question, instead of The 
 thing which, or That which ; as, I know what you design, i. e. The thing 
 which, or That which you design. As, on the contrary, when it refers to 
 some particular thing mentioned before, we make use of Which, even with 
 a question ; as, Give me the book ? Which book ? Which of the books ? 
 
 3. This makes in the Plural These, and That makes Those. 
 
 Note, That That is frequently used instead of Who, Whom, or Which; 
 as, The man that told you, The man that we saw, The book that I lent you. 
 
 4. We use My, Thy, Her, Our, Your, Their, when they are joined 
 with Substantives, or the word Own ; and Mine, Thine, Hers, Ours, 
 Yours, Theirs, when the Substantive is left out or understood; as, My 
 book, This book is mine, &c. 
 
 Note, That with Own, or a Substantive beginning with a vowel, we 
 sometimes use Mine and Thine ; as, My eye, or Mine eye ; Thy own, or 
 Thine own. 
 
 5. We often use Here, There, Where, compounded with these Parti- 
 cles, Of, By, Upon, About, In, With, instead of This, That, Which, and 
 What, with these same Particles ; as, Hereof, Hereby, Hereupon, Here- 
 abouts, Herein, Herewith ; for Of this, By this, Upon this, About this 
 place, In this, With this, &c. 
 
 6. Whose and Its are Genitives, instead of Of whom, Of it ; and it is 
 a fault to use Its for 'Tis or It is, as some do. 
 
 CAP. III. 
 
 DE VERBO. 
 
 M. Quomodo declinatur Ver- 
 bum ? 
 
 D. Per Voces, Modos, Tem- 
 pora, Numeros, et Personas. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Voces ? 
 
 7). Duae ; Ac+iva et Passiva. 
 M. Quot suU Modi ? 
 
 D. Quatuor ; Indicative, 
 Subjunctivus, Imperativus, et In- 
 Jinitivus. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Numeri ? 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF VERB. 
 
 M. How is a Verb declined? 
 
 S. By Voices, Moods Reuses, 
 Numbers, and Persons. 
 
 M. How many Voices are 
 there f 
 
 S. Two; the Active and 
 Passive. 
 
 M. How many Moods are 
 there t 
 
 S. Four; Indicative, Sub- 
 junctive, Imperative, and In- 
 finitive. 
 
 M. How many Numbers are 
 there ? 
 
 Be 
 
36 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 D. Duo ; Singularis et Plu- 
 ralism 
 
 M. Quot sunt Tempora? 
 
 D. Quinque; Praesens,Prae- 
 teritum-imperfectum, Prar *eri- 
 tum-perfectum, Praeteruam- 
 plusquam-perfectum, et Futu- 
 rum. 
 
 M. Quot sunt Personae ? 
 
 D. Tres; prima, Secunda, 
 Tertia. 
 
 S. Two ; Singular and Plu- 
 ral. 
 
 M. How many Tenses are 
 there ? 
 
 S. Five; The Present, the 
 Preter-imperfect, the Preter- 
 perfect, the Preter-pluperfect, 
 and the Future. 
 
 M. How many Persons are 
 there ? 
 
 S. Three ; First, Second, 
 Third. 
 
 A VERB is a Part of Speech which signifies to be, to do, or to suffer: 
 Or, a Verb is that Part of Speech which expresses what is affirmed or 
 said of things. 
 
 A Verb may be distinguished from any other part of Speech these two 
 ways : — 1. A Verb being the most necessary and essential part of a sen- 
 tence, without which it cannot subsist, whatever word with a Substantive 
 Noun makes full sense, or a sentence, is a Verb ; and that which does 
 not make full sense with it, is not a Verb. 2. Whatever word with HE 
 or IT SHx^LL before it, makes sense, is a Verb ; otherwise not. 
 
 I. In most Verbs there are two forms of VOICES ; the Active, end- 
 ing in o, and the Passive in or. The former expresses what is done by the 
 Nominative or Person before it ; the latter what is suffered by or done to 
 the Nominative or Person before it ; as, Amo, I love ; Amor, I am loved. 
 
 II. The Moods are divided into Finite and Infinite. The first three 
 viz. the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Imperative, are called Finite, be- 
 cause they have certain fixed terminations, answering to certain persons 
 both singular and plural. The last is called Infinitive, or Infinite, be- 
 cause it is not confined to one Number or Person more than another. 
 
 1. The Indicative Mood affirms or denies positively; as, Amo, I love; 
 Won amo, I do not love : Or else asks a question ; as, An amas ? Dost 
 thou love ? Annon amas ? Dost thou not love ? 
 
 2. The Subjunctive Mood generally depends upon another Verb in the 
 same sentence, either going before or coming after; as, Si me ametis, 
 praecepta mea servate, If ye love me, keep my commandments. 
 
 [This Mood is commonly branched out into three Moods, viz. the Op- 
 tative, the Subjunctive more strictly taken, arid the Potential. 1. It is 
 called Optative when a word importing a wish, as, Utinam, Would to 
 God, si, if, goes before it. 2. It is named Subjunctive, when it is 
 subjoined to some other Conjunction or Adverb, or to Interrogatives be- 
 coming Indefinites. (See Chap. IX.) 3. It is called Potential, when 
 with the simple affirmation of the Verb is also signified some modification 
 or affection of it, such as a Power, Possibility, Liberty, Duty, Will, &c. 
 the signs whereof in our language are, May, Can, Might, Could, Would, 
 Should, and Had,^?* Would have or Should have ; as, They had repent- 
 ed, for would have. But because the terminations of these Moods are 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 37 
 
 the same we have comprehended them all under one, viz. the Subjunc- 
 tive, to which, with small difficulty, they may be reduced. Otherwise, if 
 we will constitute as many Moods as there are various modifications where- 
 with a Verb or affirmation can be affected, we must multiply them to a far 
 greater number, and so we shall have a Promissive, Hortative, Precative, 
 Concessive, Mandative, Interrogative, Mood ; nay, a Volitive and Debi- 
 tive, which are commonly included in the Potential. As for the Optative, 
 it is plain that the wish is not in the Verb itself, which signifies only the 
 matter of it, or what is wished, but in the Verb Opto, which is under- 
 stood, with ut, uti, or utinam, which really signify no more but that. 
 And it is very probable that, in like manner, some Verb, or other word, 
 may also be understood to what is called the Potential Mood, such as ita 
 est, res ita est, fieri potest ut, &c. as Vossius, Sanctius, Perizonius, and 
 others, do contend, though Mr Johnson is of another opinion.] 
 
 3. The Imperative Mood commands, exhorts, or entreats; as, Ama, 
 Love thou. 
 
 4. The Infinitive Mood expresses the signification of the Verb in ge- 
 neral, and is Englished by TO ; as, Amare, To love. 
 
 III. The Tenses are either Simple or Compound. The Simple Ten- 
 ses are, the Present, the Preter-perfect, and Future. 
 
 1. The Present ^ C Present 
 
 2. The Preter-perfect > Tense speaks of Time now -< Past. 
 
 3. The Future j L.To come. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are, the Preter- imperfect and the Preter-plu- 
 perfect. 
 
 4. The Preter-imperfect refers to some past time, and imports that the 
 thing was present and unfinished then ; as, Amabam, I did love, viz. then. 
 
 5. The Preter-pluperfect refers to some past time, and imports that the 
 thing was past at or before that time ; as, Scripseram epistolam, I had 
 written a letter, i. e. before that time. 
 
 There is also a Compound Future Tense, called the Future- perfect, 
 or Exact, which refers to some time yet to come, and imports that a 
 thing as yet future shall be past and finished at or before that time ; as, 
 Cum coenavero, tu leges ; When I shall have supped, i. e. after supper, you 
 shall read. This Future is only in the Subjunctive Mood, and the sign of 
 it is Shall have ; as the other Future, called the Future-imperfect, is only 
 in the Indicative, which, when joined with another Future, imports that 
 two things yet future shall be cotemporary, or exist at one time ; as, Cum 
 coenabo, tu leges; When I shall sup, i. e. in time of supper, you shall read. 
 
 [And not only the Tenses, but even the Moods themselves, may be di- 
 vided into Simple and Compound. I call the Indicative a Sample Mood, 
 because it simply affirms something of its Person or Nominative ; but the 
 other three Moods I call Compound, because they have some other ideas 
 or modifications of our thoughts superadded to the simple signification of 
 the Verb ; such as, a Command, a Desire, Prohibition, Possibility, Liber- 
 ty, W r ill, Duty, Wish, Concession, Supposition, Condition, Purpose, &c. 
 These modifications are either really included in the Verb; as, a Com 
 mand, &c. in the Imperative, and, according to Johnson, Power, Will, 
 Duty, &c. in the Mood called Potential ; or closely interwoven with it 
 by the help of a Conjunction. Adverb, or other Verb, expressed or under- 
 stood : And because these also generally denote time, they very frequently 
 
38 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 make all the Tenses of these Moods to become Compound Tenses. For, 
 with respect to their execution, they are generally future ; but with res- 
 pect to their Modal signification, they may fall under any of the other 
 distinctions of time as well as the future. Thus, for instance, Lege, Read 
 thou, with respect to its Execution, is Future ; but with respect to the 
 Command, it is Present. Again, in Legam, I may or can read, the Action, 
 (if done at all) must be Future ; but the Liberty or Possibility is Present : 
 And so of others. Now, as it seems evident, that from these modifications 
 of the Verb, more than from the bare execution of it, the Tenses of these 
 Moods have at first been distinguished ; so I am of opinion, that had 
 grammarians taken their measures accordingly, they had not rendered 
 this matter so intricate as they have done. For some of them, as Sanc- 
 tius, &c. determining the times of these Moods by the execution only, 
 have made the whole Imperative and Subjunctive of the Future Time, 
 and the Infinitive and Participles of all times, or rather of no time : 
 Others, viz. Vossius, Linacer, Alvarus, Verepaeus, &c. though they will 
 not go so far as Sanctius, yet upon the same grounds make Utinam legam 
 the Future of the Optative, Utinam legerem the Present of it. By the 
 same rule they make a Future of the Potential in rim ; as, citius credide- 
 rim, I should or shall sooner believe : And another of the Subjunctive in 
 issem,- as, Juravit se ilium statim interfecturum, nisijusjurandum sibi de- 
 disset ; He swore he would presently kill him, if he should not swear to him. 
 Cic. But. with all imaginable deference to these great men, I humbly think 
 that these Tenses may be more easily accounted for, if we consider them as 
 Compound, i. e. respecting one time as to their execution, and another as 
 to the various modifications superadded to, or involved in their significa- 
 tion. To instance in the two last examples, (because they seem to have 
 the greatest difficulty) citius crediderim seem to import these two things 
 1st, That I have and continue to have a reason why I should not believe 
 it, whieh reason is of the Imperfect or Past Time ; and, 2d, That I shall 
 sooner have believed it, than another thing, with respect to which it shall 
 be Past : For there are a great many examples where the Preterite in 
 rim hath the same signification with the Future-perfect in ro; as, Si te 
 inde exemerim, Terent. for exemero. See Voss. fib. v. cap. 15. and Aul. 
 Gell. lib. xviii. cap. 2. As to the other example, the composition of two 
 times is yet more evident : For though jusjurandum dedisset be poste- 
 rior, and consequently future with respect to juravit, yet it is prior not 
 only to the time of the relation, but to interfecturum ; to prevent which 
 it behoved it necessarily to be past : And so of others. The same rule, 
 in my opinion, will likewise hold in the Infinitive and Participles, which 
 of themselves have always one fixed time ; and when they seem to be of 
 another time, that is not in them, but in the Verb that goes before them 
 or comes after them. Thus, for instance, scribere is always present or co- 
 existent with the Verb before it, and scripsisse is always prior to the same 
 Verb in all its Tenses ; as, Dicit, dixit, or dicet ; juvat,juvit, or juvabit, me 
 scribere, and me scripsisse. So also the Participles have a fixed time, present 
 past, or future ; and when any part of the Verb sum is joined with them, 
 they retain their own times, and have those of that Verb superadded to 
 them. But because there are innumerable occasions of speaking, wherein 
 the nice distinctions of times are not necessary, therefore it frequently hap- 
 pens that they are promiscuously used, as I could evince by a great many 
 examples, not only in the Passive but Active Voice, both in the Latin and 
 
Part II.— Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 39 
 
 other languages, if there were place for it ; which yet in my judgment does 
 not hinder but that every part of a Verb hath formally, and of its own na- 
 ture, a certain time, simple or compound, to which it is fixed and determined. 
 
 IV. There are two Numbers, the Singular and the Plural, answering 
 to the same Numbers of a Noun or Pronoun. 
 
 V. There are three Persons in each Number ; the First speaks of it- 
 self, the Second is spoken to, and the Third is spoken of. The First hath 
 only ego and nos, the Second only tu and vos, and the Third any Substantive 
 Noun Singular and Plural, put before the respective terminations of the 
 Verb, answering to them through all Voices, Moods, and Tenses. 
 
 [A Verb hath the same respect to its Nominative that an Adjective hath 
 to its Substantive ; and therefore, as an Adjective hath not properly either 
 Genders or Numbers, but certain terminations fitted for those of its Sub- 
 stantive, so a Verb hath properly neither Persons nor Numbers, but certain 
 terminations answering to the Persons and Numbers of its Nominative.] 
 
 Note 1. That ego and tu are seldom expressed, because the terminations 
 of the Verb immediately discover them, without any hazard of a mistake. 
 
 Note 2. That if a Substantive Noun be joined with ego or tu, the 
 Verb is of the Person of these Pronouns, not of the Noun. 
 
 Note 5. That in the continuation of a discourse, the third person is 
 also frequently understood, because easily known by what went before ; 
 and these Pronouns, ille, ipse, iste, hie, is, idem, quis, and qui, do often 
 supply the place of it. 
 
 The ENGLISH SIGNS of the TENSES are : 
 C Act. the Theme of the Verb, and est, eth or s ; or, for the 
 
 Present 
 
 Imperf. 
 Perfect 
 
 < greater emphasis, do, dost, doth or does before it. 
 C.Pass. Am, art, is, are, be, beest, with a word in ed, en, t, &c. 
 C Act. ed, edst, &c. or, for the greater emphasis, did, didst, before it 
 \ Pass, was, wast, were, wert, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
 C Act. have, hast, hath or Aas, with a word in ed,en,&c. or as the Imp. 
 £ Y&ss.have been,hast been,hath or has been,m.th a wordin ed,en,8ic. 
 
 ■cm j>^ Act. had, hadst, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
 Pluperf.£ pa ^ 
 
 Future 
 
 . had been, hadst been, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
 C Act. shall, will, shalt, wilt, with the Verb. 
 I Pass, shall be, will be, shalt be, wilt be, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
 The Subjunctive Mood Active has frequently these signs : 
 Present, may or can. 
 Imperf. might, could, would, should. 
 
 Perfect, may have or might have, could have, would have, should have. 
 Pluperf. might have, could have, would have, should have or had. 
 Future, shall have. 
 
 The Passive has frequently the same signs, with be or been. 
 
 DE CONJUGATIONIBUS. 
 M. Quot sunt Conjugationes? 
 
 D. Quatuor; Prima, Se- 
 crtnda, Tertia, et Quarta. 
 
 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 M. How many Conjugations 
 are there $ 
 
 S. Four ; First, Second, 
 Third, and Fourth. 
 
40 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 ha- 
 
 M. Quae sunt Notae 
 rum Conjugationum ? 
 JD. Prima"! TA longum*} „ .^ 
 Secunda f "8 \ E longum I ** *43 
 
 Tertia f J 1 E breve (II 
 Quarta J O longum J rt J5 
 
 M. What are the Marks of 
 these Conjugations ? 
 
 S. First^ 
 
 
 r^ /o??g 
 
 Second ( 
 
 J3 
 
 j E long 
 
 Third ( 
 
 J= 
 
 j E short 
 
 Fourth 
 
 
 LJ fang 
 
 The common characteristic or Mark by which these Conjugations are 
 distinguished from one another, is one of these three Vowels, a, e, i, be- 
 fore the re of the Infinitive Active, though they also may be known by 
 the same vowels in several other parts of them ; for a long is most fre- 
 quent in the first, e long in the second, e or i short in the third, and i long 
 in the fourth : Only e before bam, bas, bat, &c. and before mus and tis, 
 and mur and mini, is always long in whatever Conjugation it is found. 
 
 But it is to be observed that the Preterites and Supines, and all the 
 parts formed from them, (because of the great irregularity of their mid- 
 dle syllables, and constant agreement in their last vowel, and in the ter- 
 minations arising from it in all Conjugations) cannot properly be said to 
 be of any one Conjugation more than another ; for there is nothing, for 
 example, mfricui, docui, elicui, amicui, or in frictum, doctum, elicitum, 
 amictum, or in the parts that come from them, whereby to distinguish 
 their Conjugations. 
 
 PRIMA CONJUGATIO. 
 
 AMO. 
 
 Vox Activa. 
 Praecipuae Partes. 
 Praes. Indie. Perfect. 
 
 Ara-o, am-avi, 
 
 INDICATIVUS MODUS. 
 
 Praesens. 
 
 r l Am-o, 
 
 3 2 Am-as, 
 
 C 3 Am-at : 
 
 ( 1 Am-amus, 
 
 1 2 Am-atis, 
 
 C 3 Am-ant. 
 
 Tmperfectum. 
 r 1 Am-abam, 
 ) 2 Am-abas, 
 C 3 Am-abat : 
 f 1 Am-abamus, 
 < 2 Am-abatis, 
 C 3 Am-abant. 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 TO LOVE. 
 
 The Active Voice. 
 The Principal Parts. 
 Sup. Praes. Infin. 
 
 am-atum, am-are. 
 
 THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 The Present. 
 
 1 1 Love, or do love, 
 
 2 Thou lovest, or dost love, 
 
 3 He loveth, or doth love : 
 
 1 We love, or do love, 
 
 2 Ye (or you) love, or do love, 
 
 3 They love, or do love. 
 
 The Imperfect. 
 
 1 I loved, or did love, 
 
 2 Thou lovedst, or didst love, 
 
 3 He loved, or did love: 
 
 1 We loved, or did love, 
 
 2 Ye loved, or did love, 
 
 3 They loved, or did love. 
 
1° 
 
 CO 
 
 tiO 
 
 co 
 
 Part II. — Chap, 
 
 Perfectum, 
 
 1 Am-avi, 
 1 2 Am-avisti, 
 . 3 Am-avit : 
 
 1 Am-avimus, 
 ' 2 Am-avistis, 
 , 3 Am-averunt vel -avere. 
 
 Plusquamperfectum. 
 
 1 Am-averam, 
 1 2 Am-averas, 
 . 3 Am-averat : 
 
 1 Am-averamus, 
 
 2 Am-averatis, 
 . 3 Am-averant. 
 
 Futurum, 
 
 1 Am-abo, 
 
 1 2 Am-abis, 
 
 3 Am-abit : 
 
 ' 1 Am-abimus, 
 
 2 Am-abitis, 
 . 3 Am-abunt. 
 
 III.— Of Verb. 
 
 The Perfect. 
 
 1 I have loved*, 
 
 2 Thou hast loved, 
 
 3 He hath loved : 
 
 1 We have loved, 
 
 2 Ye have loved, 
 
 3 They have loved. 
 
 The Plunerfect. 
 
 1 I had loved, 
 
 2 Thou hadst loved, 
 
 3 He had loved : 
 
 1 We had loved, 
 
 2 Ye had loved, 
 
 3 They had loved. 
 
 The Future. 
 
 1 I shall or will love, 
 
 2 Thou shalt or wilt love, 
 
 3 He shall or will love : 
 
 1 We shall or will love, 
 
 2 Ye shall or will love, 
 
 3 They shall or will love. 
 
 41 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS MODUS. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Praesens. The Present. 
 
 ' 1 Am-em, 1 I may or can love, 
 
 } 2 Am-es, 2 Thou mayst or canst love 9 
 
 ' 3 Am-et : 3 He may or can love : 
 
 " 1 Am-emus, 1 We may or can love, 
 
 I 2 Am-etis, 2 F<e may or can love, 
 
 [ 3 Am-ent. 3 T%ey way or can love, 
 
 Imperfectum. The Imperfect. 
 
 ' 1 Am-arem, 1 / might, could, would, or s£ow/d 
 
 } 2 Am-ares, 2 T%ow mightst, couldst, wouldst,&c. 
 
 I 3 Am-aret : 3 He might, could, would, or should 
 r 1 Am-aremus, 1 We might, could, would, or should 
 
 1 2 Am-aretis, 2 Ye might, could, would, or should 
 
 C 3 Am-arent. 3 They might, could, would, or should 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 s; 
 
 CO 
 
 § 
 
 * Or, I loved or aVd /oa>e, 2% oh lovedst or g 7 /^ /owe, &c. as in the 
 Imperfect 
 
3q 
 
 42 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Perfection. The Perfect. 
 
 1 Am-averim, I I may have loved, 
 
 2 Am-averis, 2 Thou mayst have loved, 
 C 3 Am-averit : 3 He may have loved : 
 C 1 Am-averimus, 1 We may have loved, 
 
 < 2 Am-averitis, 2 Ye may have loved, 
 C 3 Am-averint. 3 They may have loved. 
 
 Plusquamperfectum. The Pluperfect. 
 
 r 1 Am-avissem, 1 I might, could, woidd, &c. have or 
 
 < 2 Am-avisses, 2 T7zow miglitst, couldst, &c. ^«y^ or 
 C 3 Am-avisset : 3 He might, could, &c. have or 
 C 1 Am-avissemus,l We might, could, &c. have or 
 
 < 2 Am-avissetis, 2 Fe might, could, &c. /zat'e or 
 ' 3 Am-avissent. 3 They might, could, &c. have or 
 
 Futurum. The Future, 
 
 r 1 Am-avero, 1 / shall have loved, 
 
 < 2 Ara-averis, 2 7%cw afoz// have loved, 
 C 3 Am-averit : 3 i?i? s^«# /jai^ loved : 
 r 1 Ani-averimus, 1 We shall have loved, 
 } 2 Am-averitis, 2 Ftf shall have loved, 
 C 3 Am-averint. 3 They shall have loved. 
 
 5> 
 
 IMPERATIVUS MODUS. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Praesens. 
 
 2 Am-a vel am-ato, 
 
 3 Am-ato : 
 
 2 Am-ate re/ am-atote, 
 
 3 Am-anto. 
 
 INFINITIVUS MODUS. 
 
 Pr^s. Am-are, 
 
 Perf. Am-avisse, 
 
 Fut. Am-aturumesseue/fuisse, 
 
 PARTICIPIA. 
 Praes. Am-ans, 
 Fut. Am-aturus, -a, -urn, 
 
 GERUNDIA. 
 
 Norn. Am-andum, 
 Gen. Am-andi, 
 
 The Present. 
 
 2 Love thou, or do thou love, 
 
 3 Let him love ." 
 
 2 Love ye, or do ye love, 
 
 3 Let them love. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Pres. To love. 
 Perf. To have or had loved. 
 Put. To be about to love. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 Of the Present, Loving. 
 Of the Future, About to love. 
 
 THE GERUNDS. 
 
 Nom. Loving. 
 Gen. Of lovbig. 
 
Part IL—Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 43 
 
 JDat. Am-ando. Dat. To loving. 
 
 Ace. Am-andum. Ace. Loving. 
 
 Abl. Am-ando. Abl. From, in or by loving. 
 
 SUPINA. THE SUPINES. 
 
 Prius, Am-atum. First, To love. 
 
 Posterius, Am-atu. Last, To love, or to be loved. 
 
 VOX PASSIVA. 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Amor, 
 
 amatus, 
 
 I 3 
 
 INDICATIVUS MODUS, 
 Praesens. 
 
 1 Am-or, 
 
 2 Am-aris vel -are, 
 
 3 Am-atur: 
 
 1 Am-amur, 
 
 2 Am-amini, 
 
 3 Am-antur. 
 Imperfectum. 
 
 1 Am-abar, 
 
 2 Am-abaris vel -abare, 
 
 3 Am-abatur : 
 
 1 Am-abamur, 
 
 2 Am-abamini, 
 
 3 Am-abantur. 
 Perfectum. 
 
 C 1 sum vel fui, 
 Amatus s 2 es vel fuisti, 
 3 est vel fuit : 
 * 1 sumus vel fuimus, 
 5 Amati < 2 estis vel fuistis, 
 
 (_3 sunt, fuerunt v. fuere. 
 Plusq uamperfectum. 
 C 1 eram vel fueram, 
 .gf < Amatus < 2 eras vel fueras, 
 / 3 erat vel fuerat : 
 
 eramus vel fueramus, 
 
 2 eratis vel fueratis, 
 
 3 erant vel fuerant 
 Futurum. 
 
 1 Am-abor, 
 
 2 Am-aberis vel -abere, 
 
 3 Am-abitur : 
 
 f! 
 
 ii 
 ii 
 
 i 1 2 
 
 lusq 
 
 M i Amati ■? 2 i 
 Ri l h 
 
 THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 The Present. 
 
 1 I am loved, 
 
 2 Thou art loved, 
 
 3 He is loved: 
 
 1 We are loved, 
 
 2 Ye are loved, 
 
 3 They are loved. 
 The Imperfect. 
 
 1 I was 
 
 2 7%ow w«s£ [wert] 
 
 3 iife was 
 
 1 We were 
 
 2 Fe w/^re 
 
 3 Tliey were 
 The Perfect. 
 
 1 I have been 
 
 2 Thou hast been 
 
 3 He hath been 
 
 1 We have been 
 
 2 Ye have been 
 
 3 They have been 
 
 The Pluperfect. 
 
 / loved. 
 
 J 
 
 co 
 
 1 i" had been 
 
 2 Thou hadst been 
 
 3 He had been 
 
 1 We had been 
 
 2 Ye had been 
 
 3 They had been 
 The Future. 
 
 1 I shall or will be 
 
 2 Thou shalt or wilt be 
 
 3 Ife shall or wi// 6e 
 
 ^ loved. 
 
 loved. 
 
44? Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 . r 1 Am-abimur. 
 ,.» < 2 Am-abimini, 
 ^ Cs Am-abuntur. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS MODUS. 
 Praesens. 
 
 loved. 
 
 
 1 Am-er, 
 
 2 Am-eris vel -ere, 
 S Am-etur : 
 
 1 Am-emur, 
 
 2 Am-emini, 
 
 3 Am-entur. 
 Imperfectum. 
 
 1 Am-arer, 
 
 2 Am-areris tW -arere, 
 
 3 Am-aretur : 
 
 1 Am-aremur, 
 
 2 Am-aremini, 
 
 3 Am-arentur. 
 
 1 
 
 j 
 
 Perfectum. 
 
 C 1 sim vel fuerim, 
 ! Amatus < 2 sis vel fueris, 
 (_3 sit vel fuerit : 
 ^. ^ CI simus i'gZ fuerimus, 
 
 <* < Amati < 2 sitis vel fueritis, 
 ^ *• f5 sint vel fuerint. 
 
 to 
 
 1 We shall or w/z'// fe 
 
 2 Fe sA«// or zfi// be 
 
 3 JVzej/ *Aa// or will be ) 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
 
 The Present. 
 
 1 i" may or can be 
 
 2 Thou mayst or crt?z,?£ fo? 
 
 3 He may or <?«« be 
 
 1 JFtf ???#?/ or can be 
 
 2 Fe ??zot/ or can be 
 
 3 Z7z<?j/ may or c«?z fo 
 
 The Imperfect. 
 
 1 I might, could, would, &c. 1 
 
 2 Thoumightst,couldst,S:c. I 
 
 3 i/e? might, could, &c. 
 
 1 JFtf might, could, &c. 
 
 2 Fe might, could, Sec. 
 
 3 7%cy might, could, Szc. J 
 
 The Perfect. 
 
 1 I may have been 
 
 2 TA(m mayst have been 
 
 3 He may have been 
 
 1 We may have been 
 
 2 Ye may have been 
 
 3 They may have been J 
 
 The Pluperfect. 
 
 1 I might, could, &c. ha vs cr~) t: 
 
 "1 
 
 u 
 
 Tft<m mightst, &e. ktv" or [ 
 i7<? might, f.:c. hare or I ~^ 
 
 Plusquamperfectum. 
 ~ C\ essem vel fuissem, 
 
 .g 4 Amatus < 2 esses ueZ fuisses, 
 02 *• £o esset re/ fuisset : 
 
 . f ri essemus vel fuissemus, 1 We might, &c. have or 
 
 ,s ^ Amati <2 essetis vel fuissetis, 2 Ye might, &c. A«ye or 
 fc* ' C^ essent i>e/ fuissent. 
 
 Futurum. 
 
 . C Cl fuero, 
 
 .s fl -J Amatus -< 2 fueris, 
 ^ C C^ fuerit: 
 
 . C Cl fuerimus, 
 
 J < Amati -< 2 fueritis, 
 ^ £ £5 fuerint. 
 
 IMPERATIVUS MODUS. 
 Praese?is. 
 
 i\ 
 
 2 Am-are vel -ator, 
 
 3 Am-ator : 
 
 3 They might, Sec. have or J ^ 
 The Future. 
 
 1 I shall have been 
 
 2 Thou shalt have been 
 
 3 He shall have been I "$? 
 
 1 We shall have been f ,© 
 
 2 Ye shall have been 
 
 3 They shall have been J 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 The Present. 
 
 2 Be thou loved. 
 
 3 Let him be loved : 
 
Part II.— Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 45 
 
 » 2 Am-amini, 2 Be ye loved, 
 
 3^ ( 3 Am-antor. 3 Let them be loved. 
 
 INFINITIVUS MODUS. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Praes. Am-ari. To be loved. 
 
 Per/. Am-atum esse vel fuisse. To have or had been loved. 
 Fut. Am-atum iri. To be about to be loved. 
 
 PARTICIPIA. THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Per/, temporis, Am-atus, -a, -urn. Of the Perfect, Loved. 
 Futuri, Am-andus,-a,-um. Of the Future, To be loved. 
 
 SECUNDA CONJUGATIO. 
 VOX ACTIVA. 
 
 Doceo, docui, doctum, docere. 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Sing 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 P^r. Doc-eo, 
 
 -es, 
 
 ret: 
 
 -emus, 
 
 -etis, 
 
 -ent. 
 
 Imp. Doc-ebam, 
 
 -ebas, 
 
 -ebat : 
 
 -ebamus, 
 
 -ebatis, 
 
 -ebant. 
 
 Per/. Doc-ui, 
 
 -uisti, 
 
 -uit : 
 
 -uimus, 
 
 -uistis, ) 
 
 -uerunt, 
 -uere. 
 
 Plus. Doc-ueram, 
 
 -ueras, 
 
 -uerat : 
 
 -ueramus, 
 
 -ueratis, 
 
 -uerant. 
 
 Fut. Doc-ebo, 
 
 -ebis, 
 
 -ebit : 
 
 -ebimus, 
 
 -ebitis, 
 
 -ebunt. 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 
 
 Pr. Doc-eam, 
 
 -eas, 
 
 -eat : 
 
 -eamus, 
 
 -eatis, 
 
 -eant. 
 
 Imp. Doc-erem, 
 
 -eres, 
 
 -eret : 
 
 -eremus, 
 
 -eretis, 
 
 -erent. 
 
 Perf. Doc-uerim, 
 
 -ueris, 
 
 -uerit : 
 
 -uerimus, 
 
 -ueritis, 
 
 -uerint. 
 
 Plus. Doc-uissem, 
 
 -uisses, 
 
 -uisset : 
 
 -uissemus, 
 
 -uissetis, 
 
 -uissent. 
 
 Fut. Doc-uero, 
 
 -ueris, 
 
 -uerit : 
 
 -uerimus, 
 
 -ueritis, 
 
 -uerint. 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Doc- 5 " e ' -eto: 5 ' ete > -ento. 
 
 ( -eto, ( -etote, 
 
 INFINITIVUS. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA. GERUNDIA. 
 
 Pr. Doc-ere. 1 Doc-tum. Pr. Doc-ens. Doc-endum, 
 
 Perf. Doc-uisse. 2 Doc-tu. Fut. Doc-turus. Doc-endi, 
 Fut. Doc-turum Doc-endo. 
 
 esse vel fuisse. 
 
46 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 VOX PASSIVA. 
 
 Doceor, doctus, doceri. 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 Pr. Doc-eor, ; * » -etur : -emur, -emini, -entur. 
 ( -ere, 
 
 Im. Doc-ebar, ) " e ans > -ebatur : -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur. 
 Fut. Doc-ebor, 5 " G b enSj -ebitur : -ebimur, -ebimini, -ebuntur 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 Pr. Doc-ear, S- (an ^ -eatur: -eamur, -eamini, -eantur. 
 ( -eare, ' 
 
 1m. Doc-erer, ) > -eretur: -eremur, -eremini, -erentur. 
 
 ( -erere, ' 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Doc- 5 " ere > -etor : -emini, -entor. 
 
 ( -etor, ' 
 
 INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIA. 
 
 Praes. Doc-eri. 
 
 Perf. Doc-tum esse vc/fuisse. 
 
 Fut. Doc-tum iri. 
 
 Perf. Doc-tus, -a, -urn. 
 Fut. Doc-endus, -a, -um, 
 
 TERTIA CONJUGATIO. 
 
 VOX ACTIVA. 
 
 Lego, legi, lectunu legere. 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 1 2 3 I 2 s 
 
 Praes. Leg-o, -is, -it : -imus, -itis, -unt. 
 Imp. Leg-ebam, -ebas, -ebat : -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 
 
 Perf. Leg-i, -isti, -it : -imus, -istis, -erunt, -ere. 
 
 Plus. Leg-eram, -eras, -erat : -eramus, -eratis, -erant. 
 
 Fut. Leg-am, -es, -et: -emus, -etis, -ent. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Leg-am, -as, -at: -amus, -atis, -ant, 
 
 Imp. Leg-erem, -eres, -eret : -eremus, -eretis, -erent. 
 
Part II*— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 
 Perf. Leg-erim, -eris, -erit : -erimus, -eritis, -erint. 
 Plus. Leg-issem, -isses, -isset : -issemus, -issetis, -issent. 
 Put. Leg-ero, -eris, -erit : -erimus, -eritis, -erint. 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 p rr »* toff. 5 * e > jfr» • S "^ e ' 
 
 47 
 
 Leg- 5 "?' 
 
 -lto : 
 
 -unto. 
 
 -ltote, 
 
 INFINITIVUS. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA. GERUNDIA. 
 Praes. Leg-ere. 1 Lec-tum. Pr. Leg-ens. Leg-endum, 
 Perf. Leg-isse. 2 Lec-tu. Fut. Lec-turus. Leg-endi, 
 
 Fut. Lec-turum 
 esse vel fuisse. 
 
 Leg-endo. 
 
 VOX PASSIVA. 
 
 Legor, lectus, 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Pr. Leg-or, 5 ■ eris> -itur : 
 ( -ere, , 
 
 Im. Leg-ebar, ) '-ebatur : -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur. 
 
 / -eDare, 
 
 Fut. Leg-ar, 5 ~ eris > -etur : -emur, -emini, -entur. 
 ( -ere, 
 
 legi. 
 
 Plur. 
 -imur, -imini, 
 
 -untur. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 -amur, -amini, -antur. 
 
 Pr. Leg-ar, \ " ans ' -atur 
 ( -are, 
 
 Imp. Leg-erer, J } -eretur : -eremur, -eremini, -erentur 
 
 ^ — ei ere, 
 
 Praes. 
 
 Leg- 5 " ere ' 
 8 I -ltor, 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 -itor : -imini, 
 
 -untor. 
 
 INFINITIVUS. 
 Praes. Leg-i. 
 
 Perf. Lec-tum esse vel fuisse. 
 Fut. Lec-tum iri. 
 
 PARTICIPIA. 
 
 Perf Lec-tus, -a, -um. 
 Fut. Leg-endus, -a, -um. 
 
48 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 QUARTA CONJUGATIO. 
 
 VOX ACTIVA. 
 
 Audio, audivi, auditum, audire. 
 
 IXDICATIVUS. 
 
 Si?ig. Plur. 
 
 1 2 3 1 2 3 
 
 Pr. Aud-io, -is, -it : -imus, -itis, -iunt. 
 
 Im. Aud-iebam, -iebas, -iebat : -iebamus, -iebatis, -iebant. 
 
 Perf. Aud-ivi, -ivisti, -ivit : -ivimus, -ivistis,5; verun ' 
 
 6-ivere. 
 
 Plus. Aud-iveram, -iveras, -iverat : -iveramus, -iveratis,-iverant. 
 
 Fut. Aud-iam, -ies, -iet : -iemus, -ietis, -ient. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 Pr. Aud-iam, -ias, -iat : -iamus, -iatis, -iant. 
 Im. Aud-irem, -ires, -iret : -iremus, -iretis, -irent. 
 Perf. Aud-iverim, -iveris, -iverit : -iverimus, -iveritis, -iverint. 
 Plus. Aud-ivissem, -ivisses,-ivisset :-ivissemus,-ivissetis,-ivissent. 
 Fut. Aud-ivero, -iveris, -iverit : -iverimus, -iveritis, -iverint. 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 Pr. Aud- 5 1' -ito : 5 "! te > -iunto. 
 
 I -ito, I -ltote, 
 
 INFINITIVUS. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA. GERUNDIA. 
 
 Pr. Aud-ire. 1 Aud-itum. Pr. Aud-iens. Aud-iendum, 
 
 Perf. Aud-ivisse. 2 Aud-itu. Fut. Aud-iturus. Aud-iendi, 
 
 Fut. Aud-iturum Aud-iendo. 
 
 esse vel fuisse. 
 
 VOX PASSIVA, 
 
 Audior, auditus, audiri. 
 
 IXDICATIVUS. 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 Pr. Aud-ior, ) "! ns ' -itur : -imur, -imini, -iuntur. 
 ( -ire, 
 
 Im. Aud-iebar, ) . _ J -iebatur:-iebamur,-iebamini,-iebantur. 
 ( -lebare, 
 
 .FW.Aud-iar, 5 "* ens > -ietur: -iemur, -iemini, -ientur. 
 ( -lere, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 Pr. Aud-iar, 5 m ] ans > -iatur : -iamur. -iamini, -iantur. 
 ( -lare, 
 
 Im. Aud-irer, > . * -iretur : -iremur, -iremini, -irentur. 
 { -irere, 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 49 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 \ -* ire > 
 ' c -itor, 
 
 Praes. Aud- ] ? ' itor : -lmmi, -mntor. 
 
 INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIA. 
 
 Praes. Aud-iri. I Perf. Aud-itus, -a, -urn. 
 
 Per/. Aud-itumessew?/fuisse. Fut. Aud-iendus, -a, -um. 
 Put. Aud-itum iri. 1 
 
 ^f Note, That in the Examples of the Second, Third, and Fourth 
 Conjugations, we have omitted such parts of the Passive Voice 
 as are supplied by the Participle Perfect with the Verb Sum, 
 viz. The Perfect and Pluperfect of the Indicative, and the Per- 
 fect, Pluperfect, and Future of the Subjunctive, as being the 
 same in all Conjugations with the Example of the First, the 
 change of the Participle only excepted : But it is carefully to 
 be observed, that the Participle being an Adjective, must agree 
 in Gender, Number, and Case, with its Substantive, or, which 
 is the same thing, with the Person before it. 
 
 I. REMARKS showing when a LATIN VERB is to be ren- 
 dered otherwise in ENGLISH than in the foregoing Examples. 
 
 1. VV hen the continuation of a thing is signified, the English Verb 
 may be varied in all its Tenses by the Participle in ing, with the Verb 
 am; as, 
 
 Pres. I am reading, 
 
 Imp. I was reading, 
 
 Perf. I have been reading, 
 
 Plup. I had been reading, 
 
 Fut. I shall be reading, J 
 
 So likewise in the Passive Voice, The House is building, Domus aedi- 
 jicatur ; The Lesson was prescribing, Lectio praescribebatur. Some- 
 times a is set before the Participle ; as, While the House is a-building. 
 It is a-doing. He is a-dying. 
 
 2. When a Question is asked, the Nominative Case or Person is set 
 after the Verb, or the sign of the Verb ; as, Love I ? Do I Love ? Can 
 I Love ? Should he be loved ? 
 
 3. We have made thou the second Person Singular, to distinguish it 
 from the Plural : But it is customary with us, (as also with the French, 
 and others,) though we speak but to one particular person, to use the plu- 
 ral you, and never thou, but when we address ourselves to Almighty God, 
 or otherwise when we signify familiarity, disdain, or contempt. 
 
 4. The Perfect of the Indicative is often Englished as the Imperfect ; 
 as, Nunquam amavi hunc hominem, I never loved, or did love, this man. 
 See a train of Examples in Ovid. Metamorph. lib. 1. from v. 21. to 39. 
 
 5. The Perfect Tense is frequently Englished by had after antequam, 
 
 C 
 
 fl read. 
 j I did read. 
 for ^ I have read. 
 J I had read. 
 LI shall read. 
 
50 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 postquam, ubi or ut, for postquam : as, Postquam superavimus Isth- 
 mum, After we had [were] passed over the Isthmus, Ovid. Haec ubi dic- 
 ta dedit, When he had spoken these words, Liv. Ut me salutavit, statim 
 Romam prqfectus est, After he had saluted me, ^-c. Cic. 
 
 6. We have chosen may, can, might, could, &c. for the English of the 
 Subjunctive Mood, because these are the most frequent signs of it, and 
 distinguish it best from other Moods : But very often it is the same with 
 the Indicative, save only that it hath some Conjunction or Indefinite word 
 before it ; such as, if, seeing, lest, that, although, I wish, <%c. ; as, Si a- 
 mem, If I love ; Ne amem, Lest I love ; Causa est cur amem, It is the 
 cause why I love, Ovid. And frequently it hath both ; as, Oro ut ames, 
 I entreat that you may love, Idem. 
 
 7. The Present of the Subjunctive after quasi, tanquam, and the like, 
 is sometimes Englished as the Imperfect; as, Quasi intelligant qualis sit, 
 As if they understood what kind of person he is, Cic. 
 
 8. When a question is asked, the Present of the Subjunctive is fre- 
 quently Englished by shall or should; as, Eloquar an sileam? Shall I 
 speak or be silent ? Virg. Singula quid referam, Why should I mention 
 every thing? Ovid. Likewise after Non est quod; as, Non est (supple 
 causa) quod eas, There is no reason why you should go, or you need not 
 go. Sometimes it is Englished by would ; as, In f acinus jurasse putes, 
 You would think they had sworn to [commit] wickedness, Ovid. 
 
 9. We have Englished the Perfect of the Subjunctive in rim, by may 
 have, (as, Nefrustra hi tales viri venerint, That such men as these may 
 not have come in vain, Cic. ; Forsitan audieris, You may perhaps have 
 heard it,) to distinguish it from the Present and Pluperfect, by the signs of 
 which it is also most frequently Englished ; as, Ut sic dixerim, That I may 
 so speak. Ubi ego audiverim ? Where should I have heard it? Unushomo 
 tantas strages ediderit? Could one man make so great a slaughter? Virg. 
 Fortasse errarim ? Perhaps I might be in an error ? Plin. Oratores quos 
 viderim peritissimi, The ablest orators I have seen [or could see,] Quinctil. 
 
 10. This Perfect in rim sometimes inclines very much to a future sig- 
 nification ; and then it is Englished by should, would, could, can, will, 
 shall; as, Citius crediderim, I should sooner believe, Juv. ; Libenter au- 
 dierim, I would gladly hear, Cic. ; Ciceronem cuicunque eorum facile op- 
 posuerim, I could easily match Cicero with any of them, Quinctil. ; Non 
 facile dixerim, I cannot well tell, Cic. ; Nee tamen excluserim alios, And 
 yet I will not exclude others, Plin. ; Si paululum modo quid te fugerit, e- 
 go perierim, If you but trip in the least, I shall be undone, Ter. But all 
 these ways of speaking, though indeed they respect the future as to the exe- 
 cution, yet they seem also to look a little beyond it, to a time when their 
 futurity shall be past ; and so come near in signification to the future in ro. 
 
 11. The Perfect of the Subjunctive after quasi, tanquam, and the like, 
 may sometimes be Englished by had; as, Quasi affuerim, As if I had 
 been present, Plaut. ; Perinde ac si jam vicerint, As if they had already 
 overcome, Cic. 
 
 12. The Pluperfect in issem is sometimes Englished by should : as, 
 Imperaret quod vellet ; quodcunque imperavisset, se esse facturos : He 
 might command what he pleased ; whatever he commanded [should com- 
 mand] they would do, Caes. Foedus ictum est his legibus, ut cujus po- 
 puli cives eo certamine vicissent, is alteri imperaret, An agreement was 
 made on these terms, that that people whose countrymen should be vie- 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 51 
 
 torious in that combat, should have the sovereignty over the other, Liv. 
 And this happens when a thing is signified as future at a certain past time 
 referred to ; and commonly takes place, when what was formerly said di- 
 rectly is afterwards recited indirectly ; as, Ne dubita, dabitur quodcunque 
 optaris, Doubt not, whatsoever thou shalt choose shall be given thee, Ovid. 
 Sol Phaethonti facturum se esse dixit, quicquid optasset ; The Sun told 
 Phaeton, that he would do whatsoever he should choose, Cic. ; where it is 
 worth noticing, That what was the Future of the Subjunctive in the direct 
 speech, becomes the Pluperfect in the indirect recital of it. See Turner's 
 Exercises, p. 21. &c. But, as we have said, p. 38. the Pluperfect, not- 
 withstanding its coming in the place of a Future, still retains its own pro- 
 per compound time, that is, it was prior to a thing now past at the time of 
 the recital by Cicero, though it was future when first spoken by the Sun. 
 And therefore there is no reason for making this termination in issem, a 
 Future tense, as Mr. Turner does. 
 
 13. Though the proper English of the Future in ro be shall have, yet 
 generally the have or the shall, and frequently both, are omitted ; as, 
 Qui Antonium oppresserit^ is bellum confecerit, He who shall cut off An- 
 tony, shall put an end to the war, Cic. ; Hand desinam donee perfecero 
 hoc, I will not give over till I have effected this, Ter. ; Si negaverit, If 
 he denies it, Cic. Sometimes it is Englished by will; as, Dixerit fortasse 
 aliquis, Somebody will perhaps say, Cic. ; Aut consolando, aut consilio, 
 aut re,juvero, I will assist you either by comforting you, or with counsel, 
 or with money, Idem. But though we thus render the Future in ro in 
 our language, and though (which is more material) very frequently it and 
 the Future of the Indicative are used promiscuously ; yet I cannot be 
 persuaded, that in any instance, the formal significations of these are the 
 same, as Mr. Johnson contends, p. 339. but still think, with the great Vos- 
 sius, that the future in ro is always a Future-perfect, that is, that there is 
 a time insinuated when a thing yet future shall be finished or past, and that 
 even when a Future of the Indicative is joined with it, which in order of 
 time should be done before it ; as, Pergratum mihi feceris si disputabis, 
 You shall have done [shall do] me a great favour, if you shall dispute, Cic. 
 For what hinders that we may not faintly hint at the finishing of an action 
 yet future, without formally considering the finishing of another action on 
 which it depends ; and on the contrary ? But if the promiscuous usage of 
 Tenses one for another be sufficient to make them formally the same, then 
 we shall confound all Tenses, and overthrow the very arguments Mr. 
 Johnson makes use of against Sanctius, with respect to the Tenses of the 
 Infinitive. 
 
 14. The to of the Infinitive is generally omitted after May, Can, Might, 
 Would, Could, (which are sometimes Verbs themselves, and not the bare 
 signs of them : ) also after Must, Bid, Dare, Let, Help, and Make. 
 
 15. But what is most to be regarded in the Infinitive is, that when it 
 hath an Accusative before it, it is commonly Englished as the Indicative 
 Mood, the Particle that being sometimes put before it, but oftener under- 
 stood. And it is carefully to be remarked, that the same Tenses of the 
 Infinitive are differently Englished, according as the preceding Verb va- 
 ries its Tenses, — as will appear in the following Scheme ; 
 
 C 2 
 
52 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 r Dicit me scribere, He says [that] I write. 
 
 < Dixit me scribere, He said [that] I was writing. 
 CDicet me scribere, He shall say [that] I am writing. 
 
 f" Dicit me scripsisse, He says [that] I wrote, or did write. 
 
 < Dixit me scripsisse, He said [that] I had written. 
 
 £Dicet me scripsisse, He shall say[that]I have written,or did write 
 
 C Dicit me scripturum [esse] He says [that] I will write. 
 ■< Dixit me scripturum [esse] He said [that] I would write. 
 CDicet me scripturum esse] He shall sav [that] I will write. 
 TDicit me scripturum fuisse] He says [that] I would have written. 
 
 < Dixit me scripturum [fuisse] He said [that] I would have written. 
 CDicet me scripturum [fuisse] He shall say [that] I would have written. 
 
 It will be of great use to accustom the learner to render the Infinitive 
 after this manner, both in English and Latin, especially after he has been 
 taught something of construction : And then to cause him vary the Accu- 
 sative me into te, se, ilium, hominem, foeminam, &c. and these again into the 
 Plural, nos, vos, se, illos, homines, foeminas, &c. But he must be careful 
 to make the Participles agree with them in Gender, Number, and Case. 
 
 Note 1. That when the preceding Verb is of the Present or Future 
 Tense, the Fut. of the Infinit. with esse, is rendered by shall or will; and 
 when it is of the Perfect Tense, the Fut. of the Infinit. is rendered by 
 would, as in the examples above; and sometimes by should; as, Dixi te 
 sciturum esse, I said that you should know. 
 
 Note 2. That when the preceding Verb is of the Imperfect or Pluper- 
 fect Tense, the English of the Infinitive is the same as when it is of the 
 Perfect. 
 
 16. The Perfect of the Indicative and Subjunctive Passive, made up 
 with Sum or Sim, are Englished by am, art, is, are, instead of have been, 
 when the thing is signified to be just now past ; as, Vulneratus sum, I 
 am wounded ; Opus jinitum est, The work is finished ; Cum tempora mu- 
 tata sint, Since the times are changed. 
 
 17. When it is made up by fui, it is frequently Englished by was, wast, 
 were, wert ; as, Roma fuit capta, Rome was taken : As is also what is 
 called the Pluperfect with eram and essem ; as, Labor Jinitus erat, The 
 labour was finished ; Si labor Jinitus esset, If the labour were finished. 
 
 II. REMARKS on the LATIN CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 1. A. great part of the Passive Voice, and some of the Active, is made 
 up of two of its own Participles and the auxiliary Verb Sum, (of which 
 you have the full Conjugation, p. 60.) after this manner : 
 ^Sum or fui "*| 
 
 eram or fueram 
 The Participle . sim or fuerim 
 Perfect with ] essem or fuissem j 
 fuero 
 esse or fuisse 
 
 i 
 
 esse or fuisse £ Fut. Infinit. Active. 
 
 The Participle 
 Fut. Act. with 
 
 2. Having, p. 38. laid it down as a probable opinion, that every part of 
 a Verb, with all its Participles, have a certain fixed time, simple or com- 
 pound, which thev formally and of their own nature signify, it will perhaps 
 be here expected that I should account for that great variety that is found 
 
Part IL— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 53 
 
 in the Passive Voice. To put this matter in the clearest light I am able, 
 I must premise another division of the Tenses, viz. into passing and past ; 
 or, into such as import the continuance of an action or thing, without re- 
 gard to the ending or finishing of it ; and such as import that the thing 
 is finished (or to be finished) and done. Of the first sort are the Present, 
 Imperfect, and Future- imperfect ; of the second sort are the Perfect, Plu- 
 perfect, and Future-perfect. See p. 37. From this division of the Tenses, 
 together with what we have formerly said, we are. furnished with an easy- 
 method of distinguishing all the parts of the Passive. Thus, for instance, 
 let the subject of discourse be the building of a house. 1. When I say, 
 Domus aedificatur, I mean that it is just now a-building, but not finished. 
 2. When Aedijicabatur ; that it was then, or at a certain past time^ a-build- 
 ing, but not then finished. 3. Aedificabitur ; that some time hence it shall 
 be a-building, without any formal regard to the finishing of it. But 
 when I make use of the Participle-perfect, I always signify a thing com- 
 pleted and ended; but with these subdistinctions : 1. Aedificata est; I 
 mean simply, that it is finished, without any regard to the time when. 2. 
 Aedificata fuit ; it is finished, and some time since has intervened. 3. Ae- 
 dificata erat ; it was finished at a certain past time referred to, with which 
 it was cotemporary. 4. Aedificata fuerat ; it was finished before a cer- 
 tain past time referred to, to which it was prior. 5. Aedificata erit ; it 
 shall be finished some time hereafter, either without regard to a particular 
 time when, or with respect to a certain time yet future, with which its 
 finishing shall be cotemporary. 6. And lastly, Aedificata fuerit ; it shall 
 be finished and past before another thing yet future, to which its finishing 
 shall be prior. And thus we have nine different times, or complications of 
 times without confounding them with one another. But then how comes 
 it to pass, that these are so frequently used promiscuously ? I answer, That 
 this proceeds from one or more of these four reasons : 1. Because it very 
 frequently happens in discourse, that we have no occasion particularly to 
 consider these various relations and complications of times ; and it is the 
 same thing to our purpose, whether the thing is, or was done, or a-doing ; 
 or whether it was done just now, or some time ago ; or whether another 
 thing was (or shall be) cotemporary with, or prior to it ; and the matter 
 being thus, we reckon ourselves at liberty to take several parts of the Verb 
 at random, as being secure not only of being understood, but also, that in 
 these circumstances, whatever we pitch on, even when examined by the 
 rules above, shall be found literally true. 2. It is usual with us to state our- 
 selves as present with, and as it were eye-witnesses of, the things we relate, 
 though really they were transacted long before ; whence it is that we fre- 
 quently use the Present instead of some past time. 3, It is to be remarked, 
 that there are some Verbs, the action whereof is in some sense finished 
 when begun ; in which case it will sometimes be all one whether we use 
 the passing or past Tenses. And, 4. The Present Tense (which, strictly 
 speaking is gone before we pronounce it) is generally taken in a large ac- 
 ceptation, and sometimes used for the Future, when we signify that the ex- 
 ecution is very near, or (according to Perizonius) when, together with the 
 action, we take in also the preparation to it. The brevity we are confined 
 to will not allow us to illustrate these things with examples : But by them, 
 I thkik we may account for the promiscuous usage of the Tenses, in both 
 Voices ; and what cannot be reduced to these, seems to be an abuse of the 
 
 C 3 
 
54? Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 language, and being very rarely to be met with, and perhaps only among 
 the poets, ought not to be made a common standard. I shall only add, 
 for a proof that these Tenses are not always to be used indifferently, that 
 when we signify a thing to be just now finished, we cannot use fui, or 
 fuerim, oxfuisse, but sum, sim, and esse. 
 
 3. Whether the learner should be obliged to get by heart these parts of 
 the Passive that are supplied by Sum, or if they should be referred to con- 
 struction (to which they seem more naturally to belong,) I leave to the dis- 
 cretion of the master, and therefore have put them in a smaller character. 
 
 4. Besides these parts which are thus made up, all the other parts may 
 be resolved into its own Participles, and the verb Sum, though their sig- 
 nifications are not precisely the same ; as, 
 
 Amo, amabam, amavi, amaveram, amabo. 
 
 c - c 9 ero amans, or 
 
 bum amans, eram amans, fui amans, fueram amans, < 
 
 £sum amaturus. 
 
 Amor, amabar, amabor, amer, amarer. 
 
 Sum amatus, eram amatus, ero amatus, amatus sim, amatus essem. 
 
 5. The Participle in rus with the Verb Sum is frequently used instead 
 of the Future of the Indicative, especially if purpose or intention is sig- 
 nified ; as, Profecturus sum, or Proficiscar, I will go, or I am to go : 
 And with sim and essem, instead of the Future- imperfect or Pluperfect 
 of the Subjunctive ; as, Non dubito quia sit fact urus, I doubt not but he 
 would do it ; A r o» dubitavi quin esset facturus, I doubted not but he 
 would do it ; and not quin fecerit, ox facer et, oxfecisset. 
 
 6. We have not joined ero with fuero for the Future of the Subjunctive, 
 because we thought it incongruous to couple words of different moods : 
 Though it must be owned, that it comes nearer in signification to the Fut. 
 of the Subjunctive than that of the Indicative ; as, Ovid. Qui cum victus 
 erit, is much the same as victus fuerit : And so these ancient Lawyers, 
 Scaevola, Brutus, and Manilius, understood the words of the Atinian 
 Law, Quod subreptum erit, ejus rei aeterna auctoritas esto. But that a 
 a Preterite time is there insinuated, is owing not to the word erit, but to 
 the Preterite Participle with which it is joined, as they learnedly argue. 
 See Aulus Gellius, lib. XVII. cap. 7. 
 
 7. We have omitted the termination minor in the second person Plural 
 of the Imperative, not thinking it fit to make that an ordinary standard 
 (as the common Rudiments do) which is to be found only once or twice 
 in Plautus, Epid. 5. 2. Facto opere arbitraminor ; and Pseud. 2. 2. Pa- 
 riter progrediminor. 
 
 8. For the same reason we have excluded the ancient termination asso 
 in the Future Subjunctive of the first conjugation ; as, excantasso, in the 
 laws of the 12 tables; levasso, in Ennius; abjurasso, invitasso, coenasso, 
 irritasso, servasso, &c. in Plautus : for excantavero, levavero, &c. To 
 which may be added esso of the second conjugation ; as, licessit, Idem ; 
 prohibessit, Cic. for licuerit, prohibuerit : To these some ad&jusso, for 
 jussero, in that of Virg. Aen. 11. v. 467. 
 
 Caetera, qua jusso, mecum manus inferat arma. 
 But though I was once of that opinion, yet I now incline with Vossius 
 to think that it is only a Syncope ; but not for the reason brought for it 
 by him, namely, that the other examples in sso change r into ss, as, levaro, 
 levasso ; but because I believe these old Futures were formed, not from the 
 common Futures in ero, as he supposes, but from the second Person Sing. 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 55 
 
 of the Present of the Indie, by adding so; as, levas, levasso ; prohibes, pro- 
 hibesso : According to which rule, jubeo must have formedjubesso, notjusso. 
 
 9. Upon the same account we have omitted the future of the Infinitive 
 in assere, formed from asso ; as, impetrassere, reconciliassere, expugnas- 
 sere, in Plautus, for impetraturum esse, &c. 
 
 10. Though we frequently meet with amaturus and amatus esse velfuis- 
 se, &c. in the Nom. as, Dicitur amaturus esse ; yet we have contented our- 
 selves with the Accusative amaturum and amatum, as most common, re- 
 serving the distinction between these to construction. [See p. 85.] 
 
 11. The Future of the Infinitive Passive is made up of the First Supine 
 and iri the Infinitive Passive of eo ; and therefore it is not varied in Num- 
 bers and Genders, as the parts made up of the Participle with Sum, 
 
 12. But the Supine with ire is not the Future of the Infinitive Active, 
 as some teach ; for such phrases as these, Amatum ire, Doctum ire, are 
 rather of the Present than Future Tense. 
 
 13. The Participle in dus with esse zxidfuisse, is not properly the Fu- 
 ture of the Infinitive Passive, as is commonly believed : For it does not so 
 much import futurity, as necessity, duty, or merit. For there is a great 
 difference between these two sentences, Dicit literas a se scriptum iri, and 
 Dicit literas a se scribendas esse ; the first signifying, That a letter will 
 be written by him, or, That he will write a letter ; and the second, That a 
 letter must be written by him, or, He is obliged to write a letter. For 
 though Sanctius and Messieurs de Port Royal contend that this Partici- 
 ple is sometimes used for simple futurity, yet I think Perizonius and 
 Johnson have clearly evinced the contrary. 
 
 14. It is to be noted, that the Imperative Mood wants the first Person 
 both Singular and Plural, because no man can or needs command or ex- 
 hort himself: Or, if he does, he must justle himself out of "the first into 
 the second Person ; as in that of Catullus speaking to himself, At iu, Ca- 
 tulle, destinatus obdura ; But you, Catullus, continue obstinate. 
 
 15. The Present of the Subjunctive is most frequently used instead of 
 the Imperative, especially in forbidding, after Ne, nemo, nullus, &c. : as 
 valeas, farewell, for vale: Ne facias, Do it not, rather than nefac. And 
 sometimes the Future of the Subjunctive ; as, Tu videris, See you to it; Ne 
 dixeris, Don't say it. And sometimes also the Future of the Indicative ; 
 as, Non occides, Thou shalt not kill, for Ne occide, or occidito. Sed valebis, 
 meaque negotia videbis, Cic. ; i. e. Sed vale, meaque negotia vide. Referes 
 ergo kaec et nuncius ibis Pelidae genitori, Virg. ; i. e. refer et ito. But it 
 is to be remarked, that none of these are proper Imperatives : For to the 
 first is understood, oro, rogo, peto, or the like, with ut ; as also to the second, 
 with ut understood, or ne expressed ; and the third is only a command by 
 consequence, because of the authority, influence, or power of the speaker : 
 For which reason, and to keep the Moods from interfering with one 
 another, we have excluded these from the Imperative ; though the com- 
 mon Rudiments take in the first, and Alvarus the second and third. 
 However, it is observable, that we show most civility and respect when 
 we use the Subjunctive, and most authority by the Future of the Indica- 
 tive, and nto of the Imperative ; which last is the ordinary strain in which 
 laws are delivered. But this rule is not always followed. 
 
 16. The ris of the second Person Passive is more usual than re ; and 
 erunt of the Perfect of the Indicative Active than ere; especially in prose ; 
 in wnich, if a vowel follow, they are very rarely to be met with. 
 
 C4 
 
56 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 III. REMARKS upon ENGLISH VERBS. 
 
 1. An English Verb hath only two Tenses, distinguished by different Ter- 
 minations, and both in the Active Voice, viz. the Present and Preterite. 
 The Present is the Verb itself, and the Preterite is commonly made by 
 adding ed to it, or d, when it ends in e; as, Fill, filled; Love, loved. 
 
 2. All the other parts of the Active, and the whole Passive, is made up 
 ©f the auxiliary verbs, Do, have, shall, will, may, can, and am ; as in page 
 59, and in the example, To love, page 40, &c. 
 
 3. An English Verb hath different terminations for the Persons of the 
 Singular Number. The Present hath three or four. The First Person is 
 the Verb itself ; the second ends in est or st ; the third in eM, es, ors. The 
 Preterite hath only two ; the first commonly ending in ed, and the second 
 in est or st. But the third Pers. Sing, of the Pret. and all the Persons Plur. 
 both of it and the Pres. cannot otherwise be distinguished than by the 
 Nom. before them : which therefore can never be omitted, as in the Latin. 
 
 4. We have two Participles, the Present ending always in ing, and the 
 Preterite ending regularly in ed, but very frequently in en and t. 
 
 5. There are a great many Irregular English Verbs ; but it is to be not- 
 ed, 1. That that Irregularity relates only to the termination of the Pre- 
 terite Tense, and the Passive Participle. 2. That it reaches only such 
 words as are native, and originally English. 3. That it is to be found 
 only in words of one syllable, or derived from words of one syllable. 4. 
 That where the Preterite is regular, the Passive Participle is the same 
 with it Except hewed, mowed, showed, snowed, sowed; which have hewn, 
 mown, shown, snown, sown. 
 
 6. These Irregularities may be reduced to the following heads : 
 
 (1.) The d is changed into t after c, ch, sh, f, k, p, x, and after s and 
 th, when pronounced hard ; and sometimes after I, m, n, r, when a short 
 vowel goes before it ; as, plac't, snatch'^fish't, walk't, dwelt, smelt. But 
 when a long vowel goes before p, it is either shortened, or changed into 
 a short one ; as, kept, slept, wept, crept, swept, leapt, from keep, sleep, 
 weep, creep, sweep, leap : As also sometimes before I, m, n, r, and v turned 
 into/, Q.S, feel, felt ; dream, dreamt; mean, meant ; leave, left. 
 
 (2.) When the Present ends in d or t, the Preterite is sometimes the 
 same with it ; as, read, cast, hurt, burst, hit, quit : And when two vowels 
 precede, the last is left out ; as, spread, spred; lead, led ; feed, fed ; bleed, 
 Med; meet, met. When a consonant comes before d, it is sometimes 
 changed into t; as, bend, bent ; lend, lent; send, sent.; rend, rent; gird, girt. 
 
 (3.) Most of the other Irregular Verbs may be comprehended under 
 the following lists : 
 
 I. Such as have their Preterite and Participle Passive the same. 
 Awake, awoke. Find, found. Pay, paid. Sting, stung. 
 Abide, abode. Flee, fled. Say, said. Swing, swung. 
 Beseech, besought. Fling, flung. Seek, sought. Swim, swum. 
 
 Bind, 
 
 bound. 
 
 Grind, 
 
 ground. 
 
 Sell, 
 
 sol^. 
 
 Teach, 
 
 taught. 
 
 Bring, 
 
 brought. 
 
 Gild, 
 
 gilt. 
 
 Sit, 
 
 sat. 
 
 Tell, 
 
 told. 
 
 Buy, 
 
 bought. 
 
 Hang, 
 
 hung. 
 
 Shine, 
 
 shone. 
 
 Think, 
 
 thought. 
 
 Catch, 
 
 caught. 
 
 Hear, 
 
 heard. 
 
 Spin, 
 
 spun. 
 
 Work, 
 
 wrought. 
 
 Big, 
 
 dug. 
 
 Lay, 
 
 laid. 
 
 Spring, 
 
 sprung. 
 
 Win, 
 
 won. 
 
 Drink, 
 
 drunk. 
 
 Lose, 
 
 lost. 
 
 Stand, 
 
 stood. 
 
 Wind, 
 
 wound. 
 
 Fight, 
 
 fought. 
 
 Make, 
 
 made. 
 
 Stick, 
 
 stuck. 
 
 Wring, 
 
 wrung. 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verbs. 
 II. Such as have the Preterite and Participle different; as, 
 
 Bear, 
 
 bore, 
 
 born. 
 
 Freeze 
 
 , froze, 
 
 frozen. 
 
 Shrink, shrank,shrunk. 
 
 Begir-, 
 
 began, 
 
 begun. 
 
 Get, 
 
 got, 
 
 gotten. 
 
 Sink, sank, sunk. 
 
 Bid, 
 
 bade, 
 
 bidden. 
 
 Give, 
 
 gave, 
 
 given. 
 
 Slay, slew, slain. 
 
 Beat, 
 
 beat, 
 
 beaten. 
 
 Go, 
 
 went, 
 
 gone. 
 
 Slide, slid, slidden. 
 
 Bite, 
 
 bit, 
 
 bitten. 
 
 Grow, 
 
 grew, 
 
 grown. 
 
 Smite, smote, smitten. 
 
 Blow, 
 
 blew, 
 
 blown. 
 
 Hew, 
 
 hewed, hewn. 
 
 Speak, spoke, spoken. 
 
 Chide, 
 
 chid, 
 
 chidden. 
 
 Hide, 
 
 hid, 
 
 hidden. 
 
 Spit, spat, spitten. 
 
 Choose, 
 
 chose, 
 
 chosen. 
 
 Hold, 
 
 held, 
 
 holden. 
 
 Strike, struck, stricken. 
 
 Cleave, 
 
 clove, 
 
 cleft. 
 
 Know, 
 
 knew, 
 
 known. 
 
 Strive, strove, striven. 
 
 Come, 
 
 came, 
 
 come. 
 
 Lie, 
 
 lay, 
 
 lain. 
 
 Swear, swore, sworn. 
 
 Crow, 
 
 crew, 
 
 crow'd. 
 
 Ride, 
 
 rode, 
 
 ridden. 
 
 Swell, s wdl' d, s woln . 
 
 Dare, 
 
 durst, 
 
 dared. 
 
 Ring, 
 
 rang, 
 
 rung. 
 
 Take, took, taken. 
 
 Do, 
 
 did, 
 
 done. 
 
 Rise, 
 
 rose, 
 
 risen. 
 
 Tear, tore, torn. 
 
 Draw, 
 
 drew, 
 
 drawn. 
 
 Run, 
 
 ran, 
 
 run. 
 
 Thrive, throve, thriven. 
 
 Drive, 
 
 drove, 
 
 driven. 
 
 See, 
 
 saw, 
 
 seen. 
 
 Throw, threw, thrown. 
 
 Eat, 
 
 ate, 
 
 eaten. 
 
 Seeth, 
 
 sod, 
 
 sodden. 
 
 Tread, trod, trodden. 
 
 Fall, 
 
 fell, 
 
 fallen. 
 
 Shake, 
 
 shook. 
 
 , shaken. 
 
 , Wear, wore, worn. 
 
 Fly, 
 
 flew. 
 
 flown, 
 
 Shear, 
 
 shore, 
 
 shorn. 
 
 Weave,wove, woven. 
 
 Forsake, forsook, forsaken, Shoot, shot, shotten. Write, wrote, written. 
 
 These Preterites, bare, share, sivare, tare, ware, clave, gat, begat, for- 
 gat, brake, spake, slang, sprang, swang, wan, stank, swank, are seldom 
 used: But beseech' 'd, catch' d, work'd, digged, gilded, girded, hang'd, swam, 
 writ, for besought, caught, &c. are frequently to be met with. 
 
 Note 1. That when the Verb ends in one Consonant, that consonant 
 is for the most part doubled before ing, ed, est, edst, and eth ; as, worship, 
 worshipping, worshipped, worshippest, worshippedst, worshippeth : As 
 also before en ; as, bid, bidden. 
 
 Note 2. That the Apostrophus (which was become too common in 
 English Verbs, as lovd, lovst, for loved, lovest,) begins now to be disused 
 by the most polite writers in prose ; but poets still use it, though not so 
 much as formerly. 
 
 Note 3. That the Preterite Active, and the Participle Passive (when 
 one word serves for both) are thus distinguished : When it hath nothing 
 before it but the Nominative alone or have or had with it, it is the Pre- 
 terite Active ; but when it hath any part of the helping verb am, it is 
 the Participle Passive. 
 
 Except come, gone, run, set, risen, fallen, grown, withered, and such like 
 Intransitive Verbs, which have frequently the Passive signs, am, art, &c. 
 instead of have in the Perfect Tense, and was, wast, &c. instead of had 
 in the Pluperfect ; as, Veni, I am come ; Veneram, I was come. 
 
 Note 4. That though the Latin Perfect frequently answers both to . 
 have anddz'd, (or the Preterite termination ed, See.) yet they seem to be 
 thus distinguished : did or ed, &c. respects a certain Past time, in which 
 the thing was finished or a- finishing; as, I wrote, or did write yesterday: 
 have either speaks of a thing as but just now past, or at least does not re- 
 fer to any particular time that it happened at ; as, I have written my 
 letter, i. e. just now; I have read of Julius Caesar, i. e. some time or 
 other. The first of these is called the Preter- Perfect Definite, and the 
 other the Preter-perfect Indefinite. 
 
 Note 5. That shall and will, by Mr. Brightland, are thus distinguish- 
 ed 
 
 C5 
 
58 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 In the First Person simply shall foretels: 
 In will a threat, or else a promise, dwells : 
 Shall in the Second and the Third does threat : 
 Will simply then fortels the future feat. 
 
 By Mr. Turner thus : 
 Will imports the Will or Purpose of the person it is joined with ; shall 
 implies the Will of another, who promises or threatens to do the thing, or 
 causes it to be done, permits it, commands it, or the like. 
 
 DE FORMATIONE VEBBOBUM. 
 
 Quatuor sunt Terminationes 
 Verbi, a quibus reliquae om- 
 nes formantur ; sciz. o Prae- 
 sentis, i Praeteriti, um Supini, 
 et re Infinitivi, hoc modo : 
 
 1. Ab o formantur am et 
 em. 
 
 2. Ab i formantur ram, rim, 
 ro f sse, et ssem. 
 
 3. Ab urn formantur u, us, 
 et rus. 
 
 4. A re formantur reliquae 
 omnes ; nempe, bam, bo, rem, 
 a, e> i, ns, dus, dum, di, do. 
 
 OF THE FOBMATION OF VEBBS. 
 
 There are four Terminations 
 of a Verb, from ivhich all the rest 
 are formed ; namely, o of the 
 Present, i of Hie Preterite, um 
 of the Supine, and re of the In- 
 finitive, after this manner : 
 
 1. From o are formed am 
 and em. 
 
 2. From i, ram, rim, ro, sse, 
 and ssem. 
 
 3. U, us, and rus, are form- 
 ed from um. 
 
 4. All other parts from re 
 do come ; as, bam, bo, rem, a, 
 e, and i, ns, and dus, dum, do, 
 and di. 
 
 In every complete Verb there are commonly four Principal Parts, viz. 
 the Present of the Indicative in o, the Preterite or Perfect in i, the first 
 Supine in um, and the Present of the Infinitive in re. The first, which 
 is therefore called the Theme or Root of the Verb, gives origin to the 
 whole Verb, either mediately or immediately. The Preterite, the first 
 Supine,, and the Present of the Infinitive, come from it immediately, and 
 all the rest from them ; except the Future of the Indicative in am, and 
 the Present of the Subjunctive in em or in am, which, by this scheme, are 
 also formed immediately from the Present in o. 
 
 It is to be noted, that the Preterites and Supines of the First Conjuga- 
 tion end commonly in avi and atum ; of the Second ui and itum ; and of 
 the Fourth in ivi and itum. But the Third Conjugation cannot be redu- 
 ced to any general rule, and there are a great many exceptions in the 
 other three, which are therefore to be learned by daily practice, till the scho- 
 lar is advanced to that part of Grammar that treats particularly of them. 
 
 But the Present of the Infinitive, and all the other parts of the Verb, 
 are regularly formed after one fixed and uniform manner. 
 
 In the foregoing rules of Formation, I have, for the ease of the me* 
 mory, put the Terminations instead of the Moods and Tenses ; but for 
 tlie greater plainness, they may be thus expressed : 
 
Part II.— Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 59 
 
 I. From the Present of the Indicative are formed the Future of the In- 
 dicative of the Third and Fourth Conjugations in am; and the Present ' 
 of the Subjunctive of the First in em, and of the other three in am. 
 
 II. From the Perfect of the Indicative are formed the Pluperfect of it ; 
 the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future of the Subjunctive, and the Perfect 
 of the Infinitive. 
 
 III. From the First Supine are formed the Last Supine, the Participle 
 Perfect, and the Future Active. 
 
 IV. From the Present of the Infinitive are formed the Imperfect of the 
 Indicative, the Future of the same when it ends in bo (viz. in the first 
 and second Conjugations), the Imperfect of the Subjunctive, the Impera- 
 tive, the Participles Present and Future Passive, and the Gerunds. 
 
 Note 1. That Verbs in io of the Third Conjugation retain i before 
 unt, unto, ebam, am, ens, endus, endum ; but lose it in the Present of 
 the Infinitive and Imperfect of the Subjunctive. 
 
 Note 2. That the last Person Plural of the Imperative may be form- 
 ed by adding o to the same Person of the Present of the Indicative ; as, 
 amant, amanto ; docent, docento. 
 
 Note 3. That the Passive Voice is formed from the same Tenses of the 
 Active, except where Sum is used, by adding r to o, or changing m into r. 
 
 Note 4. That the Present of the Infinitive Passive of the Third Con- 
 jugation may be formed by taking s from the Second Person of the Pre- 
 sent of the Indicative Active ; as, legis, legi : Or when the Verb is Depo- 
 nent, by changing or, or tor, into i; as, projiciscor, proficisci; morior, morL 
 
 Note 5. That the Present of the Infinitive Active, and the Second 
 Person of the Indicative and Imperative Passive in re, are always the same. 
 
 Note 6. That the Second Person Plural of the Present of the Indica- 
 tive, and of the Imperative, are the same in the Passive Voice. 
 
 Note 7. That where any of the principal Parts are wanting, those parts 
 are commonly wanting that come from them. For which reason, gram- 
 marians give Supines to a great many Verbs, which yet are not to be 
 found in any author, because the Participles formed from them are found ; 
 and they suppose likewise all Deponent Verbs of old to have had the Ac- 
 tive Voice, and consequently Supines, though now lost. 
 
 Note 8. That all Verbs of the Second Conjugation end in eo, and all 
 Verbs of the Fourth in io, except eo and queo. There are eight Verbs in 
 eo of the First Conjugation, viz. Beo, creo, screo, meo, calceo, laqueo, 
 nauseo, nucleo. There are twenty-four in to of the First, viz. Amplio, 
 basio, brevio, concilio, crucio, furio, glacio, hio, lanio, luxurio, macio, nun- 
 cio, pio, propitio, radio, repudio, satio, saucio, socio, somnio, spolio, sua- 
 vio, or rather suavior, vario, vitio ; with some others less common, as, 
 Decurio, succenturio, fascio, retalio, strio, tertio, $c. : And twelve of the 
 Third, viz. capio, facio, jacio, lacio, specio, fodio, fugio, cupio, rapio, sa- 
 pio, pario, quatio, with their compounds. 
 
 It is not, in my opinion, necessary to trouble the learner with a parti- 
 cular account how the respective changes in the Moods, Tenses, Num- 
 bers, and Persons, are made ; they being obvious from the examples a- 
 bove, in which I have distinguished them from the Body or Essential Part 
 of the Verb, by a Division or Hyphen. And perhaps this alone, without any 
 other particular rule, might be a sufficient direction. For to conjugate 
 one Verb by the example of another, we have no more to do, but in- 
 stead of the Essential Part of the one, (which is all that stands before o, 
 
 C6 
 
60 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 eo, or io, of the Present of the Indicative) to substitute the Essential Part 
 of the other, and then to add to it the additional syllables it receives in 
 conjugation, as before. Only we are to advert, 1. That in the Preterites 
 and Supines, and the Parts that come from them, we are to reckon all be- 
 fore i and urn, for the body of the Verb, adding the usual syllables to it, 
 as in the Active Voice of Lego. 2. In Verbs in io, we are to retain or 
 omit the i, as in Note 1. 
 
 There is yet another way of the Formation of Verbs, differing only 
 from the first method in this, that what parts according to it are formed 
 from the Infinitive, are by this formed from the First or Second Person 
 of the Present of the Indicative. But though this maybe the more natural 
 way, yet the other is more easy and uniform. 
 
 DE VEREIS IRREGULARIBUS. 
 
 Irregularia Verba vulgo re- 
 censentur octo, viz. Sum, Eo, 
 Queo, Volo, NgIo, Malo, Fero, 
 et Fio, cum compositis. 
 
 OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 JL he Irregular Verbs are com- 
 monly reckoned eight, viz. Sum, 
 Eo, Queo, Volo, Nolo, Malo, 
 Fero, and Fio, with their com- 
 pounds. 
 
 SUM. 
 
 Sum, fui, esse, To be. 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 
 
 Praesens. 
 
 
 Sum, 
 
 I am, 
 
 Sim, 
 
 / may or can be, 
 
 Es, 
 
 Thou art, 
 
 Sis, 
 
 Tliou mayst or canst be, 
 
 Est: 
 
 He is : 
 
 Sit: 
 
 He may or can be : 
 
 Sumus, 
 
 We are, 
 
 Simus, 
 
 We may or can be, 
 
 Estis, 
 
 Ye are, 
 
 Sitis, 
 
 Ye may ov can be, 
 
 Sunt. 
 
 They are. 
 
 Sint. 
 Tmperfectum 
 
 They may or can be 
 
 Eram, 
 
 I was, 
 
 Essem, 
 
 I might, &c. be, 
 
 Eras, 
 
 TJiou wast, 
 
 Esses, 
 
 Thou mightst be, 
 
 Erat: 
 
 He was : 
 
 Esset : 
 
 He might be ; 
 
 E ramus, 
 
 We icere, 
 
 Essemus, 
 
 We might be, 
 
 Eratis, 
 
 Ye were, 
 
 Essetis, 
 
 Ye might be, 
 
 Erant. 
 
 They were. 
 
 Essent. 
 Perfectum. 
 
 They might be. 
 
 Fui, 
 
 I have been, 
 
 Fuerim, 
 
 I may have been, 
 
 Fuisti, 
 
 Thou hast been 
 
 , Fueris, 
 
 Thou mayst have been, 
 
 Fuit: 
 
 He hath been : 
 
 Fuerit : 
 
 He may have been : 
 
 Fuimus, 
 
 We have been, 
 
 FuerimuSj 
 
 We may have been, 
 
 Fuistis, 
 
 Ye have been, 
 
 Fueritis, 
 
 Ye may have been, 
 
 Fuerunt 
 v. -ere 
 
 >J They have been. 7wTinU 
 
 They may have been. 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 
 Blusquam-perfectum. 
 
 61 
 
 I had been, Fuissem, I might, &c. have 
 
 Thou hadst been, Fuisses, Thou mightst have 
 He had been : Fuisset : He might have 
 Fuissemus, We might have 
 Fuissetis, Ye might have 
 Fuissent. 
 
 n 
 
 Fueram, 
 
 Fueras, 
 
 Fuerat : 
 
 Fueramus, We had been, 
 
 Fueratis, Ye had been, 
 
 Fuerant. They had been 
 
 Futurum. 
 
 Ero, I shall or will be, Fuero, 
 
 Eris, Thou shalt or wilt be, Fueris, 
 
 Erit : He shall or will be : Fuerit : 
 
 Erimus, We shall or will be, Fuerimus, We shall have been, 
 
 Eritis, Ye shall or will be, Fueritis, Ye shall have been, 
 
 Erunt. They shall or will be. Fuerint. They shall have been. 
 
 They might have j 
 
 i" shall have been, 
 Thou shalt have been, 
 He shall have been : 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 ' Es vel 
 
 Esto, 
 Esto: 
 Este vel 
 Estote, 
 Sunto. 
 
 > Be thou, 
 Let him be : 
 Be ye, 
 Let them be. 
 
 INFINITIVUS. 
 Braes. Esse, To be. 
 
 Berf. Fuisse, To have been. 
 
 But. Futurum ) To be about 
 esse vel fuisse. ) to be. 
 PARTICIPIUM. 
 Fut. Futurus, About to be. 
 
 The Compounds of Sum are, adsum, absum, desum, intersum, praesum, 
 obsum, subsum, supersum, insum, prosum, and possum. The first eight 
 are conjugated as the simple sum ,- insum wants the Preterite and its de- 
 scendants, for we do not use infui, infuistt, znfueram, &c. 
 
 ^ PRO SUM, To do good, has a d where SUM begins 
 
 with e ; as, 
 
 TNH SBr. Pro-sum, prod-es, prod-est: pro-sumus, prod-estis,pro- 
 
 * \lm. Prod-eram, prod-eras, prod-erat: prod-eramus, fyc. [sunt. 
 SUB. Im. Prod-essem,prod-esses,prod-esset:prod-essemus, $c. 
 IMPER. Prod-esto, prod-este. INFIN. Praes. Prod-esse. 
 
 POSSUM should be pot-sum (as biing compounded ofpotis, able, and 
 sum) ; but for the better sound, t is changed into s before another s, and 
 retained before any other letter : And for the same reason, s is always 
 taken away. Possem and posse are contracted for jiotessem, potesse, which 
 are yet to be found in some old authors : Thus, 
 
 ^f Possum, potui, posse, To be able. 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Braes. Possum, potes, potest: possumus. potestis, possunt." 
 Imp. Poteram, poteras, poterat: poteramus, poteratis, poterant. 
 
 Berf. Potui, potuisti, potuit: potuimus, potuistis, <*? 
 
 Plus. Potueram, potueras, potuerat: potueramus, potueratis, potuerant 
 Fut. Potero, poteris, poterit: poteriraus, poteritis, poterunt. 
 
62 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 Praes. Possim, possis, possit : possimus, possitis, possint. 
 Imp. Possem, posses, posset : possemus, possetis, possent. 
 Perf. Potuerim, potueris, potuerit: potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint 
 Plus. Potuissem, potuisses, potuisset : potuissemus, potuissetis, potuissent 
 put. Potuero, potueris, potuerit : potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint. 
 
 INFINITIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Posse. Perf- Potuisse. The rest wanting. 
 
 
 E 0. 
 
 
 
 Eo, ivi, itum, ire, To go. 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 
 Praes. Eo, 
 
 is, it: imus, itis, 
 
 eunt. 
 
 Imp. Ibam, 
 
 ibas, ibat: ibamus, ibatis, 
 
 ibant. 
 
 Perf. Ivi, 
 
 ivisti, ivit : ivimus, ivistis, 
 
 C iverunt, 
 
 Plus. Iveram, iveras, iverat : iveramus, iveratis, iverant. 
 Fut. Ibo, ibis, ibit : ibimus, ibitis, ibunt. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Earn, eas, eat : eamus, eatis, eant. 
 
 Imp. Irem, ires, iret : iremus, iretis, irent. 
 
 Perf. Iverim, iveris, iverit: iverimus, iveritis, iverint. 
 
 Plus. Ivissem, ivisses, ivisset : ivissemus, ivissetis, ivissent. 
 
 Fut. Ivero, iveris, iverit : iverimus, iveritis, iverint. 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. INFINITIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Ire. 
 
 ( Ito, ( itote, 
 
 
 Perf. Ivisse. 
 
 Fut. Iturum esse v. fuisse. 
 
 PARTICIPIA. 
 Praes. lens, Gen. euntis. 
 Fut. Iturus, -a, -um. 
 
 SUPINA. 
 
 1. Itum. 
 
 2. Itu. 
 
 GERUNDIA. 
 
 Eundum, 
 
 Eundi, 
 
 Eundo. 
 
 Note 1. That in general EO is a Verb of the Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 Note 2. That of old, Verbs of the Fourth had their Imperfect in ibam 
 and Future in ibo ; of which there are many examples in Plautus and Te- 
 rence, and some in Virgil and Horace. 
 
 After the same manner the compounds of Eo are conjugated, viz. ad- 
 eo, abeo, exeo, obeo, redeo, subeo, pereo, co'eo, ineo, praeeo, anteeo, prodeo y 
 jyraetereoj transeo ; adibam, adibo, adiens, adeuntis, adeundum, &c. But 
 umbio is a regular Verb of the Fourth Conjugation. 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 63 
 
 Note, That in the Compounds, ivi, ivisti, &c. are seldom used, but 
 they are contracted into ii, iisti ; as, adii, adiisli, and sometimes adisti : 
 So adieram, adierim, &c. 
 
 Queo, I can, and Nequeo, I cannot, are conjugated the same way as eo ; 
 they only want the Imperative and the Gerunds ; and the Participles are 
 scarcely in use. 
 
 VOLO. 
 
 Volo, volui, velle, To will or be willing. 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Praes. 
 Imp. 
 
 Volo, 
 Vol-ebam, 
 
 vis, vult : 
 -ebasj -ebat : 
 
 volumus, vultis, 
 -ebamus, -ebatis, 
 
 volunt. 
 -ebant. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Vol-ui, 
 
 -uisti, -uit : 
 
 -uimus, -uistis, ) 
 
 -uerunt, 
 v. uere. 
 
 Plus. 
 Fut. 
 
 Vol-ueram, 
 Volam, 
 
 -ueras, -uerat : 
 voles, volet : 
 
 -ueramus, -ueratis, 
 volemus, voletis, 
 
 -uerant. 
 volent. 
 
 Praes 
 Imp. 
 
 Velim, 
 Vellem, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 velis, velit : velimus, velitis, 
 velles, vellet : vellemus, velletis, 
 
 velint. 
 vellent. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Vol-uerim, 
 
 -ueris, -uerit : 
 
 -uerimus, -ueritis, 
 
 -uerint. 
 
 Plus. 
 
 Vol-uissem 
 
 -uisses, -uisset 
 
 : -uissemus, -uissetis 
 
 -uissent. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Vol-uero, 
 
 -ueris, -uerit : 
 
 -uerimus, -ueritis, 
 
 -uerint. 
 
 Praes 
 
 INFINITIVUS. 
 
 . Velle. Perf. Voluisse. 
 
 PARTICIPIUM. 
 Praes. Volens. 
 
 
 
 
 The rest are wanting. 
 
 
 Praes. 
 Imp. 
 
 Perf 
 
 Plus. 
 Fut. 
 
 Praes, 
 
 Imp. 
 
 NOLO 
 
 Nolo, nolui, nolle, To be unwilling. 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 Nolo, non-vis,non-vult: nolumus, non-vultis, nolunt. 
 
 Nol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat: -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 
 
 Nol-ui, -uisti, -uit: 
 
 Nol-ueram,-ueras, -uerat : 
 Nolam, noles, nolet : 
 
 -uimus, -uistis, 
 
 \: 
 
 -uerunt, 
 uere. 
 
 -ueramusj-ueratis, -uerant. 
 nolemus, noletis, nolent. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 Nolim, nolis, nolit : nolimus, nolitis, nolint. 
 Nollem, nolles, nollet: nollemus,nolletis, nollent. 
 
64< Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Perf. Nol-uerim, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 
 Plus. Nol-uissem, -uisses, -uisset : -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent. 
 Fut. Nol-uero, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 
 IMPERATIVUS. INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIUM. 
 
 Noli, $ nolite, | Pr. Nolle. | Praes. Nolens. 
 
 The rest wanting. 
 
 y Noli, C nolite, I Pr. Nolle. 
 \ Nolito: c nolitote. | Perf. Noluisse. 
 
 M A L O. 
 
 Malo, malui, malle, To be more willing. 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Malo, mavis, mavult : malumus, mavultis, malunt. 
 
 Imp. Mal-ebam, -ebas, -ebat: -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 
 
 Perf. Mal-ui, -uisti, -uit: -uimus, -uistis, < " ' 
 
 J \ v. uere. 
 
 Plus. Mal-ueram, -ueras, -uerat : -ueramus,-ueratis, -uerant. 
 
 Fut. Malam, males, malet, $c. This is scarcely in use. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Malim, malis, malit : malimus, malitis, malint. 
 
 Imp. Mallem, malles, mallet: mallemus, malletis, mallent. 
 
 Perf. Mal-uerim, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 
 
 Plus. Mal-uissem, -uisses ; -uisset : -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent. 
 
 Fut. Mal-uero, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 
 
 INFINITIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Malle. Perf. Maluisse. 
 
 Note, That Volo, Nolo, and Malo, retain something of the Third 
 Conjugation ; for vis, vult, vultis, are contracted of volis, volit, volitis ; 
 and o is changed into u ; for of old they said volt, voltis. 
 
 Nolo is compounded of non volo, and Malo of magis volo. 
 
 FERO, 
 
 VOX ACTIVA. 
 
 Fero, tuli, latum, ferre, To bring or suffer 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 Praes. Fero, fers, fert: ferimus, fertis, ! ferunt. 
 Imp. Ferebam, ferebas, ferebat : ferebamus, ferebatis, ferebant. 
 
 Perf. Tuli, tulisti, tulit : tulimus, tulistis, < , ' 
 
 J ' ' ( v. tulere. 
 
 Plus. Tuleram, tuleras, tulerat : tuleramus, tuleratis, tulerant. 
 
 Fut. Feram, feres, feret : feremus, feretis, ferent. 
 
Part IL—Chap. III.— Of 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 Praes. Feram, feras, ferat : feramus, 
 Imp. Ferrem, ferres, ferret : ferremus, 
 Perf. Tulerim, tuleris, tulerit : tulerimus, 
 Plus. Tulissem, tulisses, tulisset : tulissemus 
 Fut. Tulero, tuleris, tulerit: tulerimus 
 
 Verb. 
 
 65 
 
 Praes. 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 ^ er > ferto: \ f rte > ferunto. 
 ( Ferto, c iertote, 
 
 PARTICIPIA. SUPINA. 
 
 Praes. Ferens. 1. Latum. 
 
 Fut. Laturus, -a, -um, j 2. Latu. 
 
 VOX PASSIVA. 
 
 Feror, latus, 
 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Feror, ) * ems 5 fertur : ferimur, ferimini, feruntur. 
 ( ferre, 
 
 C — pbfiris 
 Imp. Fer-ebar, < " , '-ebatur : -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur. 
 ( -ebare, 
 
 feratis, ferant. 
 ferretis, ferrent. 
 tuleritis, tulerint. 
 , tulissetis, tulissent. 
 tuleritis, tulerint. 
 
 INFINITIVUS. 
 
 Praes. Ferre, 
 
 Perf. Tulisse. 
 
 Fut. Laturum 
 esse vel fuisse. 
 GERUNDIA. 
 
 Ferendum, 
 
 Ferendi, 
 
 Ferendo. 
 
 ferri. 
 
 Perf. Latus sum vel fui, 
 Plus. Latus eram vel fueram, 
 
 latus es vel fuisti, fyc. 
 latus eras vel fueras, <$r. 
 
 Fut. Ferar, ) ' feretur : feremur, feremini, ferentur. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 Pr. Ferar, ) ' feratur : feramur, feramini, ferantur, 
 
 Im. Ferrer, < n ' ferretur : ferremur, ferremini, ferrentur 
 
 ' ( ferrere, 
 
 Perf. Latus sim vel fuerim. 
 Plus. Latus essem vel fuisserrij 
 Fut. Latus fuero, 
 
 latus sis vel fueris, fyc. 
 latus esses vel fuisses, ($*c, 
 latus fueris, fyc. 
 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 Ferre, 
 Fertor, 
 
 INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIA. 
 
 Praes. Ferri. | Perf. Latus, -a, 
 
 Perf. Latum esse vel fuisse. Fut. Ferendus, -a, 
 Fut. Latum iri. 
 
 Praes 
 
 ■\ 
 
 fertor : 
 
 ferimini, 
 
 feruntor. 
 
 -um. 
 -um. 
 
66 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Note, That Fero is a Verb of the Third Conjugation ; fers, fert, fer- 
 tis, ferto, ferte, f err em, ferre, ferris, fertur, fertor, being contracted of fe- 
 ris, ferit, feritis, ferito, ferite, fererem, ferere, fereris, feritur, and feritor. 
 
 Also fer is contracted of fere ; which, in like manner, has happened 
 to the Imperatives of dico, duco, facto, they .aaving die, duc,fac, instead 
 of dice, duce,face. 
 
 The compounds of Fero are conjugated the same way as the simple ; 
 as, affero, attuli, allatum ; aufero, abstuli, ablatum • differo, distuli, di- 
 latum ; confero, contuli, collatum ; infero, intuli, illatum ; offero, obtuii, 
 oblatum ; effero, extuli, elatum : So, circumfero, perfero, transfero, de- 
 fero, profero, antefero, praefero. 
 
 FI O. 
 
 Fio, factus, fieri, To be made or to become. 
 INDICATIVUS. 
 Praes. Fio, fis, fit : fimus, fitis, fiunt. 
 
 Imp. Fiebam, fiebas, fiebat : fiebamus, fiebatis, fiebant. 
 Perf. Factus sum vet fui, factus es vel fuisti, fyc. 
 
 Plus* Factus eram vel fueram, factus eras vel fueras, <f*c. 
 Fut. Fiam, fies, fiet : fiemus, fietis, fient. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
 Fiam, fias, fiat : fiamus, fiatis, fiant. 
 Fierem, fieres, fieret : fieremus, fieretis, fierent. 
 Factus sim vel fuerim, factus sis vel fueris, §c. 
 Factus essem vel fuissem, factus esses vel fuisses, <$-c. 
 
 Praes, 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Perf 
 
 Plus. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Pr '\ 
 
 Factus fuero, 
 IMPERATIVUS. 
 
 *M* te > fiunto. 
 Fito, ( fitote, 
 
 factus fueris, fyc. 
 
 INFINITIVUS. 
 Praes. Fieri. 
 
 Perf. Factum esse v. fuisse. 
 Fut. Factum iri. 
 
 PARTICIPIA. 
 Perf. Factus, -a, -um. 
 Fut. Faciendus, -a, -um. 
 
 SUPINUM. 
 
 Factu. 
 
 * Though Fi is rejected by some grammarians of great note, yet we 
 have given it place here, not only because it is to be found in Plautus, 
 but also in Horace, lib. 2. Sat. v. ver. 38. Fi cognitor ipse, according to 
 ike best MSS. and Editions. 
 
Part IL—Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 67 
 
 Note 1. That Fio is the Passive of facto, to make, (which is regular) 
 instead of factor, which is not in use : Yet the compounds of facto, which 
 change a into i, are regular; as, afficior, affectus, qffici; perficior, 
 perfectus, perfici. 
 
 Note 2. That the compounds of facto, with Verbs, Nouns, or Ad- 
 verbs, retain the a, and have their imperat. Act. fac, and their Passive 
 Form (when used^o; as, calefacio, lucrifacio, benefacio; calefac, calefio, 
 &c. But those compounded with a Preposition change the a into i, and have 
 Jice and ficior. There are some compounded of facto and a Noun where 
 facto is changed 'mtofco of the First Conjugation ; as, magnifico, signify 
 co, &c. 
 
 To the Irregular Verbs may be reduced EDO, To eat, which in some 
 of its parts falls in with the Verb Sum : Thus, 
 
 IND. Praes. Edo, es, est: ... estis, . . . 
 
 SUB. Imp. Essem, esses, esset: essemus, essetis, essent. 
 
 IMP. Praes. Es vel esto, . . . este vel estote. INFIN. Esse. 
 
 Likewise its compounds, comedo, comes, comest,8tc. axia\exedo, exes, exest, 
 &c. But all these may likewise be regularly conjugated ; edo, edis, edit, 
 &c. ederem, ederes, ederet, &c. 
 
 OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 X hough some of the Irregular Verbs already mentioned want some 
 of their parts, and upon that account may be called also Defective Verbs, 
 yet by Defective Verbs here we chiefly understand such as want consi- 
 derable branches, or are used only in few Tenses and Persons. 
 We shall set down those that most frequently occur. 
 1. AIO, I say; INQUAM, I say; FOREM, I should be; AUSIM, I 
 dare; FAXIM, I'll see to it, or I will do it; AVE and SALVE, God save 
 you, Hail, Good morrow; CEDO, Tell or Give me; QUAESO, I pray. 
 
 C Praes. Aio, ais, ait: aiunt. 
 
 IND. < Imp. Ai-ebam,-ebas, -ebat : -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 
 
 C.Perf . . . aias, 
 
 SUB. Praes.. . . aisti, aiat :, . . . aiatis, aiant. 
 IMPER. ai. [PARTICIP. Praes. aiens.] 
 
 ^j C Praes. Inquam, inquis, inquit : inquimus, inquitis, inquiunt. 
 
 ** J Imp inquiebat: inquiebant 
 
 9 jPerf. . . . inquisti, 
 
 ►h (^Fut. . . . inquies, inquiet : 
 
 IMPER. Inque, -ito. PARTICIP. Praes. inquiens. 
 
 SUB. } ™"' f Forem, fores, foret : foremus, foretis, forent. 
 
 INF. Fore, to be, or to be about to be; the same mth futurum esse. 
 
 C Praes. Ausim, ausis, ausit : 
 
 SUB. -< Perf. Faxim, faxis, faxit : ........ faxint. 
 
 (_Fut. Faxo, faxis, faxit : faxitis, faxint. 
 
 Note, That Faxim and Faxo are used instead of Fecerim and Fecero. 
 ("Ave, 7 avete, ? TXT1 -, 
 
 imper. W ' Ittm 
 
 1 Salve, 7 salvete, 1 TVTT ^ , 
 
 CSalv*to,$salvetot4 *NF. nlvem. 
 Cedo, cedite. ' • , 
 
 IND. Praes, Quaeso, quaesumus. 
 
68 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue^ 
 
 II. These three Verbs, ODI, MEMINI, COEPI, have only tire Pre- 
 terite Tense, and what is formed from it; and therefore are by some 
 called PRETERITIVE Verbs : Thus, 
 
 Odi, oderam, oderim, odissem, odero, odisse. 
 
 Memini, memineram, meminerim, meminissem, meminero, meminisse. 
 
 Coepi, coeperam, coeperim, coepissem, coepero, coepisse. 
 
 But under these they comprehend also the significations of the other 
 Tenses ; as, memini, I remember, or I have remembered ; memineram, I 
 remembered, or I had remembered, &c. So odi, I hate or I have hated ; 
 coepi, I begin, or I have begun : Though I am not fully satisfied as to this 
 last ; for I do not know any example where coepi doth clearly signify the 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Memini hath also the Imperative, memento, remember thou ; memen- 
 tote, remember ye. Some add meminens, remembering, which is scarcely 
 to be imitated. 
 
 To these some add novi, because it frequently hath the signification of 
 the Present, I know, as well as i" have knoivn, though it comes from nos- 
 co, which is complete. 
 
 Note 1. That odientes is to be found in Petronius ; odiatur in Seneca; 
 coepio in Plautus and Terence. See Voss. Analog, lib. iii. cap. 59. 
 
 Note 2. That the Participles coeptus, and osus, with its compounds, 
 perosus, exosus, are in use among the best authors, but perodi and exodi 
 are not. 
 
 III. Faris, to speak, wants the first Pers. Pres. of the Indie, and per- 
 haps the whole Pres. of the Subjunctive ; for we do not say for orfer, and 
 rarely fer is, fertur, &c. So likewise daris and deris, but not dor, or der, 
 to be given. The compound of the first ; as, effor, affor, are rare ; but 
 the compounds of the other, as addor, reddor, are common. 
 
 IV. Most of the other Defective Verbs are but single words and rare- 
 ly to be found but among Poets ; as, infit, he begins ; defit, it is wanting. 
 Some are compounded of a Verb with the Conjunction si ; as, sis for si vis, 
 if thou wilt ; sultis for si vultis, if ye will ; sodes for si audes, if thou darest. 
 
 OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 These are also a kind of Defective Verbs, which for the most part are 
 used only in the Third Person Singular. They have the sign it before 
 them in English ; as, poenitet, it repents ; placet, it pleases ; and are 
 thus conjugated : 
 
 Praes. Imperf. Perfect. Plusquam. Fut. 
 
 IND. Poenitet, poenitebat, poenituit, poenituerat, poenitebit. 
 SUB. Poeniteat, poeniteret, poenituerit, poenituisset, poenituerit. 
 INF. Poenitere, .... poenituisse. 
 
 Most Verbs may be used impersonally in the Passive Voice, especially 
 such as otherwise have no Passive ; as, 
 
 Praes. Imperf. Perfect. Plusquam. Fut. 
 
 Ind. Pugnatur, pugnabatur, pugnatum A r • ' -atum j f ' * P u g na -bitur. 
 Sub. Pugnetur, pugnaretur, pugnatum < r ' • -atum 3^. ' -atumfuerit 
 Inf. Pugnari, pugnatum Y^se, pugnatum iri. 
 
Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 69 
 
 Note 1. That Impersonate are applied to any Person or Number, by- 
 putting that which stands before other Verbs, after the Impersonate, in 
 the Cases which they govern ; as, poenitet me, te, ilium, I repent, thou re- 
 pentest, he repenteth ; instead of ego poeniteo, &c. which is scarcely Latin. 
 Placet mihi, tibi, Mi, It pleases me, thee, him ; or, I please, thou pleasest, 
 fyc. Pugnatur a me, a te, ab Mo, I fight, thou tightest, he fighteth, $c. 
 
 Note 2. That Impersonate are not used in the Imperative, but instead 
 of it we take the Subjunctive. 
 
 Note 3. That Impersonal Verbs are very often used personally, espe- 
 cially in the Plural Number ; as, accidit, contingit, evenit, pertinet, decet, 
 dolet, licet, nocet, patet, placet, praestat, &c. For we say, Tu mihi sola 
 places ; Nulli noceo ; Multa homini accidunt, contingunt, eveniunt ; Par- 
 vum parva decent, fyc. But it is to be remarked that they are generally 
 Impersonal, when an Infinitive or Subjunctive Mood follows : For though 
 I can say, Tu places mihi ; yet I cannot say, Si places audire, but Si pla- 
 cet tibi audire. Again, we cannot say, Ego contigi esse domi ; but Me 
 contigit esse domi, or Mihi contigit esse domi. Likewise, Evenit ilium 
 mori, or Ut ille moreretur ; but not Ille evenit mori. 
 
 [I shall not here inquire what is the word understood to Impersonal 
 Verbs, whether it is a Noun of the like signification, as Pugna, pugnatur, 
 or the word res or negotium, or the Infinitive Mood ; though I incline to 
 think that any one of these will not answer to them all, but that there are 
 some to which the first, to others the second, and to others the third, may 
 be most fitly understood, as the nature of the Verb and good sense shall 
 direct us. This we are sure of, that the word understood can never be a 
 Person properly so called, but a Thing : for which reason, and the want 
 of the two primary Persons, viz. the First and Second, they are called 
 Impersonal, though some are much offended with the name.] 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 rjl OF PARTICIPLE. 
 
 JL here are three things espe- 
 cially to be considered in a Par- 
 ticiple, viz. Time, Signification, 
 and Declension. 1 
 
 I. The Tenses of Participles 
 are three; the Present, Prete- 
 rite, and Future. 
 Pres. 
 
 CAP. IV. 
 
 ™ DE PARTICIPIO. 
 
 JLria sunt praecipue consi- 
 derandain Participio,viz. Tern- 
 2^us, Signification et Declinatio. 
 I. Tempora Participiorum 
 sunt tria : Praesens, Praeteri- 
 tum, et Futurum. 
 
 •g ^ Praet.<! &% 4 tus,sus,xus. 
 
 I Fut. [_ E" 1 I rus, dus. 
 II. Significatio Participio- 
 rum est vel Activa vel Passiva, 
 vel Neutra, ad modum verbo- 
 rum a quibus descendunt. 
 
 as O 
 
 .1 JJ < tus,sus,x 
 
 Pret. 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 Fut. L ^ L rus ' ^ us * 
 
 II. The signification of Par- 
 ticiples is either Active or Pas- 
 sive, or Neuter, after the man- 
 ner of the Verbs from which 
 they come. 
 
70 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 'in ns et rus, plerumque 
 sunt Activa. 
 in das, semper Passiva. 
 .- <j in tus, sus, xus, plerum- 
 que sunt Passiva y in- 
 terdum vero Activa, vel 
 etiam Commimia. 
 III. Omnia Participia sunt 
 adjectiva : quae desinunt in ns 
 sunt Tertiae Declinationis ; re- 
 liqua autem omnia Primae et 
 Secundae. 
 
 " in ns and rus, are gene- 
 rally Active. 
 in dus, always Passive. 
 <j in tus, sus, xus, are gene- 
 rally Passive, sometimes 
 Active, or also Com- 
 mon. 
 
 III. All Participles are Ad- 
 jectives : Those which end in 
 ns are of the Third Declension; 
 but all the rest are of the First 
 and Second. 
 
 A PARTICIPLE is a kind of Adjective formed from a Verb, which 
 in its signification always imports some time. 
 
 It is so called because it partakes of a Noun and a Verb, having Gen- 
 ders and Cases from the one, Time and Signification from the other, and 
 Number from both. 
 
 1. Active Verbs [See Chap. IX.] have two Participles ; one of the 
 Present Time ending in ns ; as amans, loving : And another of the Fu- 
 ture ending in rus ; as amaturus, about to love. 
 
 2. Passive Verbs have likewise two Participles ; one of the Preterite, 
 ending in tus, sus, or xus; as, amatus, loved; visits, seen; flexus, bowed; 
 (to which some add one in uus, viz. mortuus, dead : ) And another of the 
 Future ending in dus ; as, amandus, to be loved. 
 
 3. Neuter Verbs have two Participles, as the Active ; as, sedens, sit- 
 ting; sessurus, about to sit. 
 
 4. Active Intransitive Verbs have frequently three Participles; as, 
 carens, wanting ; cariturus, about to want ; carendus, to be wanted : Do- 
 lens, grieving ; doliturus, about to grieve ; dolendus, to be grieved : And 
 sometimes four; as, vigilans, watching; vigilaturus, about to watch; vi- 
 gilatus, watched; vigilandus, to be watched. 
 
 5. Deponent and Common Verbs have generally four Participles ; as, 
 loquens, speaking ; locuturus, about to speak ; locutus, having spoken ; lo- 
 quendus, to be spoken : Dignans, vouchsafing ; dignaturus, about to 
 vouchsafe ; dignatus, having vouchsafed, or being vouchsafed ; dignandus, 
 to be vouchsafed. 
 
 Note 1. That in some Deponent Verbs, the Participle Perfect has 
 both an Active and Passive signification, though that of the Verb itself is 
 only Active ; as, testatus, having testified, or being testified. So menti- 
 tus, meditatus, oblitus, &c. 
 
 Note 2. That it is essential to a Participle, 1. That it come imme- 
 diately from a Verb ; 2. That in its signification it also include Time. 
 Therefore, tunicatus, coated ; larvatus, masked ; and such like, are not 
 Participles, because they come from Nouns, and not from Verbs : And, 
 ignarus, ignorant; elegans, neat; circumspectus, circumspect; tacitus t 
 silent ; falsus, false ; profusus, prodigal, <£c. are not Participles, because 
 thev do not signify Time. 
 
Part II.— Chap. IV.— Of Participle. 7 1 
 
 There are a kind of Adjective Nouns ending in unclus, which approach 
 very near to the nature of Participles ; such as, errabundus, ludibundus, 
 populabundus. They are formed from the Imperf. of the Indicative, 
 and their signification is much the same with the Participle of the Present 
 Time ; only they signify abundance, or a great deal of the action, accord- 
 ing to A. Gellius, lib. xi. cap. 15. ; or, according to others, they signify 
 the same with the Participles of Frequentative Verbs, when these are not 
 in use. See Gronovius on Gellius, as above cited. 
 
 APPENDIX of Gerunds and Supines. 
 
 GERUNDS and SUPINES, which, because of their near relation to 
 Verbs, are by some not improperly called Participial words, are a sort of 
 Substantive Nouns, expressing the action of the Verb in general, or in the 
 abstract. Gerunds are Substantives of the Second Declension, and com- 
 plete in all their Cases, except the Vocative. Supines are Substantives of 
 the Fourth Declension having only two Cases ; the Accusative in urn, 
 which makes the First Supine ; and the Ablative in u, which makes the 
 Second. 
 
 [Vossius, lib. viii. cap. 54. thinks that the Last Supine may sometimes 
 be a Dative; as, Durum tactu, i. e. tactui ; for the Datives of the Fourth 
 Declension of old ended in it. Also, lib. vii. cap. 8. he takes notice, that 
 though these Supines have sometimes other Cases, (as irrisui esse) yet 
 they are only reckoned Supines by Grammarians, when the First comes 
 after Verbs of Motion, and the Second after Adjective Nouns : Thus, 
 dignus irrisu, is a Supine, according to them ; non sine irrisu audienti- 
 um, is not] 
 
 De Indeclinab'xlibus Partibus 
 Orationis. 
 CAP. V. 
 
 DE ADVERBIO. 
 
 In Adverbio potissimum spec- 
 tanda est ejus Significatio. 
 
 Adverbiorum Signification es 
 variae sunt : earum vero prae- 
 cipuae ad sequentia capita re- 
 vocari possunt. 
 
 Of the Indeclinable Parts of 
 
 Sjicech. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 OF ADVERB. 
 
 In an Adverb is chiefly to be 
 considered its Signification. 
 
 The Significations of Ad" 
 verbs are various : but the chief 
 of them may be reduced to the 
 following heads. 
 
 An ADVERB is an indeclinable Part of Speech, which being joined 
 to a Noun, Verb, or other Adverb, expresses some circumstance, quality, 
 or manner of their signification. 
 
 I. Adverbs denoting Circumstance, are chiefly those of Place, Time, 
 and Order. 
 
Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 72 
 
 I. Adverbs of Place are fivefold, 
 viz. Adverbs signifying Motion, 
 
 Ubi? 
 Hie, 
 
 Illic, 
 Istic, 
 Ibi, 
 Intus, 
 Foris, 
 Ubique, 
 Nusquam, 
 Alicubi, 
 Alibi, 
 Ubivis, 
 Ibidem, 
 "Quo? 
 Hue, 
 
 Illuc, 1 
 
 Istuc, \ 
 
 Intro, 
 Foras, 
 Eo, 
 Alio, 
 Aliquo, 
 Eodem, 
 
 ("Q.UORSUM? 
 
 Versus, 
 
 Horsum, 
 
 Illorsum, 
 
 Sursum, 
 
 Deorsum, 
 
 Antrorsum, 
 
 Retrorsum, 
 
 Where ? 
 Here. 
 
 There. 
 
 Within. 
 Without. 
 Every where. 
 No where. 
 Some where. 
 Else where. 
 Any where. 
 In the same place. 
 Whither ? 
 Hither. 
 
 Thither. 
 
 To within. 
 To without. 
 To that place. 
 To another place. 
 To some place. 
 Tothe same place. 
 Whitherward ? 
 Towards. 
 Hitherward. 
 Thitherward. 
 Upward. 
 Downward. 
 Forward. 
 Backward. 
 Dextrorsum, To the righthand. 
 ^Sinistrorsum, To the left hand. 
 
 *, 
 
 ^ 
 
 fUNDE? 
 
 Hinc, 
 
 Illinc, 
 
 Isthinc, 
 
 Inde, 
 
 Aliunde, 
 
 Alicunde, 
 
 Sicunde, 
 
 Utrinque, 
 
 Superne, 
 
 Inferne, 
 
 Coelitus, 
 
 Funditus, 
 
 « ram? 
 
 "& § \ Hac, 
 I'M Iliac, 
 
 < e I Isthac, 
 ^•^LAUa, 
 
 From whence ? 
 From hence. 
 
 > From thence. 
 
 From elsewhere. 
 From some place. 
 If from anyplace. 
 On both sides. 
 From above. 
 From below. 
 From Heaven. 
 From the ground. 
 Which way f 
 This way. 
 
 > That way. 
 Another way. 
 
 2. Adverbs of Time are threefold, 
 
 viz. Such as signify, 
 
 1. Being in Time, either, 
 
 ft, 1§ CNunc, 
 „■ 8 £Hodie, 
 "Tunc, 
 Turn, 
 Heri, 
 Dudum, 
 Pridem, 
 Pridie, 
 
 Now. 
 To-day. 
 
 Then. 
 
 Yesterday. 
 
 f Heretofore. 
 
 The day before. 
 
 Nudiustertius, Three days ago. 
 
 
 _Nuper, 
 
 . TJamjam, 
 | \ Mox, 
 s 1 Statim, 
 ^1 Protinus, 
 » Llllico, 
 TCras, 
 I jPostridie, 
 S y Perendie, 
 *» (^Nondum, 
 
 QUANDO? 
 
 Aliquando, 
 Nonnunquam, 
 Interdum, 
 Semper, 
 Nunquam, 
 Interim, 
 ^Quotidie, 
 
 Lately. 
 
 Presently. 
 
 Immediately. 
 
 By and by 
 
 Instantly. 
 
 Straightway. 
 
 To-morrow. 
 
 The day after. 
 
 Two days hence. 
 
 Not yet. 
 
 When? 
 
 ■} 
 
 Sometimes. 
 
 Ever. 
 
 Never. 
 
 In the mean time. 
 
 Daily. 
 
 2. Continuance of Time. 
 Diu, Long. 
 
 Quamdiu ? How long ? 
 
 Tamdiu, So long. 
 
 Jamdiu, *} 
 
 Jamdudum, > Long ago. 
 
 Jampridem, j 
 
 5. Vicissitude or repetition of Time. 
 
 "Quoties? 
 Saepe, 
 Raro, 
 Toties, 
 Aliquoties, 
 Vicissim, 
 Alternatim. 
 Rursus, 
 Iterum, 
 Subinde, 7 
 
 w Identidem, J 
 
 •■g £ fSEMEL, 
 
 How often ? 
 Often. 
 Seldom. 
 So often. 
 For several times. 
 
 > Again 
 
 turns. 
 
 I 
 
 Ter, 
 
 Quater, 
 
 Ever and anon. 
 
 Once. 
 
 Twice. 
 
 Thrice. 
 
 Four times, &c. 
 
Part II.— Chap. V.—Of Adverb. 73 
 
 3. Adverbs of Order ; as, 
 Inde, Then, Deinceps, So forth. Primo, -urn, First. 
 
 Deinde, Thereafter. Denuo, Of new. Secundo, -urn, Secondly. 
 Dehinc, Henceforth. Denique, Finally. Tertio, -urn, Thirdly. 
 Porro, Moreover. Postremo, Lastly. Quarto, -urn, Fourthly. 
 II. The other Adverbs expressing Quality, Manner, &c. are either 
 Absolute or Comparative. 
 
 "1. QUALITY, simply ; as, Bene, well ; male, ill; fortiter, bravely : 
 And innumerable others that come from Adjective Nouns or 
 Participles. 
 
 2. CERTAINTY ; as, Profecto, certe, sane, plane, nae, utique, ita, 
 etiam, truly, verily, yes ; quidni ? why not ? omnino, certainly. 
 
 3. CONTINGENCY ; as, Forte, forsan, fortassis, fors, haply, 
 perhaps, by chance, peradventure. 
 
 4. NEGATION; as, Non, haud, not; nequaquam, not at all; neu- 
 tiquam, by no means ; minime, nothing less. 
 
 5. PROHIBITION; as, Ne, not. 
 
 6. SWEARING ; as, Hercle, Pol, Edepol, Mecastor, by Hercules, 
 by Pollux, $c. 
 
 7. EXPLAINING ; as, Utpote, videlicet, scilicet, nimirum, nempe, 
 to wit, namely. 
 
 8. SEPARATION; as, Seorsum, apart; separatim, separately ; 
 sigillatim, one by one ; viritim, man by man ; oppidatim, toivn by 
 town, §c. 
 
 9. JOINING TOGETHER; as, Simul, una, pariter, together; ge- 
 neraliter, generally ; universaliter, universally ; plerumque, for 
 the most part. 
 
 10. INDICATION or POINTING OUT; as, En, ecce, lo, behold. 
 
 11. INTERROGATION; as, Cur, quare, quamobrem ? why, 
 wherefore? num, an? whether? quomodo, qui? how? To whidi 
 
 L add, Ubi, quo, quorsum, unde, qua, quando, quamdiu, quoties. 
 
 "1. EXCESS; as, Valde, maxime, magnopere, summopere, admo- 
 dum, oppido, perquam, longe, very much, exceedingly ; nimis, ni- 
 mium, too much ; prorsus, penitus, omnino, altogether, wholly; ma- 
 gis, more; melius, better ; pejus, worse; fortius, more bravely : And 
 optime, best; pessime, worst; fortissime, most bravely : And innu- 
 merable others of the Comparative and Superlative Degrees. 
 
 2. DEFECT; as, Ferme, fere, prope, propemodum, pene, almost ; 
 parum, little ; paulo, paululum, very little. 
 
 3. PREFERENCE; as, Potius, satius, rather; potigsimum, prae- 
 cipue, praesertim, chiefly, especially ; imo, yes, nay, nay rather. 
 
 4. LIKENESS or EQUALITY; as, Ita, sic, adeo, so; ut, uti, sic- 
 ut, sicuti, velut, veluti, ceu, tanquam, quasi, as, as if; quemadmo- 
 dum, even as; satis, enough ; itidem, in like manner. 
 
 5. UNLIKENESS or INEQUALITY; as, Aliter, secus, other- 
 wise; alioqui or alioquin, else; nedum, much more or muck less. 
 
 6. ABATEMENT; as, Sensim, paulatim, pedetentim, by degrees, 
 piece-meal ; vix, scarcely; aegre, hardly, with difficulty. 
 
 7. EXCLUSION ; as, Tantum, solum, modo, tantummodo, duntax- 
 at, demum, only. 
 
 D 
 
 W 
 
 $* 
 
74 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Note 1. That Adverbs seem originally to have been contrived to 
 express compendiously in one word what must otherwise have required 
 two or more; as, sapi enter, wisely, for cum sapientia; hie for in hoc loco ; 
 semper, for in omni tempore; semel, for una vice,- bis, for duabus vici- 
 bus; Hercule, for Hercules me juvet, <|-c. Therefore many of them 
 are nothing else but Adjective Nouns or Pronouns, having the Preposi- 
 tion and Substantive understood ; as, quo, eo, eodem, for ad quae, ea, ea- 
 dem, [loca], or cui, ei, eidem, [loco] ; for of old these Datives ended in o. 
 Thus, qua, hac, iliac, &e. are plain Adjectives in the Abl. Sing. Fern, 
 the word via, a way, and in, being understood. Many of them are 
 compounds ; as, quomodo, i. e. quo modo ; quemadmodum, i. e. ad quern 
 modum ; quamobrem, i. e. ob quam rem ; quare, i. e. [pro] qua re ; 
 quorsum, j. e. versus quern [locum] ; scilicet, i. e. scire licet ; videlicet, 
 i. e. videre licet ; ilicet, i. e. ire licet ; illico, i. e. in loco ; magnopere, 
 i. e. magno opere ; nimirum, i. e. ni [est] mirum. 
 
 Note 2. That of Adverbs of Place, those of the first kind answer to 
 the question ubi ? the second to quo P the third to quorsum ? the fourth 
 to unde ? and the fifth to qua ? To which might be added a sixth, quous- 
 que, how far ? answered by usque, until ; hucusque, hitherto ; eousque, so 
 far ; hactenus, hitherto, thus far ; eatenus, so far as ; quadantenus, in 
 some measure. But these are equally applied to Place and Time. 
 
 Note 3. That Adverbs of Time of the first kind, answer to quando ? 
 of the second, to quamdiu and qnamdudum or quampridem ? of the 
 third, to quoties ? 
 
 Note 4. That Adverbs of Quality generally answer to the question 
 quomodo ? 
 
 Note 5. That some Adverbs of Time, Place, and Order, are frequent- 
 ly used the one for the other ; as, ubi, where and when ? inde, from that 
 place, from that time, thereafter, next ; hactenus, thus far, with respect to 
 place, time, or order, &c. Other Adverbs also may be classed under dif- 
 ferent heads. 
 
 Note 6. That some Adverbs of Time are either past, present, or future ; 
 as, jam, already, now, by and by ; olim, long ago, some time hereafter. 
 
 Note 7. That Interrogative Adverbs of Time and Place doubled, or 
 with the Adjection cunque, answer to the English Adjection soever ; as, 
 ubiubi or ubicunque, wheresoever ; quoquo or quocunque, whithersoever,&c. 
 And the same holds also in other Interrogative words ; as, quisquis or qui' 
 cunque, whosoever ; quotquot or quotcunque, how many soever ; quantus- 
 quantus or quantuscunque, how great soever; qualisqualis or qualiscunque, 
 of what kind or quality soever ; utut or utcunque, however or howsoever, &c. 
 
 CAP. VI. CHAP. VI. 
 
 DE PRAEPOSITIONE. ^^ OF PREPOSITION. 
 
 I. Jl RAEPosiTioNEsquaeregunt 
 
 Accusativum sunt viginti octo, 
 
 viz. 
 
 Ad, To. Adversus, 
 
 Apud, At. Adversum, J- Against 
 
 Ante, Before. Contra, 
 
 I. A. he Prepositions which go- 
 vern the Accusative are twenty- 
 eight, viz. 
 
 1 
 
Part II. — Chap. VI. — Of Preposition. 
 
 75 
 
 Cis, 
 
 > On this side. 
 
 D ropter, 
 
 For, hard by. 
 
 Citra, 
 
 >er, 
 
 By, through. 
 
 Circum, 
 
 i About. £ raeter > 
 J Penes, 
 
 Besides, except. 
 
 Circa, 
 
 In the power of 
 
 Erga, 
 
 Towards. Post, 
 
 After. 
 
 Extra, 
 
 Without. Pone, 
 
 Behind. 
 
 Inter, 
 
 Between, among. Secus, 
 
 By, along. 
 
 Intra, 
 
 Within. Secundum, According to. 
 
 Infra, 
 
 Beneath. Supra, 
 
 Above. 
 
 Juxta, 
 
 Nigh to. Trans, 
 
 On the farther side. 
 
 Ob, 
 
 For. Ultra, 
 
 Beyond. 
 
 II. Praepositiones quae re- 
 
 II. The Prepositions which 
 
 gunt Ablativum sunt quinde- 
 
 govern 
 
 the Ablative are fif- 
 
 cim ; nempe, 
 
 teen; namely, 
 
 A, 
 
 V ] 
 
 3e, 
 
 Of, concerning. 
 
 Ab, 
 Abs, 
 
 > From. ] 
 ) 1 
 
 
 1 Of, out of. 
 
 Absque, 
 
 Without. ] 
 
 Pro, 
 
 For. 
 
 Cum, 
 
 With. ] 
 
 ?rae, 
 
 Before. 
 
 Clam, 
 
 Without the know-. 
 
 Palam, 
 
 With the knowledge of. 
 
 
 ledge of ! 
 
 Sine, 
 
 Without. 
 
 Coram, 
 
 Before. 
 
 lenus, 
 
 Up to. 
 
 III. Hae quatuor inter dum 
 
 III. 
 
 These four govern some- 
 
 Accusativum, interdum Ab- 
 
 times the Accusative, and some- 
 
 lativum, 
 
 regunt. 
 
 times the Ablative. 
 
 In, 
 
 In, into. 
 
 Super, 
 
 Above. 
 
 Sub, 
 
 Under 
 
 Subter ; 
 
 Beneath. 
 
 A PREPOSITION is an indeclinable word, showing the relation of 
 one Substantive Noun to another. 
 
 Note, That pone and secus rarely occur ; and prope, nigh ; usque, un- 
 to ; circiter, about ; versus, towards ; which are commonly reckoned a- 
 mong the Prepositions governing the Accusative ; and procul, far, among 
 those governing the Ablative, are Adverbs, and do not govern a case of 
 themselves, but by the Preposition ad, which is understood to the first 
 four, and a or ab to the last. To which perhaps may be added, clam, 
 which is joined very frequently with the Accusative ; as, clam patre, or 
 patrem ; a being understood to the one, and quod ad to the other. 
 
 Besides the separate use of these Prepositions, there is another use which 
 arises from them, namely, their being put before a vast number of Nouns 
 and Verbs in composition, which creates a great variety, and gives a pe- 
 culiar elegance and beauty to the Latin Tongue. 
 
 D2 
 
76 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 There are five or six syllables, viz. am, di or dis, re, se, con, which are 
 commonly called Inseparable Prepositions, because they are only to be 
 found in compound words : However, they generally add something to 
 the signification of the words with which they are compounded : Thus, 
 
 Am, 
 Di, 
 
 round about, 
 j asunder, 
 
 Dis, V 
 
 -d J > signifies * 
 
 Re, { ° j again, 
 
 Se, I aside or apart, 
 
 Con, J ^together; 
 
 rambio, to surround, 
 divello, to pull asunder. 
 ■ distraho, to draw asunder. 
 ' | relego, to read again, 
 j sepono, to lay aside, 
 (^concresco, to grow together. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF INTERJECTION. 
 As INTERJECTION is an indeclinable word, thrown into discourse 
 to signify some Passion or Emotion of the ZNIind. 
 r l« JOY; as, Evax. hey, brave, io. 
 2. GRIEF ; as, Ah, hei, heu, eheu, ah, alas, woes me. 
 o. WONDER ; as. Papae, Oh strange ; Yah, ha. 
 
 4. PRAISE ; as, Euge, well done. 
 
 5. AVERSION; as, Apage, away, be gone, fie, tutu. 
 
 6. EXCLAIMING ; as, Oh, Proh, 0. 
 § J 7. SURPRISE or FEAR; as, Atat, ha, aha. 
 
 8. IMPRECATION ; as, Vae. too, pox ont. 
 
 9. LAUGHTER ; as, Ha, ha. he. 
 
 10. SILENCING ; as, Au, 'st, pax, silence, hush, 'st. 
 
 11. CALLING; as, Eho, io, ho, so, ho, soho, 0. 
 
 12. DERISION; as. Hui, away with. 
 [13. ATTENTION; as, Hem, ha. 
 
 Note 1. That the same Interjection denotes sometimes one passion 
 and sometimes another ; as, Vah, which is used to express Joy and Sor- 
 row and Wonder, &e. i 
 
 Note 2. That some of them are natural sounds common to all lan- 
 guages. 
 
 Note 5. That Nouns are sometimes used for Interjections ; as, Ma- 
 lum ! With a pox ! With a mischief! Infandum ! shame ! Fie, fie ! 
 Miserum ! wretched ! Nefas ! O the villanv ! 
 
 An Interjection is a compendious way of expressing a whole sentence 
 in one word, and used only to represent the passions and emotions of the 
 soul, that the shortness of the one might the sooner express the sudden- 
 ness and quickness of the other. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 OF CONJUNCTION. 
 -A. CONJL'NCTION is an indeclinable word, that joins sentences to- 
 gether, and thereby shows their dependence upon one another. 
 
Part IL—Chap. VIII.— Of Conjunction. 77 
 
 Of these some are called, 
 
 1. COPULATIVE; as, Et, ac, atque, que, and; etiam, quoque, item, 
 also; cum, turn, both, and. Also their contraries, Nee, neque, neu, 
 neve, neither, nor. 
 
 2. DISJUNCTIVE ; as, Aut, ve, vel, seu, sive, either, or. 
 
 3. CONCESSIVE ; as, Etsi, etiamsi, tametsi, beet, quanquam, quam- 
 vis, though, although, albeit. 
 
 4. ADVERSATIVE ; as, Sed, verum, autem, at, ast, atqui, but ; tamen, 
 attamen, veruntamen, verumenimvero,ye£, notwithstanding, nevertheless. 
 
 5. CAUSAL ; as, Nam, namque, enim, for ; quia, quippe, quoniam, 
 because ; quod, that, because. 
 
 6. ILLATIVE or RATIONAL ; as, Ergo, ideo, igitur, idcirco, itaque, 
 therefore ; quapropter, quocirca, wherefore ; proinde, therefore ; cum, 
 quum, seeing, since ; quandoquidem, forasmuch as. 
 
 7. FINAL or PERFECTIVE ; as, Ut, uti, that, to the end that. 
 
 8. CONDITIONAL; as, Si, sin, if; dum, modo, dummodo, provided, 
 upon condition that ; siquidem, if indeed. 
 
 9. EXCEPTIVE or RESTRICTIVE ; as, Ni, nisi, unless, except. 
 
 10. DIMINUTIVE ; as, Saltern, certe, at least. 
 
 11. SUSPENSIVE or DUBITATIVE; as, An, anne, num, whether ; 
 ne, annon, whether, not ; necne, or not. 
 
 12. EXPLETIVE; as, Autem, vero, now, truly; quidem, equidem, indeed. 
 
 13. ORDINATIVE; as, Deinde, thereafter; denique, finally ; insu- 
 per, moreover ; caeterum, moreover, but, however. 
 
 14. DECLARATIVE ; as, Videlicet, scilicet, nempe, nimirum, &c. to 
 wit, namely. 
 
 Note 1. That the same words, as they are taken in different views, 
 are both Adverbs and Conjunctions, as, an, anne, &c. are Suspensive Con- 
 junctions and Interrogative Adverbs. The same may be said of the Or- 
 dinative and Declarative Conjunctions, which, under another view, may 
 be ranked under Adverbs of Order and Explaining. So likewise utinam, 
 which is commonly called an Adverb of Wishing, when more narrowly 
 considered, is nothing else but the Conjunction uti [that], with the sylla- 
 ble nam added to it, and opto [I wish] understood ; as, Utinam adfuisses ; 
 Ut te Deus maleperdat ; supple opto. But since both of them are indeclin- 
 able, there is no great need of being very nice in distinguishing them. 
 
 Note 2. That other parts of speech compounded together, supply the 
 place of Conjunctions ; as, postea, afterwards ; praeterea, moreover ; 
 propterea, because, &c. which are made up of the Prepositions, post, prae- 
 ter, and propter, with ea, the Pronoun. 
 
 Note o. That some Conjunctions, according to their* natural Order, 
 stand first in a sentence ; as, et, aut, nee, si, &c. Some, contrary to then- 
 natural Order, stand in the second place, viz. autem, vero, quoque, qui- 
 dem, enim : And some may indifferently be put either first or second, viz. 
 namque, etenim, siquidem, ergo, igitur, itaque, &c. Hence arose the di- 
 vision of them into Prepositive, Subjunctive, and Common. 
 
 D3 
 
78 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 % CHAP. IX. 
 
 APPENDIX, containing some Observations concerning the 
 various divisions and significations of words, especially Noun 
 and Verb. 
 
 1. -A.ll words whatsoever are either Simple or Compound. A Simple 
 word [Simplex] is that which was never more than one; as, Justus, lego. 
 A Compound [Composition] is that which is made up of two or more 
 words, or of a word and some syllabical adjection ; as, injustus, perlego, 
 derelinquo, egomet. 
 
 2. All words whatsoever are either Primitive or Derivative. A Pri- 
 mitive word \_Primitivum] is that which comes from no other word ; as, 
 Justus, lego. A Derivative [Derivativum] is that which comes from ano- 
 ther word; as, justitia, lectio. 
 
 I. Besides the more general Divisions of Nouns and Pronouns, men- 
 tioned p. 13. and 50. there are other particular Divisions of them, taken 
 from their various Significations and Derivations ; the most remarkable 
 whereof are these : 
 
 I. With respect to Signification. 
 
 1. A Collective [Collectivum] is a Substantive Noun which signifies 
 many in the Sing. Num. ; as, populus, a people ; exercitus, an army. 
 
 2. An Interrogative Noun or Pronoun [Interrogativum] is that by 
 which we ask a question ; as, quis ? who ? uter ? which of the two ? 
 qualis ? of what kind? quantus ? how great ? quot ? how many ? And 
 these, when they are used without a question, are called Indefinites. 
 
 5. A Relative Noun or Pronoun [Relativum] is an Adjective that has 
 respect to something spoken before ; as, Qui, ille, ipse, &c. Alius, alter, 
 reliquus, caetera, -um, qualis, quantus, &c. 
 
 4. A Partitive Noun or Pronoun [Partitivum] is an Adjective which 
 signifies many severally, and as it were one by one ; as, oninis, nullus, 
 quisque, &c. ; Or a part of many ; as, quidam, aliquis, neuter, nemo, &c. 
 
 5. A Numeral Noun [Nitwterale] is an Adjective which signifies Num- 
 ber ; of which there are four principal kinds : 
 
 (1.) Cardinal [Numerus Cardinalis] as, unus, duo, tres, &c. 
 
 (2.) Ordinal [Ordinalis] as, primus, secundus, tertius, &c. 
 
 (<5.) Distributive [Distributivus] as, singuli, bini, terni, &c. 
 
 (4.) Multiplicative [Multiplicativus] as, simplex, duplex, triplex, &c. 
 II. With Respect to Signification and Derivation. 
 
 1. A Patronymic Noun [Patronymicum] is a Substantive Noun de- 
 rived from another Substantive proper, signifying one's pedigree or extrac- 
 tion; as, Priamides, the son of Priamus ; Pri a mis, the daughter of Pria- 
 mus ; Aetias, the daughter of Aeetes ; Kerine, the daughter of Nereus. 
 Patronymics are generally derived from the name of the Father ; but the 
 Poets (for others seldom use them) derive- them also from the Grandfa- 
 ther, or some other remarkable person of the family ; nay, sometimes from 
 the founder of a nation or people, and also from countries and cities ; as, 
 Aeacides, the son, grandson, great-grandson, or one of the posterity of 
 Aeacus ; Romulidae, the Romans, from their first king Romulus ; Sicilis, 
 
Part II. — Chap. IX. — Appendix, fyc. 79 
 
 Troas, a woman of Sicily, of Troy, &c. Patronymics of men end in des; 
 of women in is, as, and ne. Those in des and ne are of the First, and those 
 in is and as of the Third Declension. 
 
 2. An Abstract Noun [Abstractum] is a Substantive derived from an 
 Adjective, expressing the quality of that Adjective in general, without 
 regard to the thing in which the quality is ; as, bonitas, goodness ; dul- 
 cedo, sweetness ; from bonus, good ; dulcis, sweet. With respect to these 
 abstracts, the Adjectives from which they come are called Concretes, 
 because, besides the quality, they also confusedly signify something as the 
 subject of it, without which they cannot make sense. 
 
 5. A Gentile or Patrial Noun {Gentile or Patriurn] is an Adjective 
 derived from a Substantive proper, signifying one's country ; as, Scotus, 
 Macedo, Arpinas, Edinburgensis, Taodunanus ; a man born in Scotland, 
 Macedonia, Arpinum, Edinburgh, Dundee ; from Scotia, Macedonia, Ar- 
 pinum, Edinburgum, Taodunum. 
 
 4. A Possessive Noun [Possessivum~\ is an Adjective derived from a 
 Substantive, whether proper or appellative, signifying possession or pro- 
 perty ; as, Scoticus, Herculeus, Paternus, Herilis, Foemineus ; of or 
 belonging to Scotland, Hercules, a father, a master, a woman ; from Scotia, 
 Hercules, Pater, Herus, Foemina. 
 
 5. A Diminutive Noun \Diminutivum\ is a Substantive or Adjective 
 derived from another Substantive or Adjective respectively, importing 
 a diminution or lessening of its signification ; as, libellus, a little book ; 
 chartula, a little paper ; opusculum, a little work ; from liber, charta, opus ; 
 parvulus, very little ; candidulus, pretty white ; from parvus, candidus. 
 These for the most part end in lus, la, or lum, and are generally of the 
 same gender with their primitives. 
 
 6. A Denominative Noun [Denominativum] is a Substantive or Adjec- 
 tive derived from another Noun ; as, gratia, favour ; vinea, a vineyard ; 
 senator, a senator ; from gratus, vinum, senex : coelestis, heavenly ; 
 humanus, human ; aureus, golden ; from coelum, komo, aurum. 
 
 7. A Verbal Noun [ Verbale] is a Substantive or Adjective derived 
 from a Verb; as, amor, love; doctrina, learning; lectio, a lesson ; auditus, 
 hearing ; from amo, doceo, lego, audio : amabilis, lovely ; capax, capable; 
 valucer, swift; from amo, capio, volo. 
 
 8. Lastly, There are some Nouns derived from Participles, Adverbs, 
 and Prepositions ; as, Jictitius, counterfeit; crastinus, belonging to the 
 morrow ; contrarius, contrary ; from jictus, eras, contra. 
 
 Note, That the same Nouns, according to the different respects in 
 which they are considered, may sometimes be ranked under one and some- 
 times under another of the above mentioned classes ; as, quis is an Inter- 
 rogative, Relative, or Partitive ; pietas, an Abstract or Denominative. 
 
 II. Pronouns are divided into four classes ; viz. 
 
 1. Demonstratives ; ego, tu, sui. 
 
 2. Relatives ; ille, ipse, iste, hie, is, quis, qui. 
 
 3. Possessives ; mens, tuus, suus, noster, vester. 
 
 4. Patrials or Gentiles ; nostras, vestras, cujas. 
 
 Of them also two are interrogatives, quis and cujas. 
 
 III. 1. Verbs, with respect to their Figure or Frame, are either Sim- 
 ple ; as, amo, I love : Or Compound ; as, redamo, I love again. 
 
 D4 
 
80 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 2. With respect to their Species or Origin, are either Primitive ; as, 
 lego, I read : Or Derivative ; as, lectito, I read frequently. 
 
 3. With respect to their Conjugation, are either regular ; as, amo : 
 Or Irregular ; as, volo, vis, &c. 
 
 4. With respect to their Constituent Parts, are either Complete ; as, amo: 
 Or Defective; as, inquam : Or Redundant; as, edo, edis, andes, &e. 
 
 5. With respect to their Persons, are either Personal ; as, amo : Or 
 Impersonal ; as, poenitet. 
 
 6. With respect to their Terminations, they end either in o ; as, amo : 
 Or in r ; as, amor : Or in m ; as, sum. 
 
 7. With respect to their Signification, Verbs are either Substantive 
 or Adjective. 
 
 (1.) A Substantive Verb [Substantivum] is that which signifies simply 
 the affirmation of being or existence; as, sum,jio, existo, I am. 
 
 (2.) An Adjective Verb [Adjectivum] is that which, together with the 
 signification of Being, has a particular signification of its own ; as, amo, 
 i. e. sum amans, I am loving. 
 
 An Adjective Verb is divided into Active, Passive, and Neuter. 
 
 (1.) An Active Verb [Activum] is that which affirms Action of its 
 Person or Nominative before it; as, amo, loquor, curro. 
 
 (2.) A passive Verb [Passivum] is that which affirms Passion of its 
 Person or Nominative before it ; as, amor. 
 
 (5.) A Neuter Verb [Neutrum] is that which affirms neither Action nor 
 Passion of its Nominative ; but simply signifies the state, posture, or qua- 
 lity of things ; as, sto, sedeo, maneo, duro, vireo,flaveo, sapio, quiesco, &c. 
 to stand, sit, stay, endure, to be green, to be yellow, to be wise, to rest. 
 
 An Active Verb is again divided into Transitive and Intransitive. 
 
 (1.) An Active Transitive Verb [Transitivum'] is that whose Action 
 passeth from the Agent to some other thing ; as, amo patrem. 
 
 (2.) An Active Intransitive Verb [Intransitivum~\ is that whose Ac- 
 tion passeth not from the agent to any other ; as, curro, I run ; ambulo, 
 I walk. 
 
 When to any Verb you put the question whom ? or what ? if a ra- 
 tional answer can be returned, the Verb is Transitive ; as, Whom, or 
 what do you teach ? Ans. A boy the grammar. If not, it is Intransitive ; 
 as, What do you run, go, come, live, sleep, &c. to which no rational an- 
 swer can be given, unless it be by a word of like signification, which 
 sometimes indeed these Verbs have after them ; as, Vivo vitam jucundam, 
 I live a pleasant life ; Eo iter longum, I go a long journey. 
 
 Note I. That the same Verb is sometimes Transitive, and sometimes 
 Intransitive ; as, Ver incipit, The Spring begins, Cic. Incipere f acinus, 
 to begin an Action, Plaut. 
 
 Note 2. That Neuter and Intransitive Verbs are often Englished 
 with the signs of a Passive Verb ; as, caleo, I am hot ; palleo, I am pale ; 
 Jacobus abiit, James is gone. 
 
 Note 5. That Neuter and Intransitive Verbs want the Passive Voice, 
 unless impersonally used, as the Istransitive Verbs most frequently and 
 elegantly are ; as, pugnatur, itur, ventum est. 
 
 Though all Verbs whatsoever, with respect to their signification, be- 
 long to some one or other of the foregoing classes, yet because gramma- 
 
Part II. — Chap. IX. — Appendix, %c. 81 
 
 rians, together with the signification of Verbs, are obliged also to consider 
 their termination ; and finding that all Active Verbs did not end in o, 
 neither all Passives in or, it was judged convenient to add to the former 
 two or three other classes or kinds of them, viz. Deponent, Common, 
 and Neuter Passive. 
 
 (1.) A Deponent Verb [Deponens] is that which has a Passive termi- 
 nation, but an Active or Neuter signification ; as, loquor, I speak; mo~ 
 rior, I die. 
 
 (2.) A Common Verb [Commune] is that which, under a Passive ter- 
 mination, has a signification either Active or Passive ; as, criminor, I ac- 
 cuse, or I am accused ; dignor, I think, or I am thought worthy. 
 
 (3.) A Neuter Passive [Neutro-passivum] is that which is half Active 
 and half Passive in its termination, but in its signification is either wholly 
 Passive; as, fio, factus sum, to be made : Or wholly Active or Neuter; as, 
 audeo, ausus sum, to dare ; gaudeo, gavisus sum, to rejoice. 
 
 8. To omit the other kinds of Derivative Verbs, which are not very 
 material, there are three kinds of them derived from Verbs which de- 
 serve to be remarked ; viz. Frequentatives, Inceptives, and Desideratives. 
 
 (1.) Frequentatives [ Verba frequentativa] signify Frequency of Action. 
 They are formed from the last Supine, by changing atu into ito from Verbs 
 of the first, and u into o from Verbs of the other three Conjugations. They 
 are all of the first ; as, clamito, to cry frequently, from clamo ; dormito, 
 to sleep often, from dormio. From them also are formed other Frequen- 
 tatives; as, curro, curso, cursito ; jacio, jacto, jactito ; pello, pulso, pul- 
 sito and pulto. 
 
 (2.) Inceptives [Verba inceptiva] signify that a thing is begun and 
 tending to perfection. They are formed from the second person singular 
 Pres. Ind. by adding co. They are all of the third Conjugation, and want 
 both Preterite and Supine ; as, caleo, cales, calesco, I grow or wax warm. 
 
 (5.) Desideratives [Verba Desiderativa] signify a desire of Action. 
 They are formed from the last Supine by adding rio. They are all of 
 the fourth Conjugation, and generally want both Preterite and Supine ; 
 as, coenaturio, I desire to sup; esurio, I am hungry, or I desire to eat. 
 
 9. Lastly, In Construction, Verbs receive names from their more par- 
 ticular significations ; as, Vocative Verbs, or Verbs of Naming, Verbs of 
 Remembering, of Want, of Teaching, of Accusing, &c. 
 
 In the preceding Division of Verbs, with respect to their signification, 
 I have receded a little from the common method, and in particular I have 
 given a different account of Neuter Verbs from that commonly received 
 by grammarians, who comprise under them all Intransitive Verbs, though 
 their significations be ever so much Active. But this I did partly from the 
 reason of the Name, which imports a negation both of Action and Pas- 
 sion, and partly to give a distinct view of the significations of Verbs, 
 without regard to their terminations, which in that respect are purely 
 accidental and arbitrary. 
 
 I have also excluded from the divisions of Verbs those called Neutral 
 Passives, [Lat. Neutra Passiva] because originally they are Active Verbs; 
 for the primary signification of vapulo is pereo or ploro; of exulo, extra so- 
 lum eo ; of veneo, venum eo / of nubo, veto. Liceo indeed is a very 
 singular Verb, for in the Active Voice it signifies passively, and in the 
 Passive actively. 
 
 D 5 
 
82 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 PARS TERTIA. PART THIRD. 
 
 DE SENTENTIIS, SIVE ORATIONE. 
 
 Oententia est quaevis animi 
 cogitatio, duabus aut pluribus 
 vocibus simul junctis enuncia- 
 ta : ut, Tu legis, Tu legis li- 
 bros ; Tu legis libros bonos ; 
 Tu legis libros bonos domi. (a) 
 
 A 
 
 OF SENTENCES, OR SrEECH. 
 
 sentence is any thought of 
 the mind expressed by two or 
 more words put together : as, 
 You read; You read books; 
 You read good books ; You 
 read good books at home. 
 
 CAP. I. 
 
 DE SYNTAXI, SIVE C0NSTRUC- 
 ^ TIONE. 
 
 Joyntaxis est recta vocum in 
 Oratione Compositio. 
 
 Ejus partes sunt duae, Con- 
 cordantia et Regimen, (b) 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF SYNTAX, OR C0NSTRUC- 
 £Y TION. 
 
 Syntax is the right ordering 
 of Words in Speech. 
 
 Rs parts are two, Concord 
 and Government. 
 
 (a) We are now arrived at the principal part of Grammar; for the 
 great end of speech being to convey our thoughts unto others, it will be 
 of little use to us to have a stock of words, and to know what changes 
 can be made upon them, unless we can also apply them to practice, and 
 make them answer the great purposes for which they are intended. To 
 the attainment of this end, there are two things absolutely necessary, 
 viz. 1. That in speech we dispose and frame our words according to the 
 laws and rules established among those whose language we speak. 2. 
 That in like manner we know what is spoken or written, and be able 
 to explain it in due order, and resolve it into the several parts of which 
 it is made up. The first of these is called Syntax or Construction, and 
 the second is named Exposition or Resolution. The first shows us how 
 to speak the language ourselves, and the second how to understand it 
 when spoken by others. But it must be owned that there is such a ne- 
 cessary connection between them, that he who is master of the first can- 
 not be ignorant of the second. 
 
 (6) Note 1. That the difference between Concord and Government 
 consists chiefly in this, that in Concord there can no change be made in 
 the Accidents, that is, Gender, Case, Number, or Person of the one, but 
 the like change must also be made in the other ; but in Government the 
 first word (if declinable) may be changed, without any change in the 
 second. 
 
 In Concord, the first word may be called the word directing, and the se- 
 cond the word directed : In Government, the first is called the word go- 
 verning, and the second the word governed. 
 
Part III. — Chap* I. — Of Construction. 
 
 Concordantia est quando una 
 dictio concordat cum altera in 
 quibusdam accidentibus. 
 
 Regimen est quando dictio 
 regit certum casum. 
 
 Concord is when one word 
 agrees with another in some ac- 
 cidents. 
 
 Government is when a word 
 governs a certain case. 
 
 I. DE CONCORDANTIA. 
 
 V^oncordantia est quadru- 
 plex. 
 
 1 . Adjectivi cum Substantivo. 
 
 2. Verbi cum Nominativo. 
 
 3. Relativi cum Antecedente. 
 
 4. Substantivi cum Substan- 
 tivo. 
 
 . Regula I. 
 
 -ttLdjectivum concordat cum 
 Substantivo in genere, nurae- 
 ro, et casu : ut, 
 
 a Vir b bonus. 
 
 *Foemina b casta. 
 
 h Didce zpomum. 
 
 a 
 
 I. OF CONCORD. 
 
 ONCORD is fourfold. 
 
 1. Of an Adjective with a 
 Substantive. 
 
 2. Of a Verb with a Nomi- 
 native. 
 
 3. Of a Relative with an 
 Antecedent. 
 
 4. Of a Substantive with a 
 Substantive. 
 
 s Rule I. 
 
 JLl-N Adjective agrees with a 1 
 Substantive in Gender, Num- 
 ber, and Case : as, 
 
 A good man. 
 
 A chaste woman. 
 
 A sweet apple. 
 
 Note 2. That for the greater ease both of master and scholar, we 
 have noted those words wherein the force of each example lieth, with 
 the letters [a] and [b] : the word directing or governing with [a], and 
 the word directed or governed with [b] : or where there are two words 
 directing or governing, the first with [a], and the second with [aa] ; and 
 where two words are directed or governed, the first with [b], and the 
 second with [bb]. 
 
 Number 1. Note 1. That the way to find out the Substantive, is to 
 ask the question Who or What? to the Adjective; for that which an- 
 swers to it is the Substantive. And the same question put to the Verb 
 or Relative, discovers the Nominative or Antecedent. 
 
 Note 2. That another Adjective sometimes supplies the place of a 
 Substantive ; as, amicus certus, a sure friend ; bonaferina, good venison ; 
 homo being understood to amicus, and caro to ferina. 
 
 Note 3. That the Substantive Thing [negotium] is most frequently 
 understood: and then the Adjective is always put in the Neuter Gen- 
 der, as if it were a Substantive ; as, triste [supple negotium], i. e. res tristis, 
 a sad thing. Bona, [supple negotia], i. e. res bonae, good things. 
 
 D6 
 
84 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Reg. II. 
 
 2 V erbum concordat cum 
 Nominativo ante se in nu- 
 mero et persona: ut, 
 
 a Ego b /<?go. 
 
 a Tu b scribis. 
 
 a Praeceptor h docet. 
 
 * Rule II. 
 
 JL Verb agrees with the No- 
 minative before it in Number 
 and Person : as, 
 
 I read. 
 
 You write. 
 
 The master teacheth. 
 
 ANNOTATIONES. 
 
 3 1. VERBA Substantiva, 
 Vocandi et Gestus, habent 
 utrinque Nominativum ad 
 eandem rem pertinentem : 
 ut, 
 
 h Ego *sum hh discipidus. 
 b Tu a vocaris bb Joannes. 
 ^ Ilia a i?icedit ^regina. 
 
 4 2. ^[EXCEP. Infinitivus 
 Modus Accusativum ante se 
 habet : ut, 
 
 Gaudeo h te * voter e. 
 
 1. Substantive Verbs, Verbs 
 of Naming and Gesture, have a 
 Nominative both before and af- 
 ter them, belonging to the same 
 thing : as, 
 
 I am a scholar. 
 You are named John. 
 She walks [as] a queen. 
 
 2. 5) EXCEP. The Infini- 
 tive Mood has an Accusative 
 before it : as, 
 
 I am glad that you are well. 
 
 Num. 2. Note, That the Infinitive Mood frequently supplies the place 
 of the Nominative ; as, mentiri non est meum, to lie is not mine, [or my 
 property.] 
 
 Num. o. 1. Substantive Verbs are, Sum, fio, forem, and existo. 
 
 2. Verbs of Naming are these Passives, Appellor, dicor, vocor, nomi- 
 nor, nuncupor; to which add, Videor, existimor, creor, constituor, salu- 
 tor, designo, &c. 
 
 3. Verbs of Gesture are, Eo, incedo, venio, cubo, sto, sedeo, evado, fu- 
 gio, dormio, somnio, moneo, &c. 
 
 Note, That any Verb may have after it the Nominative, when it be- 
 longs to the same thing with the Nominative before it; as, audivi hocpuer, 
 I heard it being [or when I was] a boy. Defendi rempublicam adolescens, 
 non deseram senex, I defended the commonwealth [when I was] a young 
 man, I will not desert it [now that I am] old. Cic. 
 
 Num. 4. Note, That when the Particle That [in Lat. quod or ut\ 
 comes between two Verbs, it is elegantly left out, by turning the No- 
 minative Case into the Accusative, and the Verb into the Infinitive 
 Mood ; as, aiunt regem adventare, they say [that] the king is coming ; ra- 
 ther than, aiunt, quod rex adventat. Turpe est eos qui bene n&ti sunt 
 turpiter vivere, it is a shameful thing that they who are well born shouldiive 
 basely; rather than, ut ii turpiter vivant. See p. 51. . 
 
Part III.— Chap. L 
 3. tfl ESSE habet eundem 
 casum post se quern ante se : 
 ut, 
 
 b Petrus cupit a esse bb vir 
 
 doctus. 
 Scio b Petrum a esse bb virum 
 
 doctum. 
 b Mihi bb negligenti a esse non 
 licet. 
 
 Reg. III. 
 JtVELATivuM Qui, quae, quod, 
 concordat cum Antecedente in 
 gen ere et numero : ut, 
 
 a Vir sapit b qui pauca loqui- 
 tur. 
 
 1. Si nullus interveniat No- 
 minativus inter Relativum et 
 Verbum, Relativum erit Ver- 
 bo Nominativus : ut, 
 
 Praeceptor a qui b docet. 
 
 i — Of Construction. 85 
 
 3. f ESSE Aa$ */*<? 5fl77ze 5 
 Case after it that it hath be- 
 fore it : as, 
 
 Peter desires to be a learn- 
 ed man. 
 I know that Peter is a 
 
 learned man. 
 I am not allowed to be 
 negligent. 
 rfl Rule III. 
 
 jl he Relative Qui, quae, 6 
 quod, agrees with the Antece- 
 dent in Gender and Number : 
 as, 
 
 He is a wise man who 
 
 speaks little. 
 
 I. If no Nominative comes 7 
 
 between the Relative and the 
 
 Verb, the Relative shall be the 
 
 Nominative to the Verb ; as, 
 
 The master who teacheth. 
 
 Num. 5. Note 1. That we frequently say, licet nobis esse bonos, we 
 may be good. Tibi expedit esse sedulum, it is expedient for you to be dili- 
 gent. Nemini unquam nocuit fuisse pium, it never hurt any man that he 
 had been pious. But then the Accusative, nos, te, ilium, &c. is under- 
 stood : thus, licet nobis [nos] esse bonos, &c. 
 
 Note 2. That if esse, and the other Infinitives of Substantive Verbs, 
 Verbs of Naming, &c. have no Accusative or Dative before them, the 
 word that follows (whether Substantive or Adjective) is to be put in the 
 Nominative ; as, dicitur esse vir, he is said to be a man. Non videtur esse 
 facturus, he seems not about to do it. Nemo debet dici beatus ante suum 
 obitum, no man should be called happy before his death. 
 
 Num. 6. Note 1. That the Antecedent is a Substantive Noun that goes 
 before the Relative, and is again understood to the Relative. Wherefore 
 it will not be amiss to teach the scholar to supply it every where : thus, 
 Beware of 'idleness, which [idleness] is an enemy to virtue, Cave segnitiem, 
 quae [segnities~\ est inimica virtuti. Nay, Cicero himself, but especially 
 Caesar, frequently repeats the Substantive ; as, in oppidumperfugisti, quo in 
 oppido, &c. You fled to a town, in which town, Cic. J)iem dicunt, quo 
 die ad ripam Rkodani conveniant, they appoint a day, on which day they 
 should meet upon the bank of the river Rhone, Caes. 
 
 Note 2. That when the Relative respects a whole Sentence, it is put 
 in the Neuter Gender ; as, Joannes mortuus est, quod mihi summo dolori 
 est, John is dead, which is a great grief to me. 
 
 Note 3. That the Person of the Relative is always the same with that 
 
Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 86 
 
 8 2. At si interveniat Nomi- 
 nativus inter Relativum et 
 Verbum, Relativum erit ejus 
 casus quern Verbum aut No- 
 men sequens, vel Praepositio 
 praecedens, regere solent : ut, 
 
 Deus b quern a colimus. 
 b Cujus *munere vivimus. 
 
 Cui nullus est a similis. 
 a A b quo facta sunt omnia. 
 
 2. But if a Nominative comes 
 between the Relative and the 
 Verb, the Relative shall be of that 
 Case which the Verb or Noun 
 following, or the Preposition go- 
 ing before, use to govern : as, 
 
 God whom we worship. 
 By whose gift we live. 
 To whom there is none like. 
 By whom all things were made. 
 
 ANNOTATIO. 
 
 9 <[[ Duo vel plura Substan- 
 tia singularia, Conjunctione 
 [et, ac, atque, Sec] copulata, ha- 
 bent Adjectivum, Verbum, vel 
 Relativum Plural e : ut, 
 
 a Petrus et aa Joannes b qui 
 b sunt b docti. 
 
 ^ Two or more Substantives 
 singular, coupled together with 
 a Conjunction [et, ac, atque, 
 fyc] have a Verb, Adjective, or 
 Relative Tlural : as, 
 
 Peter and John who are 
 learned. 
 
 of its Antecedent ; as, ego qui doceo, I who teach. Tu qui discis, you 
 who learn. Lectio quae docetur, the lesson which is taught. 
 
 Num. 9. Note 1. That when the Substantives are of different Gen- 
 ders, and signify Persons, the Adjective or Relative Plural must agree 
 with the Masculine rather than the Feminine ; as, pater et mater qui sunt 
 mortui, the father and mother who are dead. 
 
 EXCEP. But if all the Substantives, or any one of them, signify things 
 without life, the Adjective or Relative Plural must be put in the Neuter 
 Gender; as, divitiae, decus, gloria, in oculissita sunt, riches, honour, and 
 glory, are set before your eyes. 
 
 Note 2. That when two or more Nominatives are of different Persons, 
 the Verb Plural must agree with the First Person rather than the Second, 
 and the Second rather than the Third : as, si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et Ci- 
 cero valemus, if you and Tullia are well, I and Cicero are well. 
 
 Note 5. That the Adjective or Verb frequently agree with the Sub- 
 stantive or Nominative that is nearest them, and are understood to the 
 rest ; as, et ego in cutya sum et tu, both I and you are in the fault ; or, et 
 ego et tu es in culpa. Nihil hie deest, nisi carmina, there is nothing here 
 wanting but charms ; or, nihil hie nisi carmina, desunt. This manner 
 of construction is most usual when the different words signify one and the 
 same thing, or much to the same purpose ; as, mens, ratio, et consilium 
 in senibus est, understanding, reason, and prudence, is in old men. 
 
 Note 4. That a Collective Noun, because it is equivalent to a Plural 
 Number, has sometimes the Adjective or Verb in the Plural Number ; as, 
 pars virgis caesae, a part of them were scourged. Turba ruunt, the crowd 
 
 rush. 
 
Part III.— Chap. 1 
 
 Reg. IV. 
 
 Unum Substantivum concor- 
 dat cum alio eandem rem sig- 
 nificante in casu : ut, 
 
 a Cicero b Orator. 
 
 a Urbs bEdinburgum. 
 Filius b deliciae matris suae. 
 
 w 
 
 — Of Construction. 87 
 
 ~ Rule IV 
 
 kJne Substantive agrees with 10 
 another, signifying the same 
 Thing in case : as, 
 Cicero the Orator. 
 The City Edinburgh. 
 A son the darling of his 
 mother. 
 
 II. DEREGIMINE. 
 Jlvegimen est triplex; 
 
 1. Nominum. 
 
 2. Verborum. 
 
 3. Vocum indeclinabilium. 
 
 II. OF GOVERNMENT 
 \JTovernment is threefold; 
 
 1. Of Nouns. 
 
 2. Of Verbs. 
 
 3. Of Words indeclinable. 
 
 I. The Government of Nouns. 
 § 1. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 / r^ Rule I. 
 
 kJne Substantive governs 11 
 another signifying a different 
 Thing in the Genitive : as, 
 The love of God. 
 The law of nature. 
 ANNOTATIONES. 
 * 1. Si posterius Substanti- I I. If the last Substantive 12 
 vum adjunctum habeat Adjec- | have an Adjective of Praise 
 
 I. Regimen Nominum. 
 § 1. SUBSTANTIVORUM. 
 TT Reg. I. 
 
 U num Substantivum regit a- 
 liud rem diversam significans 
 in Genitivo : ut, 
 a Amor b Dei. 
 *Lex b naturae. 
 
 (a) To these four Concords some add a fifth, viz. That of the Respon- 
 sive, agreeing with its Interrogative in Case ; as, Quis dedit tibi pecuniam / 
 Pater. Who gave you money ? My father. Quo cares ? Libro. What 
 do you want ? A book. But this ought not to be made a principal rule : 
 For the Responsive, or the word that answers the question, does not de- 
 pend upon the Interrogative, but upon the Verb, or some other Word 
 joined with it ; which, because spoken immediately before, is generally 
 understood in the answer. Thus, Quis dedit tibi pecuniam ? Pater [de- 
 dit mihi pecuniam]. Quo cares ? [Careo] Libro. 
 
 Num. 11. Note 1. That of or *s is the ordinary sign of this Genitive. 
 
 Note 2. That the Relative Pronouns, ejus, illius, cujus, &c. Englished 
 his, hers, its, theirs, thereof, whereof, whose, have their Substantives gene- 
 rally understood ; as, liber ejus, [supple hominis, foeminae, &c] his book, 
 or her book ; libri eorum, [supple hominum,foeminarum, &c] their books. 
 
88 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 tivum laudis vel vituperii, in 
 Genitivo vel Ablativo poni 
 potest : lit, 
 a Fir b summae b prudentiae, 
 
 vel b summa b prudentia. 
 a Puer b probae b indolis, vel 
 b proba b indole. 
 
 13*2. Adjectivum in Neutro 
 genere absque Substantivo 
 regit Genitivum : ut, 
 a Midtum b pecuniae. 
 *Quid b rei? 
 
 or Dispraise joined with it, it 
 may be put in the Genitive or 
 Ablative : as, 
 
 A man of great wisdom. 
 
 A boy of a good disposition. 
 
 2. An Adjective in the Net* 
 ter Gender without a Substan~ 
 tive governs the Genitive : as, 
 
 Much money. 
 
 What is the matter : 
 
 § 2. ADJECTIVOBVM. 
 . Reg. I. 
 14 *^Ldjectiva verbalia, vel 
 affectionem animi significan- 
 tia, Genitivum postulant: ut, 
 z Avidus b gloriae. 
 a Ignarus b fraudis. 
 z Memor b beneficiorum. 
 
 § 2. OF ADJECTIVES. 
 j j. Rule I. 
 
 V erbal Adjectives, or such as 
 signify an Affection of the Mind, 
 require the Genitive : as, 
 
 Desirous of glory. 
 
 Ignorant of fraud. 
 
 Mindful of favours. 
 
 Num. 13. This is more elegant than Multa pecunia : Quae res? 
 
 Note 1. That these Adjectives which thus govern the Genitive, as if 
 they were Substantives, are generally such as signify Quantity ; as, mul~ 
 turn, tajitum, quantum, plus, plurimum. 
 
 Note 2. That plus and quid always govern the Genitive, and upon 
 that account are by many thought real Substantives. 
 
 Num. 14. To this rule belong, 
 
 1. Adjectives of Desire* as, Cupidus, ambitiosus, avarus, studiosus, 
 curiosus. 
 
 2. Of Knowledge ; as, Peritus, gnarus, prudens, callidus, providus, 
 doctus, docilis, praescius, praesagus, certus, memor, eruditus, expertus, 
 consultus, Sec. 
 
 5. Of Ignorance ; as, Ignarus, rudis, imperitus, neselus, inscius, incer- 
 tus, dubius, anxius, sollicitus, immemor. 
 
 4. Of Guilt ; as, Conscius, convictus, manifestus, suspectus, reus. 
 
 5. Verbals in ax and ns ; as, Edax, capax, ferax, fugax, tenax, pervi- 
 cax : And Amans, cupiens, appetens, patiens, fugiens, sitiens, negligens, 
 
 4-c. 
 
 6. To which may be referred, Aemulus, munifkus, parcus, prodigus, 
 profusus, securus. 
 
Part III. — Chap. I. — Of Construction. 
 
 89 
 
 _ Reg. II. 
 
 * Jr artitiva et partitive po- 
 sita, Comparativa, Superlativa, 
 Interrogativa, et quaedam Nu- 
 meralia, Genitivo plurali gau- 
 dent: ut, 
 
 *Aliquis b philosophorum. 
 
 a Senior b fratrum. 
 
 a Doctissimus b Ro?nanorum. 
 
 a Quis b nostrum f 
 a Una b musarum, 
 a Octavus b sapientum. 
 
 . Reg. III. 
 
 xYdjectiva significantia com- 
 modum vel incommodum, si- 
 militudinem vel dissimilitudi- 
 nem, regunt Dativum : ut, 
 
 z Utilis h bello. 
 
 z Perniciosus b reipublicae. 
 
 z Similis b patri. 
 
 Rule II. 
 
 J. artitives and words plac- 1 5 
 ed partitively, Comparatives, 
 Superlatives, Interrogate es, 
 and some Numerals, govern 
 the Genitive plural : as, 
 
 Some one of the philosophers. 
 The elder of the brothers. 
 The most learned of the Ro- 
 mans. 
 Which of us? 
 One of the muses. 
 The eighth of the wise men. 
 
 * Rule III. 
 
 Jtdjectives signifying Pro- 1 6 
 fit or Disprofit, Likeness or 
 Unlikeness, govern the Da- 
 tive : as, 
 
 Profitable for war. 
 Pernicious to the common- 
 Like his father. [wealth. 
 
 Num. 15. Note 1. That it is easy to know when this rule takes 
 place, by resolving the Genitive into inter with the Accus. or de, e, ex, 
 with the Abl. ; as, optimus regum, the best of kings ; i. e. optzmus inter 
 reges, or de, e, ex, regibus. 
 
 Note 2. That when there are two Substantives of different Genders, 
 the Partitive, fyc. rather agrees with the first than the last ; as, Indus jiu- 
 minum maximus, Cic. Leo animalium fortissimus, Plin. Otherwise 
 it is of the same Gender with the Substantive it governs \ as, pauca ani- 
 malium, Unaquaeque foeminarum. 
 
 Note 5. That Partitives, fyc. take the Genitive Singular of Collective 
 Nouns, and do not necessarily agree with them in Gender ; as, praestan- 
 tissimus nostrae civitatis, Cic. Nympharum sanguinis una, Virg. 
 
 Num. 16. Note 1. That some of these Adjectives govern also the Ge- 
 nitive ; as, amicus, inimicus, socius, vicinus, par, aequalis, similis, dissi- 
 milis, proprius, communis, &c. 
 
 Note 2. That Adjectives signifying Motion or Tendency to a thing, 
 choose rather the Accusative with ad than the Dative ; such as, proclivis, 
 pronus, propensus, velox, celer, tardus, piger, &c. ; as, 
 
 Est piger ad poenas princeps, ad praemia velox. Ovid. 
 
 Note 3. That Adjectives signifying Fitness, or the contrary, may have 
 either of them ; as, aptus, ineptus, bello } or ad bellum. 
 
Rudiments of the Latin Tongue^ 
 
 90 
 
 17 f Verbalia in BILIS et 
 DUS regunt Dativum : ut, 
 *Amandus vel z a?nabilis 
 b o?nnibas. 
 
 Reg. IV. 
 
 18*^Ldjectiva dimensionem 
 significantia regunt Accusa- 
 tivum mensurae: ut, 
 
 Columna sexaginta b pedes 
 z alta. 
 
 Reg. V. 
 I9*1^/omparativus regit Ab- 
 lativum, qui resolvitur per 
 Quam : ut, 
 
 z Dulcior b melle, 
 *Praestantior b auro, 
 
 ^ Reg. VI. 
 SOXXaec Adjectiva, Dignus, 
 Indignus, Contentus, Praedi- 
 tus, Captus, et Fretus : Item, 
 Natus, Satus,Ortus,Editus, et 
 
 Verbals in BILIS and DUS 
 govern the Dative : as, 
 To be beloved of all men. 
 
 A Rule IV. 
 
 Objectives signifying Dimen- 
 sion govern the Accusative of 
 Measure : as, 
 
 A pillar sixty feet high. 
 
 J f Rule V. 
 
 HE Comparative Degree go- 
 verns the Ablative, which is re- 
 solved by Quam : as, 
 Sweeter than honey. 
 Better than gold. 
 
 T 
 
 Rule VI. 
 
 J. hese Adjectives,Digmis, In- 
 dignus, Contentus, Praeditus, 
 Captus, and Fretus : Also, Na- 
 tus, Satus, Ortus, Editus, and 
 
 Num. 17. Of or by is the ordinary sign of this Dative. 
 
 Note, That Participles of the Preter Tense, and Passive Verbs also, 
 especially among the Poets, have frequently the Dative, instead of the 
 Ablative with a or ab : as, Nullus eorum mihi visus est, none of them 
 was seen by me. Non audior ulli, I am not heard by any. 
 
 Num. 18. The Adjectives of Dimension are, Altus, high or deep; eras- 
 sus or densus, thick; latus, broad; Ion gus, long ; profundus, deep. The 
 names of Measure are, Digitus, an inch ; palmus, an hand-breadth ; pes, 
 a foot ; cubitus, a cubit ; ulna, an ell ; passus, a pace ; &c. 
 
 Note 1. That Verbs signifying Dimension likewise have the Accusa- 
 tive of Measure ; as, Patet tres ulnas, It is three ells large, Virg. 
 
 Note 2. That sometimes the word of Measure is put in the Ablative ; 
 as, Fossa sex cubitis alta, duodecim lata, Liv. Venter ejus exstat ses- 
 quipede, Pers. And sometimes, but rarely, in the Genitive; as, Nee 
 longiores duodenum pedum, Plin. 
 
 Num. 19. Let the following examples be observed and imitated. 
 Multo melior, Much better. Nihilo pejor, Nothing worse. Major solito, 
 Greater than usual. Quo diligentior es, eo doctior evades, The more di- 
 ligent you are, the more learned you will become. Quanto superbior, 
 tanto vilior, The prouder, the less worth. Nihil Virgilio doctius, There 
 is none more learned than VirgiL 
 
Part III.— Chap, L 
 
 similia, Ablativum petunt : ut, 
 
 z Dignus b honor e. 
 
 z Praeditus b virtute. 
 
 z Contentus b parvo. 
 
 z Captus b oculis. 
 
 z Fretus b viribus. 
 
 z Ortus b regibus. 
 
 Reg. VII. 
 ^tldjectivum copiae aut ino- 
 piae regit Genitivum vel Abla- 
 tivum : ut, 
 
 z Plenus b irae vel b ira. 
 
 z Inops b rationis. 
 
 — Of Construction. 91 
 
 the like require the ablative : as, 
 
 Worthy of honour. 
 
 Endued with virtue. 
 
 Content with little. 
 
 Blind. 
 
 Trusting to his strength. 
 
 Descended of kings. 
 
 . Rule VII. 
 
 j^±n Adjective of Plenty or 21 
 Want governs the Genitive or 
 Ablative : as, 
 
 Full of anger. 
 
 Void of reason. 
 
 II. Regimen Verborum, 
 § 1. PERSONALIUM. 
 ~ Reg. I. 
 
 * O um, quoties possessionem, 
 proprietatem, aut officium sig- 
 nificat, regit Genitivum : ut, 
 3 Est b regis punire rebelles. 
 
 b Insipientis a est dicere, Non 
 
 putaram. 
 b Militum z est suoduciparere. 
 
 ^ Excipiuntur hi Nominati- 
 vi, Meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, 
 vestrum : ut, 
 
 b Tuum z est id procurare. 
 
 II. The Government of Verbs. 
 § I. OF PERSONAL VERBS. 
 ~ Rule I. 
 
 uum, when it signifies Pos- 22 
 session, Property, or Duty, 
 governs the Genitive: as, 
 It belongs to the king to pun- 
 ish rebels. 
 It is the property of a fool 
 to say, I had not thought. 
 It is the duty of soldiers to 
 obey their general. 
 «[[ These Nominatives, Me- 23 
 um, tuum, suum, nostrum, 
 vestrum, are excepted : as, 
 It is your duty to manage that. 
 
 Num. 21. Note 1. That Distentus, gravidus, refertus, and orbus, va- 
 cuus, viduus, choose rather the Ablative; Indigus, compos, and impos, 
 the Genitive. 
 
 Note 2. That some comprehend opus, and usus, when they signify 
 Necessity, under this rule ; as, Quid opus est verbis ? What need is there 
 of words ? Ovid. Nunc viribus usus. Now there is need of strength, Virg. 
 But it is to be remarked, that these are Substantive Nouns, the very same 
 withOpus, operis, a work, and Usus, usus, use; and have the Ablative af- 
 ter them because of the Preposition in, which is understood. Sometimes 
 0]ms hath the Nominative, by Num. 3. ; as, Dux nobis opus est, We stand 
 in need of a leader. It is elegantly joined with the Participle Perfect ; 
 as, Consulto, maturato, invento, facto, &c. opus est. We must advise, 
 make haste, find out, do, <£c. 
 
92 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 *M« 
 
 Reg. 
 
 II. 
 
 24*J.KLisereor 9 miseresco, et 
 
 satago, regunt Genitivum : 
 
 ut, 
 
 ^Miserere b civium tuorum. 
 
 *8atagit b rerum suarian. 
 -p, Reg. III. 
 25J-jst pro habeo regit Dati- 
 
 vum personae : ut, 
 
 a Est b mihi liber. 
 a Sunt b mihi libri. 
 c Reg. IV. 
 
 26)Jum pro offer regit duos 
 Dativos, unum personae, al- 
 terum rei : ut, 
 
 a Est b mihi hb volu2otati. 
 „ Reg. V. 
 
 27 \ erbum significans com- 
 modum vel incommodum re- 
 git Dativum : ut, 
 
 Fortuna a favet b fortibus. 
 
 b Xemini a ?wceas. 
 
 -*-- Rule II. 
 
 ItAisereor, miseresco, and sa- 
 tago, govern the Genitive : as, 
 
 Take pity on your countrymen. 
 He hath his hands full at home. 
 
 Rule III. 
 Jljst taken for habeo [to have] 
 governs the Dative of a person ; 
 as, 
 
 I have a book. 
 
 I have books. 
 
 Rule IV. 
 Joum taken for affero [to bring] 
 governs two Datives, the one of 
 a Person, and the other of a 
 Thing : as, 
 It is [brings'] a pleasure to me. 
 
 - Rule V. 
 
 Ji. verb signifying Advantage 
 or Disadvantage governs the 
 Dative : as, 
 
 Fortune favours the brave. 
 
 Do hurt to no man. 
 
 Num. 23. To these last may be added Possessive Nouns; such as, 
 Regium, humanum, belluinum, and the like; as, Humanum est errare, 
 It is incident to man to err. 
 
 Note, That to all these are understood, Ofjicium, opus, negothim, or 
 some other word to be gathered from the sentence ; as, Me Pompeii to- 
 turn esse scis, You know that I am wholly Pompey's, or in Pompey's in- 
 terest, Cic. i. e. amicum, fautorem, or the like. 
 
 Num. 25. This is more elegant than Habeo librum, or Habeo libros. 
 
 So Desum is used elegantly for Careo ; as Desunt mihi libri, for Ca- 
 reo libris, I want books. 
 
 Num. 26. Note, That other Verbs, such as, Do, duco, verto, tribuo, 
 habeo, relinquo, &c. may have two Datives ; as, Hoc tibi laudi datur, 
 You are praised for this ; Ne mihi vitio vertas, Do not blame me. 
 
 To this may be referred such expressions as these : Est mihi nomen 
 Joanni, My name is John ; which is more elegant than Est mihi nomen 
 Joannes or Joannis. 
 
 Num. 27. This is a very general rule, and (when we signify a thing 
 to be acquired to any Person or Thing) almost common to a)l Verbs i 
 JBut in a more particular manner are comprehended under it, 
 
Part IIL—Chap. L 
 
 Reg. VI. 
 
 V erbum active significans re- 
 git Accusativum : ut, 
 *Ama h Deum. 
 *Reverere 'bparentes. 
 
 * Recordor, memini, reminis- 
 cor, et obliviscor, regunt Accu- 
 sativum vel Genitivum : ut, 
 
 2 Recordor h lectionis vel h lec- 
 tionem. 
 
 * Obliviscor ^injuriae vel b m- 
 
 juriam. 
 
 A 
 
 .—-Of Construction. 93 
 
 Rule VI. 
 verb signifying actively 2% 
 governs the Accusative : as, 
 Love God. 
 
 Reverence your parents. 
 Recordor, memini, remi-2Q 
 niscor, and obliviscor, gover- 
 the Accusative or Genitive : au 
 I remember my lesson. 
 
 I forget an injury. 
 
 1. To Profit or Hurt: as, Commodo, proficio, placeo, consulo, 
 noceo, officio. But laedo and offendo govern the Accus. 
 
 2. To Favour, to Help, and their contraries : as, Faveo, annuo, 
 arrideo, assentior, adstipulor, gratulor, ignosco, indulgeo, parco, a- 
 dulor, plaudo, blandior, lenocinor, palpor, studeo, supplico, &c. Also, 
 Auxilior, adminiculor, subvenio, succurro, patrocinor, medeor : Also, 
 Derogo, detraho, invideo, §c. But juvo has the Accus. 
 
 3. To Command, Obey, or Resist : as, Impero, praecipio, mando ; 
 Pareo, servio, obedio, obsequor, obtempero, morem gero, morigeror 
 famulor ; Pugno, repugno, certo, obsto, reluctor, renitor, resisto, ad- 
 versor, refragor, fyc. TSutjubeo governs the Accus. 
 
 4. To threaten, or to be Angry with : as, Minor, indignor, iras- 
 cor, succenseo. 
 
 5. To Trust : as, ndo, confido, credo. 
 
 6. Verbs compounded with satis, bene, and male : as, Satisfacio, bene- 
 facio, benedico, malefacio, maledico. 
 
 7. The Compounds of the Verb Sum : as, Adsum, prosum, obsum. 
 
 8. Verbs compounded with. these ten Prepositions, Ad, ante, con, in, 
 inter, ob,. post, prae, sub, and super : as, 1. Adsto, accumbo, acquiesco, 
 assideo, adhaereo, admoveo. 2. Antecello, anteeo, anteverto. 3. Con- 
 sono, commisceo, condono, commorior. 4. Illudo, immorior, inhaereo, 
 insideo, inhio, innitor, invigilo, incumbo. 5. Interpono, intervenio, in- 
 terfero. 6. Obrepo, obtrecto, occumbo. 7. Postpono, posthabeo. 8. 
 Praeeo, praestat, for ' excellit, praeluceo. 9. Succedo, submitto, subjicio. 
 10. Super sto, supervenio. 
 
 Note 1. That to, the sign of the Dative, is frequently understood. 
 
 Note 2. That to is not always the sign of the Dative : for, 1. Verbs 
 of Local Motion, as, Eo, venio, proficiscor ; and, 2. These Verbs, Pro- 
 vocO, voco, invito, hortor, specto, pertineo, attineo, and such like, have 
 the Accusative with the Preposition ad. 
 
 Num. 28. Note, That Neuter and Intransitive Verbs have sometimes 
 an Accusative after them. 1 . Of their own or the like signification ; as, 
 Vivere vitam,' Gaudere gaudium, Sitire sanguinem, Olere hircum. 2. 
 When tak€n in a metaphorical sense ; as, Ardebat Alexin, i. e, Vehemen- 
 ter araabat. 
 
94 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 VERBA Activa alium una 
 cum Accusativo casum re- 
 
 30 *i. VERBA accusandi, 
 damnandi, et absolvendi, cum 
 Accusativo personae, regunt 
 etiam Genitivum criminis : 
 ut, 
 
 *Arguit h i7ie hh furti. 
 b Meipsum hh inertiae *con- 
 
 demno. 
 b Ilium bbhomicidii a absol- 
 vunt. 
 31*2. VERBA comparandi, 
 dandi, narrandi, et auferen- 
 di, regunt Dativum cum Ac- 
 cusativo : ut, 
 
 Active VERBS governing 
 another Case together 
 with the Accusative. 
 
 1. VERBS of Accusing, Con- 
 demning, and Acquitting, with 
 the Accusative of the Person, 
 govern also the Genitive of the 
 crime : as, 
 
 He accuses me of theft. 
 
 I condemn myself of lazi- 
 ness. 
 
 They acquit him of man- 
 slaughter. 
 
 2. VERBS of Comparing, 
 Giving, Declaring, and Taking 
 away, govern the Dative with 
 the Accusative : as, 
 
 Num. 30. 1. Verbs of Accusing are, Accuso, ago, appello, arcesso, 
 arguo, alligo, astringo, defero, incuso, insimulo, postulo, fyc. 
 
 2. Verbs of Condemning are, Damno, condemno, convinco, $c. 
 
 3. Verbs of Absolving are, Solvo, absolvo, libero, purgo, fyc. 
 
 Note 1. That the Genitive may be changed into the Ablative, either 
 with or without a Preposition ; as, Purgo te hac culpa, or, de hac culpa, 
 I clear you of this fault. Eum de vi condemnavit, He found him guilty 
 of a riot. Cic. 
 
 Note 2. That the Genitive, properly speaking, is governed by some 
 Ablative understood ; such as, Crimine, poena, actione, causa : as, Accu- 
 sare furti, i. e. Crimine furti. Condemnare capitis, i. e. poena capitis. 
 
 Note 3. That Crimine, poena, actione, capite, morte, scarcely admit 
 of a Preposition. 
 
 Num. 31. 1. To Verbs of Comparing belong also Verbs of preferring 
 or postponing. 
 
 2. To Verbs of Giving belong Verbs of receiving, promising, paying, 
 sending, bringing. 
 
 3. To Verbs of Declaring belong Verbs of explaining, showing, deny- 
 ing, £c. 
 
 4. Verbs of Taking away are, Aufero, adimo, eripio, eximo, demo, 
 surripio, detraho, tollo, excutio, extorqueo, arceo, defendo, fyc. 
 
 Note 1. That many of these Verbs govern the Dative by Num. 27. 
 
 Note 2. That innumerable other Verbs may have the Dative with the 
 Accusative, when, together with the Thing done, is also signified the Per- 
 son or Thing to or for whom it is done ; as, Doce mihi filium, Teach 
 me my son. Cura mihi hanc rem, Take care of this affair for me. 
 
 Note 3. That comparo, confero, compono, have frequently the Abla- 
 tive with cum. 
 
Part III.— Chap. L 
 
 *Comparo b Virgilium bb Ho- 
 
 mero. 
 b Suum bb cuique Hribuito. 
 *Narras h fabulam bb surdo. 
 
 *Eripuit b me bb morti. 
 
 *3. VERBA rogandi et do- 
 cendi duos admittunt Accu- 
 sative^, priorem personae, pos- 
 teriorem rei : ut, 
 
 *Posce b Deum bb veniam. 
 
 *Docuit b me bb grammaticam. 
 
 — Of Construction. 95 
 
 I compare Virgil to Ho- 
 mer, 
 
 Give every man his own. 
 
 You tell a story to a deaf 
 man. 
 
 He rescued me from death. 
 
 3. VERBS of asking and 32 
 teaching admit of two Accu- 
 satives, the first of a Person, 
 and the second of a Thing : as, 
 
 Beg pardon of God. 
 
 He taught me grammar. 
 
 ANNOTATIO. 
 
 * Quorum Activa duos Ca- 
 sus regunt, eorum Passiva pos- 
 teriorem retinent : ut, 
 
 *Accusor b furti. 
 
 Virgilius z comparatur b Ho- 
 
 mero, 
 z Doceor b grammatical. 
 Reg. VII. 
 JL retium rei a quovis Ver- 
 bo in Ablativo regitur : ut, 
 
 The Passives of such ActiveS3 
 Verbs as govern two Cases, 
 do still retain the last of them : 
 as, 
 
 I am accused of theft. 
 Virgil is compared to Ho- 
 mer. 
 I am taught grammar. 
 rjl Rule VII. 
 JL he Price of a Thing is 34 
 governed in the Ablative by 
 any Verb : as, 
 
 Num. 32. Note 1. That among the Verbs that govern two Accusa- 
 tives, are also reckoned these following : 
 
 1. Celo ; as, Cela hanc rem uxor em, Conceal this from your wife, Plaut. 
 But we can also say, Cela te de hac re, and Celo tibi hanc rem. 
 
 2. Verbs of Clothing; as, Induit se calceos, He put on his shoes. But 
 these have more commonly the Ablative of the Thing without a Preposi- 
 tion ; as, Vestit se purpura, He clothes himself with purple. Induo and 
 Exuo have frequently the Person in the Dative, and the Thing in the Ac- 
 cusative ; as, Thoracem sibi induit, He put on his breastplate. 
 
 3. Moneo ; as, Id unum te moneo, I put you in mind of this one thing. 
 But, unless it is some general word, [as, Hoc, illud, id, &c] Moneo, ad- 
 moneo, commonefacio, have either the Genitive ; as, Admoneo te officii, I 
 put you in mind of your duty, or the Ablative with de ; as, De hac re te 
 saepius admonui, I have frequently warned you of this. 
 
 Note 2. That Verbs of Asking often change the Accusative of the Per- 
 son into an Ablative, with the Preposition ; as, Oro, exoro, peto, postulo 
 hoc a, te, I entreat this of you. Some always ; as, Contendo, quaero, set- 
 tor, sciscitor hoc a te. Finally, some have the Accusative of the Person, 
 and the Ablative of the Thing with de ; as, Interrogo, consulo, percontor 
 te de hac re. 
 
96 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 z Emi librum b duobus assi- 
 bus. 
 
 *Vendidit hie b auro pa- 
 triam. 
 
 Demosthenes z docuit b ta- 
 lent o. 
 
 35 *Excipiuntur hi Genitivi, 
 Tanti, quanti, pluris t mino- 
 ris : ut, 
 
 b Quanti z co?istitit? 
 Asse et b pluris* 
 
 36 * VERBA aestimandi, cum 
 Accusative), regunt hujusmo 
 di Genitivos, Magni, parvi, 
 nihili, &c : ut, 
 
 * Aestimo te b magni. 
 Reg. VIII. 
 37* V erba copiae et ino- 
 piae plerumque Ablativum 
 regunt : ut 
 
 z Abundat b divitiis. 
 a Caret omni b culpa. 
 38 * Utor, abutor, fruor, fun- 
 gor, potior, vescor, regunt 
 Ablativum : ut, 
 z Utitur \fraude, 
 a Abutitur h libris. 
 
 I bought a book for two 
 
 shillings. 
 
 This man sold his country 
 t for gold. 
 
 Demosthenes taught for a 
 talent. 
 
 These Ge7iitives, Tanti, quan- 
 ti, pluris, minoris, are excepted ; 
 as, 
 
 How much cost it ? 
 
 A shilling and more. 
 
 VERBS of valuing, with the 
 Accusative, govern such Genitives 
 as these, Magni, parvi, nihili, 
 Sfc. : as, 
 
 I value you much. 
 „ Rule VIII. 
 V erbs of Plenty and Scarce- 
 ness for the most part govern the 
 Ablative : as, 
 
 He abounds in riches. 
 
 He has no fault. 
 
 Utor, abutor, fruor, fungor, 
 potior, vescor, govern the Ab- 
 lative : as, 
 
 He uses deceit. 
 
 He abuses books. 
 
 Num. 55. Note, That if the Substantive be expressed, they are put 
 in the Ablative ; as, Quanto pretio ? Minore mercede. 
 
 Num. 56. 1. Verbs of Valuing are, Aestimo, pen do, facio, habeo, du- 
 co, puto, taxo. 
 
 2. The rest of the Genitives are. Minoris, minimi, tanti, quanti, pluris, 
 majoris, plurimi, maximi, nauci, flocci, pili, assis, teruncii, hujus : Also 
 aequi and boni, after facio and consulo. 
 
 Note 1. That we say also, Aestimo, magno, parvo, supple pretio. 
 
 Note 2. That Alvarus excludes majoris, as wanting authority : But 
 there is an example of it to be found in Phaedrus, II. 5. 25. 
 Multo majoris alapae mecum veneunt 
 
 Num. 57. Sometimes they have the Genitive ; as, Aegit aerts, He wants 
 money, Hor. Implentur veteris Bacchi, They are filled with old wine, Virg. 
 
 Note, That Verbs of Loading and Unloading, and the like, belong 
 to this Rule ; as, Kavis oneratur mercibus, The ship is loaded with goods, 
 Levabo te hoc onere, I will ease you of this burden. Liberavit nos metu, 
 He delivered us from fear. 
 
 Num. 58. To these Verbs add, Nitor, gaudeo, mnto, dono, munero, com- 
 
Part III. — Chap. I. — Of Construction 
 
 § 2. REGIMEN VERBORUM 
 
 IMPERSONALIUM. 
 XT Reg. IX. 
 
 V ereum impersonate regit 
 Dativum : lit, 
 
 *Expedit b reipublicae. 
 3 Licet b nemini peccare. 
 
 *EXCEP. 1. Refert et In- 
 terest Genitivum postulant : ut, 
 
 a Refert b patris. 
 a Interest b omnium. 
 
 *At mea, tua, sua, nostra, 
 vestra, ponuntur in Accusati- 
 ve pluraii : ut, 
 
 Non b mea a refert. 
 
 *EXCEP. 2. Haec quinque, 
 JMiseret, poenitet, pudet, taedet, 
 et piget, regunt Accusativum 
 personae, cum Genitivo rei : 
 ut, 
 
 z Miseret b me bb tui. 
 
 3 Poenitet b me bb peccati. 
 
 *Taedet b me bb vitae. 
 
 *EXCEP. 3. Haec quatuor, 
 
 Decet, delectat, jurat, oportet, 
 regunt Accusativum personae 
 cum Infinitivo : ut, 
 
 97 
 § 2. THE GOVERNMENT 
 OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 ' Rule IX. 
 
 j^Ln Impersonal Verb go- 3 9 
 verns the Dative : as, 
 
 It is profitable for the State. 
 
 No man is allowed to sin. 
 
 EXCEP. 1, Refert andio 
 Interest require the Genitive : 
 as, 
 
 It concerns my father. 
 
 It is the interest of all. 
 
 But mea, tua, sua, nostra, 4 1 
 vestra, are put in the Accusa- 
 tive Plural : as, 
 
 I am not concerned. 
 
 EXCEP. 2. These five, Mi-42 
 seret, poenitet, pudet, taedet, 
 and piget, govern the Accusa- 
 tive of a Person, with the Ge- 
 nitive of a Thing : as, 
 
 I pity you. 
 
 I repent of my sin. 
 
 I am weary of my life. 
 
 EXCEP. 3. Thesefour,De-*3 
 cet, delectat, juvat, oportet, 
 govern the Accusative of the 
 Person with the Infinitive : as, 
 
 munico, viclito, beo,fido, impertior, dzgnor, nascor, creor, officio, consto, 
 prosequor, &c. 
 
 Note, That potior sometimes governs the Genitive ; as, potiri hostium, 
 To get his enemies into his power. Potiri rerum, To have the chief rule. 
 
 Num. 59. Such as these, accidit, contingit, evenit, conducit, expedit, 
 lubet, libet, licet, placet, displicet, vacat, restat, praestat, liquet, nocei, do- 
 let, sufficit, &c. Together with the Dative, they have commonly an Infi- 
 nitive after them, which is supposed to supply the place of a Nominative be- 
 fore them. 
 
 Num. 42. Note, That this Genitive is frequently turned into the In- 
 finitive ; as, poenitet me jieccdsse ; taedet me vivere ; and so they fall in 
 with the following Rule. 
 
9S 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 z Delectat b me hh studere. 
 Non a decet b te bb rivari. 
 
 * S. REGIMEN Infinitivi, 
 
 Participiorum, Gerundio- 
 rum, et Supinorum. 
 TT Reg. X. 
 
 44 Unum Verbum regit aliud 
 in Infinitivo : ut, 
 
 a Cupio b discere. 
 Reg. XI. 
 
 45 X articipia, Gerundia, et 
 Supina, regunt Casum suo- 
 rum Verborum : ut, 
 
 z Amans b virtutem. 
 
 3 Car ens b fraude. 
 
 j~ 1. Gerundia. 
 461.(jerundium in DUM 
 Nominativi Casus cum Ver- 
 bo [est] regit Dativum : ut, 
 
 a Vivendum est b mihi recti. 
 
 z Moriendum est b omnibus. 
 47 2. Gerundium in DI re- 
 gitur a Substantivis vel Ad- 
 jectivis: ut, 
 
 z Tempus b legendi. 
 
 z Cupidus b discendi. 
 
 I delight to study. 
 It does not become you to 
 scold. 
 * s. The GOVERNMENT 
 of the Infinitive, Partici- 
 ples, Gerunds, and Supines. 
 ORule X. 
 ne Verb governs another in 
 the Infinitive : as, 
 I desire to learn. 
 y^ Rule XI. 
 
 participles, Gerunds, and Su- 
 pines, govern the Case of their 
 own Verbs ; as, 
 Loving virtue. 
 Wanting guile. 
 r j 1 1. Gerunds. 
 1. JL he Gerund in DUM of 
 the Nominative Case,. with the 
 Verb [est] governs the Dative: as, 
 I must live well. 
 All must die. 
 
 2. The Gerund in DI is go- 
 verned by Substantives or Ad- 
 jectives : as, 
 
 Time of reading. 
 Desirous to learn. 
 
 Num. 45. Note, That oportet is elegantly joined with the Subjunctive 
 Mood, ut being understood ; as, oportet facias, you must do it ; for opor- 
 tet te facer e. 
 
 Attinet, pertinet, and spectat, when used impersonally, (which rarely hap- 
 pens) have the Accusative with ad, as was observed above, p. 95. 
 
 Num. 44. Sometimes it is governed by Adjectives ; as, cupidus et cu- 
 piens discere. 
 
 Note, That the Verb coepit or coeperunt is sometimes understood ; as, 
 omnes mihi invidere (supple coeperunt), they all began to envy me. 
 
 Num. 46. This Dative is frequently understood ; as, eundum est (sup- 
 ple nobis), we must go. 
 
 Note, That this Gerund always imports necessity, and the Dative af- 
 ter it is the person on whom the necessity lies. 
 
 Num. 47. 1. The Substantives are such as these ; amor, causa, gratia, 
 sludium, tempus, occasio, ars, otium, voluntas, cupido, &c. 
 
 2. The Adjectives are generally Verbals, mentioned Num. 14. 
 
Part III<—Chap. I 
 
 3. Gerundium in DO Da- 
 tivi Casus regitur ab Adjecti- 
 vis utilitatem vel aptitudinem 
 significantibus : ut, 
 
 Charta z utilis h scribendo. 
 
 4. Gerundium in DUM Ac- 
 cusativi Casus regitur a Prae- 
 positionibus ad vel inter : ut, 
 
 Promptus z ad b audiendum. 
 Attentus a inter h docendum. 
 
 5. Gerundium in DO Abla- 
 tivi Casus regitur a Praeposi- 
 tionibus, a, ab, de } e, ex, vel 
 in : ut, 
 
 Poena z a h peccando abster- 
 
 ret. 
 *Vel sine praepositione, ut 
 Ablativus Modi vel Causae : 
 ut, 
 
 Memoria b excolendo a au- 
 
 getur. 
 z Defessus sum ^ambulando. 
 
 6. Gerundia Accusativum 
 regentia vertuntur eleganter 
 in Participia in DUS, quae 
 cum suis Substantivis in Ge- 
 nere, Numero, et Casu, con- 
 cordant : ut, 
 
 Petendum est pacem, 
 Tempus petendi pacem. 
 
 , — Of Construction. 99 
 
 3. The Gerund in DO o/48 
 the Dative Case is governed 
 by Adjectives signifying Use- 
 fulness or Fitness : as, 
 
 Paper useful for writing. 
 
 4. The Gerund in DUM49 
 of the Accusative Case is go- 
 verned by the Prepositions 
 ad or inter : as, 
 
 Ready to hear. 
 Attentive in time of teach- 
 ing. 
 
 5. The Gerund in DO of 50 
 the Ablative Case is governed 
 by the Prepositions, a, ab, de, 
 e, ex, or in : as, 
 
 Punishment frightens from 
 
 sinning. 
 * Or without a Preposi-5l 
 tion, as the Ablative of Man- 
 ner or Cause : as, 
 
 The memory is improved 
 
 by exercising it. 
 I am wearied with walking. 
 
 6. Gerunds governing the 52 
 Accusative are elegantly turn- 
 ed into the Participles in 
 D US, which agree with their 
 Substantives in Gender, Num- 
 ber, and Case : as, 
 
 Petenda est pax. 
 Tempus petendae pacis. 
 
 Num. 48. The Adjective of Fitness is often understood ; as, non est 
 solvendoy he is not able to pay, (supple aptus or par). 
 
 Note, That sometimes this Gerund is governed by a Verb ; as, Epi- 
 dicum quaerendo operam dabo, I'll endeavour to find out Epidicus, Plaut 
 
 Num. 49. Note 1. That it hath sometimes, but very rarely, the Pre- 
 positions ob and ante ; as, ob absolvendum munus, for finishing your task, 
 Cic. Ante domandum } before they are tamed or broken, Virg. speaking 
 ©f horses. 
 
 Note 2. That what was the Gerund in dum of the Nominative with 
 the Verb est, fait, &c. becomes the Accusative with esse ; as, omnibw 
 moriendum esse novimus, we know that all must die. 
 
 E2 
 
100 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 Ad petendum pacem. 
 A petendo pacem. 
 
 Supina. 
 
 53* 1. Supinum in UM ponitur 
 
 post Verbum Motus : ut, 
 
 *Abiit b deambulatum. 
 
 54 * 2. Supinum in U ponitur 
 post Nomen Adjectivum : ut, 
 a Facile b dictu. 
 
 Ad petendam pacem. 
 A petenda pace. 
 
 Supines. 
 
 1. The Supine in U Mis put 
 after a Verb of Motion : as, 
 
 He hath gone to walk. 
 
 2. The Supine in U is put 
 after an Adjective Noun : as. 
 
 Easy to tell, or to be told. 
 
 Num. 52. Add to these the Gerunds of fungor, fruor, and potior. 
 
 These Participles in dus are commonly called Gerundives. 
 
 Note 1. That the Substantive must always be of the same Case that 
 the Gerund was of. 
 
 Note 2. That because of its noisy sound, the Gerund in di is seldom 
 changed into the Genitive Plural ; but either the Accusative is retained ; 
 as, studio patres vestros videndi, rather than patrum vestrorum videndo- 
 rum : Or it is turned into the Genitive Plural, without changing the Ge- 
 rund ; as, patrum vestrorum videndi studio. Thus Valla and Farnabius : 
 But see my Gram. Maj. vol. ii. p. 256. 
 
 Num. 53. The Supine in um is elegantly used with the Verb eo, when 
 we signify that one sets himself about the doing of a thing ; as, in mea 
 vita tu laudem is quaesitum P are you going to advance your reputation 
 at the hazard of my life ? Ter. And this is the reason why this Supine, 
 with iri taken impersonally, supplies the place of the Fut. of the Inf. Pass. 
 
 Some general Remarks on the Construction of Participles, 
 Gerunds, and Supines. 
 Note i. That Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, have a twofold Con- 
 struction ; one, as they partake of the nature of Verbs, by which they go- 
 vern a certain Case after them ; another, as they partake of the nature of 
 Nouns, and consequently are subject to the same rules with them. Thus, 
 
 1. A Participle is always an Adjective agreeing with its Subst. by No. 1. 
 
 2. A Gerund is a Substantive, and construed as follows; (1.) That in 
 dum of the Nominative by No. 2. ; of the Accus. by No. 68. (2.) That 
 in di by No. 11. or 14. (3.) That in do of the'Dat. by No. 16. ; of 
 the Ablat by No. 69. 71. or 55. 
 
 3. A Supine is also a Substantive. (1.) That in um, governed by ad un- 
 derstood, by No. 68. (2.) That in u, governed by in understood, by No. 71. 
 
 Note 2. That the Present of the Infinitive Active, the first Supine, 
 and the Gerund in dum, with the Preposition ad, are thus distinguished : 
 The Supine is used after Verbs of Motion ; the Infinitive after any other 
 Verb ; the Gerund in dum, with ad, after Adjective Nouns. But these 
 last are frequently to be met with after Verbs of Motion ; and Poets also 
 use the Infinitive after Adjectives. 
 
 Note 3. That the Present of the Infinitive Passive, and the last Su- 
 pine, are thus distinguished : The Supine hath always an Adjective before 
 it, which the Infinitive hath not, unless (as I said) among Poets. 
 
Part IIL—Chap. I. 
 
 §4. CONSTRUCTIO CIR- 
 
 CUMSTANTIARUM. 
 1. Causa, Modus, et Instru- 
 
 mentum. 
 ~ Reg. XII. 
 *\^/ausa, Modus, et Instru- 
 mentum, ponuntur in Ablati- 
 vo : ut, 
 
 *Palleo b metu. 
 *Fecit suo b more. 
 *Scribo b calamo. 
 2. LOCUS. 
 Reg. XIII. 
 *1. J%l omen oppidi ponitur in 
 Genitivo, cum quaestio fit per 
 UBI: ut, 
 
 *Vixit b Romae. 
 z Mortuus est b Londini. 
 
 —Of Construction. 101 
 
 § 4. THE CONSTRUCTION 
 OF CIRCUMSTANCES, (a) 
 1. The Cause, Manner, and 
 Instrument. 
 ™ Rule XII. 
 JL he Cause, Manner, and 5 5 
 Instrument, are put in the Ab- 
 lative : as, 
 
 I am pale for fear. 
 He did it after his own way. 
 I write with a pen. 
 2. PLACE. 
 Rule XIII. 
 Name of a Town is 56 
 put in the Genitive, when the 
 question is made by UBI, 
 [Where] : as, 
 
 He lived at Rome. 
 He died at London. 
 
 JL HE 
 
 (a) Adjective Nouns, but especially Verbs, have frequently some Cir- 
 cumstances going along with them in discourse, the most considerable 
 whereof with respect to construction, are these five ; 1. The Cause or 
 Reason why any thing is done ; 2. The Way or Manner how it is done s 
 3. The Instrument or Thing wherewith it is done ; 4. The Place where ; 
 arul 5. The Time when it is done. 
 
 Num. 55. Note 1. That the Cause is known by the question cur or 
 quare ? why, wherefore ? &c. The Manner by the question quomodo ? 
 how ? and the Instrument by the question quocum ? wherewith ? 
 
 Note 2. That the Preposition is frequently expressed with the Cause 
 and Manner ; as, praegaudio, for joy ; propter amor em, for love ; ob cuU 
 pam, for a fault ; cum summo labore, with great labour ; per dedecus, 
 with disgrace. But the Preposition cum is never added to the Instru- 
 ment, for we cannot say, scribo cum calamo ; cum oculis vidi. 
 
 Note 3. But here we must carefully distinguish between the Instru- 
 ment, and what is called the Ablativus Comitatus, or Ablative of Concomi- 
 tancy, i. e. signifying that something was in company with another ; for 
 then the Preposition [cwm] is generally expressed ; as, ingressus est cumgla- 
 dio, he entered with a sword, i. e. having a sword with him, or about him. 
 
 Note 4. That to Cause some refer the matter of which any thing is 
 made ; as, clypeus aere fabricatus, a shield made of brass ; but, except 
 with the Poets, the Preposition is for the most part expressed. 
 
 Note 5. That to Manner some refer the adjunct, i. e. something join- 
 ed to another thing ; as, terra amoena Jloribus, a land pleasant with flowers; 
 mons nive candidus, a hill white with snow. 
 
 Note 6. That to Instrument some refer conjicior dolore, inedid. &c. 
 prosequor odio, amore, &c. officio te honore, contumelia, &c. lacesso ver- 
 bis asperis, &c. 
 
 E 3 
 
Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 102 
 
 57 *EXCEP. Si vero sit 
 tertiae Declinationis, aut 
 Pliiralis Numeri, in Abla- 
 tivo effertur : ut, 
 
 ^Habitat b Carthagine. 
 *Studuit b Parisiis. 
 
 58 *2. Cum quaestio fit per 
 QUO, nomen oppidi in Ac- 
 cusative regitur : ut, 
 
 a Venit b Edinburgum, 
 *Profectus est b Athenas. 
 
 59 *S. Si quaeratur per UN- 
 DE vel QUA, nomen op- 
 pidi ponitur in Ablativo : 
 ut, 
 
 *Discessit b Aberdonid. 
 b Laodiced iter b faciebat. 
 
 60 *4. Domus et Rus eodem 
 modo quo oppidorum nomi- 
 na construuntur : ut, of Towns : as, 
 Manet domi, He stays at home. Domum revertitur, He re- 
 turns home. Domo arcessitus sum, I am called from home. 
 Vivit rure or ruri, Ab'iit rus, Redilt rure. 
 
 61 *5. Nominibus regionum, 
 provinciarum, et aliorum 
 
 EXCEP. But if it is of the 
 third Declension, or of the Plu- 
 ral Number, it is expressed in 
 the Ablative : as, 
 
 He dwells at Carthage. 
 
 He Xudied at Paris. 
 
 2. When the question is made 
 by Q UO, [Whither], the Name 
 of a Town is governed in the 
 Accusative ; as, 
 
 He came to Edinburgh. 
 He went to Athens. 
 
 3. If the question is made by 
 UNDE, [Whence], or QUA, 
 [By or through what Place], 
 the name of a Town is put in 
 the Ablative : as, 
 
 He went from Aberdeen. 
 He went through Laodicea. 
 
 4. Domus and Rus are con- 
 strued the same way as Names 
 
 5. To Names of Countries, 
 Provinces, and other Places, 
 not mentioned, the Preposition 
 is generally added : as, 
 
 locorum, non dictis, prae 
 
 positio fere additur : ut, 
 
 UBI ? Natus in Scotia, in Fifa, in urbe, &c 
 
 QUO ? Abut in Scotiam, in Fifam, in [vel ad] urbem, &c 
 
 UNDE ? Rediit e Scotia, e Fifa, ex urbe, &c. 
 
 QUA ? Transit per Scotiam, per Fifam, per urbem, Sec. 
 
 62 *Distantia unius loci ab 
 alio ponitur in Accusativo, 
 interdum et in Ablativo : 
 ut, 
 
 Glascua *distat Edinburgo 
 
 The Distance of one Place 
 from another is put in the Ac 
 cusative, and sometimes in the 
 Ablative: as, 
 
 Glasgow is thirty miles dis- 
 
 Num. 56, &c. Note i. That the Preposition is frequently added to 
 Names of Towns, (especially when the question is Quo ? Unde ? or 
 Qua ?) and sometimes omitted to Names of Countries, Provinces*, &c. 
 
Part HI— Chap. I. 
 triginta b millia passuum. 
 b Iter vel b itinere unius diet, 
 3. TEMP US. 
 R EG . XIV. 
 *1. X empus pomtur in Ab- 
 lativo, cum quaestio fit per 
 QUANDO : ut, 
 z Fenit b hord tertid. 
 * 2. Cum quaestio fit per 
 QUAMDIU, tempus ponitur 
 in Accusativo vel Ablativo, 
 sed saepius in Accusativo : ut, 
 
 ^Mansit paucos b dies. 
 
 Sex h mensibus a abfuit. 
 
 De Ablativo Absoluto. 
 
 G Reg. XV. 
 
 *Oubstantivum cum Partici- 
 pio, quorum Casus a nulla alia 
 dictione pendet, ponuntur in 
 Ablativo absoluto : ut, 
 
 *Sole b oriente fugiunt tene- 
 brae. 
 
 — Of Construction. 103 
 
 tant from Edinburgh. 
 One day's journey. 
 
 3. TIME. 
 „ Rule XIV. 
 1. J. ime is put in the Abla-63 
 tive, when the question is made 
 by QUANDO, [When] : as, 
 He came at three o'clock. 
 2. When the question is 64 
 made by QUAMJDIU [How 
 long], Time is put in the Ac- 
 cusative or Ablative, but of- 
 tener in the Accusative : as, 
 He staid a few days. 
 He was away six months. 
 Of the Ablative Absolute. 
 \ Rule XV. 
 
 ^L substantive with a Par- 6 5 
 ticiple, whose Case depends 
 upon no other word, are put in 
 the Ablative absolute ; as, 
 The sun rising [or while 
 the sun riseth] darkness 
 flies away. 
 
 Note 2. That humi, militiae, and belli, are also used in the Genitive 
 when the question is made by ubi ? as, procumbit humi, he lies down on 
 the ground ; domi militiaeque undfuimus, we were together both at home 
 and abroad, or in peace and war, Ter. ; bellique domi agitabatur, was ma- 
 naged both in peace and war, Sail. 
 
 Note 3. That when the name of a Town is put in the Genitive, in 
 urbe is understood ; and therefore we cannot say, Katus est Romae urbis 
 nobilis, but urbe nobili. 
 
 These Rules concerning names of Towns may be thus expressed : 
 or at ~) • , C Genitive or Ablative *. 
 
 or unto i ' ih i Accusative. 
 
 _ roni or through j £ Ablative. 
 
 * i. e. When it is of the Third Declension, or of the Plural Number. 
 But when at signifies about or near a place, we make use of the Prepo- 
 sition ad i as, Bellum quod ad Trojam gesserat, Virg. 
 
 Num. 63. and 64. These two Rules may be thus expressed : 
 
 1 . Nouns that denote a precise term of Time are put in the Ablative. 
 
 2. Nouns that denote continuance of Time are put in the Accusative 
 or Ablative. 
 
 The name 
 Tow 
 
 c C in < 
 ime of a ) 
 
 > r n after J r 
 Lfro 
 
 E4 
 
104 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 *Opere ^peracto ludemus. 
 
 Our work being finished 
 [or, when our work is 
 finished] we will play. 
 
 III. The Construction of 
 Words Indeclinable. 
 
 1. of Adverbs. 
 
 1. jTldferbs are joinedto Verbs, 
 Participles, Nouns, and other 
 Adverbs : as, 
 
 He writes well. 
 
 Fighting bravely. 
 
 A servant remarkably faithful. 
 
 Well enough. 
 2. So ?7i e Adverbs of T'wie, 
 Place, and Quantity, govern the 
 Genitive : as, 
 
 The day before that day. 
 
 Every where. 
 
 There's enough of words. 
 3. Some Derivative Ad- 
 
 Ill. Constructio Vocum In- 
 declinabilium. 
 
 1. Adverbiorum. 
 
 66 * 1. xtLdverbia junguntur 
 Verbis, Participiis, Nomini- 
 bus, et aliis Adverbiis : ut, 
 Bene scribit. 
 Fortiter pugnans. 
 Servus egregie f delis. 
 Satis bene. 
 66* 2. Adverbia quaedam tem- 
 poris, loci et quantitatis, 
 regunt Genitivum : ut, 
 z Pridie illius b diei. 
 z Ubique b gentium. 
 a Satis est h verborum. 
 67*3. Quaedam Adverbia de- 
 
 ~Num. 65. Note 1. This Ablative is called Absolute or Independent, 
 because it is not directed or determined by any other word ; for if the 
 Substantive (which is principally to be regarded) hath a Word before 
 that should govern it, or a Verb coming after, to which it should be a 
 Nominative, then the Rule does not take place. 
 
 Note 2. That Having, Being, or a word ending in ing, are the ordi- 
 nary signs of this Ablative. 
 
 Note 5. That (to prevent our mistaking the true Substantive) when 
 
 a Participle Perfect is Englished by Having, we are carefully to advert 
 
 whether it is Passive or Deponent. If it is Passive, we are to change it 
 
 into Being, its true English. If it is Deponent, there needs no change, 
 
 for Having is the proper English of it. The use of this Note will appear 
 
 by the following example ; 
 
 James, having said these things,") T , , , ..^ « 
 
 ■j , D / Jacobus, haec locutus, abut. Dep. 
 
 James, these things being said, ( 
 departed. 
 
 Having promised a great reward. 
 
 A great reward being promised. § Mag7id mercede promissd. Pass. 
 
 Note 4. That when there is no Participle expressed in Latin, existente 
 [being] is understood; as, me puero, I being a boy; Saturno rege, Sa- 
 turn being king ; civitate nondum libera, the state not being yet free. 
 
 Note 5. That the Participle may be resolved into dum, cum, quando, 
 si, postquam, &c. [while, seeing, when, if, after] with the Verb either in 
 English or Latin. 
 
 Jacobus, his dictis, abiit. Pass. 
 7 Pollicitus magnam mercedem. Dep. 
 
Part III.— Chap. I. 
 
 rivata regunt Casum primiti- 
 vorum : ut, 
 
 b Omnium a elegantissime lo- 
 quitur. 
 Vivere a convenienter b natu- 
 rae. 
 
 T ^ 2. PRAErOSITIONUM. 
 
 l.X raepositiones, ad, apud, 
 ante, &c. Accusativum regunt : 
 ut, 
 
 z Ad b patrem. 
 
 2. Praepositiones, a, ah, abs, 
 &c. regunt Ablativum : ut, 
 
 *A b patre. 
 
 3. Praepositiones in, sub, su- 
 per, et subter, regunt Accusa- 
 tivum, cum motus ad locum 
 significatur : ut, 
 
 Eo *in b scholam. 
 z Sub b moenia tendit, Virg. 
 Incidit a super b agmina, Id. 
 Ducit a subter b fastigia tec- 
 
 ti, Id. 
 ^[ At si motus vel quies in 
 loco significetur, in et sub re- 
 gunt Ablativum, super et sub- 
 ter vel Accusativum vel Abla- 
 tivum : ut, 
 
 Sedeo vel discurro z in b scho- 
 
 la. 
 Recubo vel ambulo *sub b um- 
 bra. 
 Sedens a super b arma, Virg. 
 b Fronde a super viridi, Id. 
 Venae a subter b cut em disper- 
 
 sae, Plin. 
 3 Subter b littore, Catull. 
 
 — Of Construction. 105 
 
 verbs govern the Case of their 
 Primitives: as, 
 
 He speaks the most ele- 
 gantly of all. 
 To live agreeably to na- 
 ture. 
 ™ 2. of Prepositions. 
 1. JL he Prepositions ad, a- 6? 
 pud, ante, fyc. govern the Ac- 
 cusative ; as, 
 To the father. 
 
 2. The Prepositions a, ab,69 
 abs, fyc, govern the Ablative : 
 as, 
 
 From the father. 
 
 3. Tlie Prepositionsm, sub,70 
 super, and subter, govern the 
 Accusative, when Motion to a 
 Place is signified : as, 
 
 I go into the school. 
 He goes under the wall. 1 * . 
 It fell upon the troops. 
 He brings [him] under the 
 
 roof of the house. 
 <U But if Motion or Rest in 7 1 
 a Place be signified, in and 
 sub govern the Ablative, su- 
 per and subter either the Ac- 
 cusative or Ablative : as, 
 I sit or run up and down 
 
 in the school. 
 I lie or walk under the 
 
 shadow. 
 Sitting above the arms. 
 Upon the green grass. 
 The veins dispersed under 
 
 the skin. 
 Beneath the shore. 
 
 ^ The Prepositions, with the Cases they govern, are contained in these 
 verses : 
 
 1. Hae quartum adsciscunt casum sibi praepositurae ; 
 Ad, penes, adversum, cis, citra, adversus, et extra. 
 E5 
 
106 
 
 72 4. ^J Praepositio in com- 
 positione eundem saepe ca- 
 sum regit quem extra : ut, 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 4. fl A Preposition oft-times 
 governs the same Case in com- 
 position that it does without it : 
 as, 
 
 Let us go to the school. 
 
 Let us go out of the school. 
 
 z Adeamus h scholam. 
 *Exeamus b schola. 
 
 3. Interjectionum. 
 
 73 * 1. JLnterjectiones, O, 
 heu, et proh, regunt Voca- 
 tivum, interdum Accusati- 
 vum: ut, 
 
 3. of Interjections. 
 
 1. JL he Interjections O, heu, 
 and proh, govern the Vocative, 
 and sometimes the Accusative : 
 as, 
 
 Ultra, post, praeter, juxta, per, pone, secundum, 
 Erga, apud, ante, secus, trans, supra, propter, et intra ; 
 Qiieis addas contra, circum, circa, inter, ob, infra. 
 
 2. Hae sextum poscunt ; A, cum, tenus, abs, ab, et absque, 
 jit que palam, pro, prae, clam, de, e, ex, sine, coram. 
 
 5. Sub, super, in, subter, quartum sextumque requirunt 
 
 Note 1. That versus and usque are put after their Cases; as Italiam 
 versus, towards Italy; oceanum usque, as far as the ocean. But (as we 
 have already observed, p. 75) these are properly Adverbs, the Preposition 
 ad being understood. 
 
 Note 2. That tenus is also put after its Case; as, mento tenus, up to 
 the chin. 
 
 Note 3. That tenus governs the Genitive Plural, 1. When the word 
 wants the Singular ; as, Cumarum tenus, as far as [the town] Cumae. 2 
 When we speak of things of which we have naturally but two ; as, cru- 
 rum tenus, up to the legs. 
 
 Note 4. That a and e are put before Consonants ; ab and ex before 
 Vowels and Consonants ; abs before t and q. 
 
 Note 5. That subter hath very rarely the Ablative, and only among 
 Poets. 
 
 Note 6. That in English, in is commonly the sign of the Ablative ; 
 into of the Accusative. 
 
 Note 7. In for erga, contra, per, supra, ad, &c. governs the Accusative ; 
 as, Amor in patriam. Quid ego in ie commisi ? Crescit in dies singulos. 
 Imperium regum in proprios greges, Horat Pisces in coenam enipti. 
 But in for inter governs the Ablative ; as, in amicis habere, Sallust. 
 
 Sub for circa governs the Accusative ; as, sub coenam. 
 
 Super for ultra, praeter, and inter, governs the Accusative ; as, Super 
 Ga7'amantas,\"ivg. Super grati am suam, Sallust. In sermone super coenam 
 nato, Suet. For de, it governs the Ablative ; as, Super hac re nimis, Cic. 
 
 Num. 72. Note, That this Rule onry takes place when the Preposi- 
 tion may be dissolved from the Verb, and put before the Case by itself; 
 as, alloquor patrem, i. e. loquor ad patrem. And even then, the Prepo- 
 sition is frequently repeated ; as, cxire e finibus suis, Caes. 
 
Part III.— Chap. /.- 
 
 a formose h puer ! 
 *Hea b 7ne miserumJ 
 
 * 2. Hei et Vae regunt Da- 
 tivum : ut, 
 z Hei h mihi! 
 a Vae b vobis ! 
 
 ^ 4. CoNJUNCTIONUM. 
 *l.VyONJUNCTIONES, et, ac, at^ 
 que, nee, neque, aut, vel, et 
 quaedam aliae, connectunt si- 
 miles Casus et Modos : ut, 
 Honor a b patrem *et b ma- 
 
 trem. 
 Nee b scribit z nec b legit. 
 
 * 2. Ut, quo, licet, ne, utinam, 
 et dummodo, Subjunctivo Mo- 
 do fere semper adhaerent : ut, 
 
 Lego a ut b discam. 
 a Utinam b saperes. 
 
 -Of Construction. 
 O fair boy ! 
 Ah wretch that I am ! 
 
 107 
 
 2. Hei and Vae govern the 74 
 Dative : as, 
 Ah me ! 
 Wo to you ! 
 
 T< 
 
 4. of Conjunctions. 
 
 1. JL he Conjunctions, et, ac,75 
 atque, nee, neque, aut, vel, 
 and some others, couple like 
 Cases and Moods : as, 
 Honour your father and 
 
 mother. 
 He neither writes nor 
 reads. 
 
 2. Ut, quo, licet, ne, uti-76 
 nam, and dummodo, are for 
 the most part joined with the 
 Subjunctive Mood : as, 
 
 I read that I may learn. 
 
 I wish you were wise. 
 
 Num. 75. To these add quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, and Adverbs of 
 Likeness. The reason of this Construction is, because the words so cou- 
 pled depend all upon the same word, which is expressed to one of them? 
 and understood to the other. 
 
 Num. 76. To these add all Indefinite words, that is, Interrogatives, 
 whether Nouns, Pronouns, Adverbs, or Conjunctions, when taken in a 
 doubtful or indefinite sense ; such as, Quis, uter, quantus, &c. Ubi, quo. 
 unde, &c. Cur, quare, quamobrem, num, an, anne, &c. [See p. 75. and 
 78.] They generally become Indefinites, when another word comes before 
 them in the sentence; such as, scio, nescio, video, intelligo, dabito, and 
 the like ; as, Ubi est jrater tuus ? Nescio ubi sit. An venturus est t 
 Dubito an venturus sit. 
 
 Ne, the Adverb of Forbidding, requires the Imperative or Subjunctive; 
 as, Ne time, or Ne timeas. See p. 55. 
 
 Dum, quum, quod, si, ni, sin, nisi, etsi, etiamsi, priusquam, simulac, 
 siquidem, quandoquidem, &c. are joined sometimes with the Indicative, 
 and sometimes with the Subjunctive. 
 
 Ee 
 
108 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 SYNTAXEOS 
 
 SYNOPSIS; 
 
 S1VE, 
 
 Genuinae et maxime necessariae 
 Constructionis Regulae, ad 
 quas caeterae omnes reducun- 
 tur. 
 
 AXIOM AT A. 
 
 I. Otans Oratio constat ex 
 Nomine et Verbo. 
 
 II. Omnis Nominativus ha- 
 bet suum Verbum expressum 
 vel suppressum. 
 
 III. Omne verbum finitum 
 nabet suum Norninativum ex- 
 pressum vel suppressum. 
 
 IV. Omne Adjectivum habet 
 suum Substantivum expressum 
 vel suppressum. 
 
 Sex Casuum Construction 
 
 I. Omne Verbum finitum, ex- 
 pressum vel suppressum, con- 
 cordat cum Nominativo, ex- 
 presso vel suppresso, in Nume- 
 ro et Persona : ut, 
 
 Puer legit, 
 
 ^Homines] ainnt. 
 
 Romani [coeperunt] festi- 
 
 A SUMMARY OF 
 
 SYNTAX; 
 
 OR, 
 
 The true and most necessary 
 Rules of Construction, to 
 which all the rest are re- 
 duced. 
 
 First PRINCIPLES. 
 
 I. Evert Speech [or Sen- 
 tence] consists of a Noun and a 
 Verb. 
 
 II. Every Nominative hath 
 its oiun Verb expressed or un- 
 derstood. 
 
 III. Every Finite Verb hath 
 its own Nominative expressed 
 or understood. 
 
 IV. Every Adjective hath its 
 own Substantive expressed or 
 understood. 
 
 The Construction of the Six 
 
 Cases. 
 I. Every Verb of the Finite 
 Mood, expressed or understood, 
 agrees with its Nominative, ex- 
 pressed or understood, in Num- 
 ber and Person : as, 
 
 The boy reads. 
 
 They say. 
 
 The Romans made haste. 
 
Part. III.— Chap. L 
 
 II. Omnis Genitivus regitur 
 a Substantivo expresso vel sup- 
 presso : ut, 
 
 Liber fratris. 
 
 Est [officium] patris. 
 
 III. Dativus Acquisitionis, 
 i. e. cui aliquid acquiritur vel 
 adimitur, cuivis Nomini aut 
 Verbo expresso vel suppresso 
 jungitur: ut, 
 
 Dedi Petro. 
 Cui dedisti ? 
 
 [Dedi] Petro 
 Utilis hello. 
 Non est [aptus] solvendo. 
 
 IV. Omnis Accusativus re- 
 gitur a Verbo activo, vel* Prae- 
 positione, expressis vel suppres- 
 sis : ut, 
 
 Amo Deum ; 
 
 et [amo] parentes. 
 Ad patrem. 
 Abiit [ad] Londinum. 
 ^f Aut Infmitivo praeponitur 
 expressus vel suppressus : ut, 
 Dicit se scribere. 
 Licet mihi [me] esse bonum. 
 
 V. Omnis Vocativus abso- 
 lute ponitur, addita nonnun- 
 quam Interjectione : ut, 
 
 Dave. 
 Heus, Syre. 
 
 VI. Omnis Ablativus regi- 
 tur a* Praepositione expressa 
 vel suppressa : ut, 
 
 A puero. 
 
 Exultat [prae] gaudio. 
 
 — Of Construction. 1 09 
 
 II. Every Genitive is govern- 
 ed by a Substantive expressed 
 or understood : as, 
 
 The book of my brother. 
 It is the duty of a father. 
 
 III. The Dative of Acquisi- 
 tion, i. e. to which any Thing 
 is acquired, or from which it is 
 taken, is joined to any Noun or 
 Verb expressed or understood: as, 
 
 I gave it to Peter. 
 
 To whom did you give it ? 
 
 To Peter. 
 Profitable for war. 
 He is not able to pay. 
 
 IV. Every Accusative is go- 
 verned by an Active Verb, or a 
 * Preposition expressed or un- 
 derstood: as, 
 
 I love God; 
 
 and my parents. 
 To the father. 
 He hath gone to London. 
 ^[ Or is put before the Infini- 
 tive expressed or understood: as, 
 He says that he is writing. 
 I may be good. 
 
 V. Every Vocative is placed 
 absolutely, the Interjection O be- 
 ing sometimes added : as, 
 
 O Davus. 
 
 Come hither, Syrus. 
 
 VI. Every Ablative is go- 
 verned by a * Preposition ex- 
 pressed or understood : as, 
 
 From a child. 
 He leaps for joy. 
 
 * See Page 75. and Larger Syntax, Page 105, and 1GG. 
 
110 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 I* vJmne Adjectivum con- 
 cordat cum Substantivo ex- 
 presso vel suppresso, in Gene- 
 re, Numero, et Casu : ut, 
 
 Bonus vir. 
 
 Triste [negotium]. 
 
 II. Substantiva significantia 
 eandem rem conveniunt in Ca- 
 su : ut, 
 
 Dominus Deus. 
 
 III. Omnis Infinitivus regi- 
 tur a Verbo vel Nomine ex- 
 pressis vel suppressis : ut, 
 
 Cupio discere. 
 Dignus amari. 
 Populus [coepit] mirari. 
 
 I. JlL very Adjective agrees 
 with a Substantive, expressed or 
 understood, in Gender, Number, 
 and Case : as, 
 
 A good man. 
 
 A sad thing. 
 
 II. Substantives signifying the 
 same Thing agree in Case : as, 
 
 The Lord God. 
 
 III. Every Infinitive is go- 
 verned by a Verb or Noun ex- 
 pressed or understood : as, 
 
 I desire to learn. 
 Worthy to be loved. 
 The people wondered. 
 
 EXPLANATION. 
 
 All Construction is either TRUE or APPARENT, or (as Gramma- 
 rians express ife) JUST or FIGURATIVE. — TRUE Construction is 
 founded upon-the essential properties of Words, and is almost the same 
 in all languages. APPARENT Construction entirely depends upon 
 Custom, which, either for elegance or dispatch, leaves out a great many 
 words otherwise necessary to make a sentence perfectly full and gramma- 
 tical. — The first is comprised in these few Fundamental Rules, and more 
 fully branched out in the Larger Syntax. The other is also interspersed 
 through the Larger Syntax, but distinguished from that which is True by 
 an Asterisk. 
 
 The Cases mentioned in the Rules of the Larger Syntax immediately 
 discover the Rules of this Summary to which they respectively belong: those 
 that are True, without any Ellipsis ; those that are Figurative, by having 
 their Ellipsis supplied as follows, as they are numbered in the margin. 
 
 To Rule II. are reduced Num. 15. supple negotium. Num. 14. and 47. 
 sup. de causa, gratia, or in re, negotio. Num. 15. sup. e numero. Num. 
 21. sup. de negotio. Num. 22. and 25. sup, officium, negotium, &c. Num. 
 24. sup. 1. de causa, &c. ; 2. sat, taken from the Verb. Num. 29. sup. 
 memoriam, notitiam, verba, &c. Num. 50. sup. de crimine, poena, &c. 
 Num. 55. and 56. sup. pro re, or pretio aeris. Num. 40. sup. inter nego- 
 tia, and res [fert] se ad negotia. Num. 42. sup. res, negotium, &c. Num. 
 56. sup. in urbe. Num. 60. domi, sup. in aedibus. Num. 66. these Ad- 
 verbs seem to be taken for Substantive Nouns. 
 
 To RULE III. is reduced Num. 75. sup. malum est ; or these Inter- 
 actions are used as Substantives. 
 
Part HI.— Chap. IL— Of Resolution. Ill 
 
 To RULE IV. belong Num. 18. 55. and 62. sup. ad. Num. 55. sup. 
 quod ad. Num. 41. i. e. Est inter mea negotia ; Refert [or res feri] 
 se ad mea negotia, &c. Num. 58. sup. ad or in. Num. 64. sup. per. 
 Num. 73. sup. sentio, lugeo, &c. 
 
 To RULE VI. belong Num. 12. sup. e, ex, cum, &c. Num. 19. sup. 
 prae. Num. 20. sup. de, e, or, cum, &c. Num. 21. sup. a, ab, &c. 
 Num. 54. sup. pro. Num. 57. 58. sup. a, abs, de, e, ex Num. 51. and 
 55. sup. prac, cum, a, ab, e, ex, &c. Num. 54. sup. in orde. Num. 57, 
 sup. in. Num. 59. sup. a, ab, e, ex. Num. 62. sup. in. Num. 64. sup. 
 in or pro. Num. 65. sup. sm&, cum, a, a b. 
 
 Note 1. That under Verbs must also be comprehended Participles, 
 Gerunds, and Supines, because the general signification of Verb is includ- 
 ed in them. 
 
 Note 2. That as a consequence of this, a learned grammarian inge- 
 niously supposes, that the Dative and Infinitive are always governed by a 
 Verb ; and that when they seem to be governed by a Noun, the Partici- 
 ple existent is understood : ut, Utilis [existens~\ bello. Pollio praesidium 
 [existens] reis. Dignus [existens] amari. 
 
 Note 5. That the Vocative is properly no part of a sentence, but the 
 case by which we excite one to hear or execute what we say. Therefore 
 when the Vocative is put before the Imperative, as frequently happens, 
 the Nominate TU or VOS is understood; and that even though these 
 words be already expressed in the Vocative : as, Tw, Jacobe, lege ; i. e. 
 tu Jacobe, tu lege. 
 
 Note 4. That the Vocative is sufficient to itself, and does not necessa- 
 rily require the Interjection 0. See Vossius, lib. vii. cap. 69. and Sanc- 
 tius, lib. iv. De Ellipsi Verb. Audio et Narro. 
 
 CHAP. IL 
 _ OF EXPOSITION or RESOLUTION. 
 
 IMPOSITION or RESOLUTION is the unfolding of a Sentence, 
 and placing all the parts of it, whether expressed or understood, in their 
 proper order, that the true sense and meaning of it may appear. 
 1. A SENTENCE is either Simple or Compound. 
 
 1. A SIMPLE Sentence is that which hath one Finite Verb in it. 
 
 2. A COMPOUND Sentence is that which hath two or more such 
 verbs in it joined together bv some Couples. 
 
 These COUPLES are of four sorts. 1. The Relative QUI. 2. Some 
 Comparative words : such as, tantus, quantus ; talis, qualis ; tam,qudm, 
 &c. . 5. Indefinite words, [See Page 78. and 107.] 4. Conjunctions. 
 
 In a Simple Sentence there are two things to be considered, — 1. Its 
 Essential. 2. Its Accidental parts. 
 
 1. The Essential parts of a Sentence are a Nominative and a Verb. 
 
 2. The Accidental parts are of four kinds ; 1. Such as excite Attention ; 
 as the Vocative and exciting Particles : as, 0, en, ecce, heus, &c. 2. Such as 
 serve to introduce a sentence, or to show its dependence upon what was said 
 before ; as, Jam, kactcnus, quandoquidem, cum, dum, interea, &c. 3. Such as 
 limit the general and indefinite signification either of the Nominative or 
 Verb ; and these are Substantive Nouns. 4. Such as qualify and explain 
 them, viz. Adjectives, Adverbs, and Prepositions, with their Cases. Some- 
 
112 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, fyc. 
 
 times a part of a compound sentence supplies the place of those- two last 
 kinds of words. 
 
 II. The ORDER of words in a sentence is eitherNatural or Artificial. 
 
 1 . NATURAL Order is when the words of a sentence naturally follow 
 one after another, in the same order with the conceptions of our minds. 
 
 2. ARTIFICIAL Order is when words are so ranged as to render them 
 most agreeable to the ear ; but so as the sense be not thereby obscured. 
 
 III. A Sentence may be resolved from the Artificial into the Natural 
 order, by the following rules : 
 
 1. Take the Vocative, Exciting, and Introductory words, where they 
 are found. 
 
 2. The NOMINATIVE. 
 
 3. Words limiting or explaining it ; i. e. Words agreeing with or go- 
 verned by it, or by one another successively (till you come to the Verb), 
 where thev are found. 
 
 4. The* VERB. 
 
 5. Words limiting or explaining it, <£c. where they are found, to the 
 end of the sentence. 
 
 6. Supply every where the words that are understood. 
 
 7. If the sentence is compound, take the parts of it severally as they 
 depend upon one another, proceeding with each of them as above. 
 
 Example. — Vale igitur, mi Cicero, tibique persuade esse te quidem 
 mihi carissimum ; sed multofore cariorem, si talibus monumentis prae- 
 ceptisque laetabere. Cic. Off lib. 5. 
 
 Farewell then, my [son] Cicero, and assure yourself that you are indeed 
 very dear unto me ; but shall be much dearer, if you shall take delight in 
 such writings and instructions. 
 
 This Compound Sentence is resolved into these five Simple Sentences, 
 
 1. Igitur mi [fili] Cicero, [tu] vale, 2. et [tu] persuade tibi te esse 
 quidem carissimum [filium] mihi ; 3. sed [tu persuade tibi te~\fore cario- 
 rem [filium mihi in] multo [negotio], 4. si [tu] laetabere talibus monu- 
 mentis, 5. et [si tu laetabere talibus] jiraecepiis. 
 
 Note 1. That Interrogative words stand always first in a Sentence, un- 
 less a Preposition comes before them. 
 
 Note 2. That Negative words stand immediately before the Verb. 
 
 Note 3. That Relatives are placed before the word by which they are 
 governed, unless it is a Preposition. 
 
 Note 4. That the Subjunctive Mood is used in Compound Sentences. 
 
 Note 5. That the parts of a Compound Sentence are separated from 
 one another by these marks called INTERPUNCTIONS. 1. Those 
 that are smaller, named Clauses, by this mark (,) called a Comma. 2. 
 Those that are greater, named Members, by this mark ( : ) called Colon, 
 or this (;) called a Semicolon. 3. When a sentence is thrown in that 
 hath little or no connection with the rest, it is inclosed within what we call 
 a Parenthesis, marked thus (). 
 
 . But when the Sentence, whether Simple or Compound, is fully ended, 
 if it is a plain Affirmation or Negation, it is inclosed with this mark (.) 
 called a Point : If a question is asked, with this mark (?) called a Point 
 of Interrogation : If Wonder, or some other sudden Passion, is signified, 
 with this mark (!) called a Point of Admiration. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
PRIMA 
 MORUM ET PIETATIS 
 
 PRAECEPTA, 
 
 I. Dicta septem Sapientum e Graecis. 
 
 II. Gulielmi Lilii Monita Paedagogica. 
 
 III. Dion. Catonis Disticha Moralia. 
 
 IV. Joan. Sulpitii Verulani de Moribus et Civilitate Puerorum 
 
 Carmen. 
 
 V. Rudimenta Pietatis; sive, Oratio Dominica, Symbolum Aposto- 
 
 licum, et Decalogus : item, Duorum Sacramentorum, Baptis- 
 mi et Sacrae Coenae Domini, Institutiones. 
 
 QUIBUS ACCESSIT 
 
 Summula CATECHISMI ad piam Juniorum Educationem 
 apprime utilis; 
 
 Praecipna Capita Christianae Religionis, desumpta e Sacra Scriptura 
 Veteris ac Novi Testamenti. 
 
 Timor Domini initium sapientiae est. Prov. i. 7. 
 
 Pietas ad omnia utilis est, promissiones habens et praesentis et futurae 
 
 vitae. 1 Tim. iv. 8. 
 
DICTA SAPIENTUM E GRAECIS, 
 
 D. ERASMO ROTEROD. Interpreter 
 
 Aurea dicta, puer, quae sunt hie, mente reconde : 
 Hinc poteris magna commoditate frui. 
 
 DICTA PERIANDRI CORINTHII. 
 
 Omnibus placeto. 
 Bona res quies. 
 Periculosa temeritas. 
 Semper voluptates sunt mor- 
 
 tales : 
 Honores autem immortales. 
 Amicis adversa fortuna uten- 
 
 tibus idem esto. 
 Lucrum turpe, res pessima. 
 Quicquid promiseris, facito. 
 Infortunium tuum celato, ne 
 
 voluptate afficias inimicos. 
 Veritati adhaereto. 
 Age quae justa sunt. 
 Violentiam oderis. 
 Principibus cede. 
 Voluptati tempera. 
 A jurejurando abstine. 
 Pietatem sectare. 
 Laudato honesta. 
 A vitiis abstine. 
 Beneficium repende. 
 Supplicibus misericors esto. 
 Liberos instrue. 
 
 Mortalia cogita. 
 
 Ne prior injuriam facias. 
 
 Audi quae ad te pertinent. 
 
 Probrum fugito. 
 
 Responde in tempore. 
 
 Ea facito quorum te non possit 
 
 poenitere. 
 Ne cui invideas. 
 Oculis moderare. 
 Quod justum est imitare. 
 Bene meritos honora. 
 Spem fove. 
 Calumniam oderis. 
 Affabilis esto. 
 
 Cum erraris, muta consilium. 
 Concordiam sectare. 
 Diuturnam amicitiam custodi. 
 Magistratus metue. 
 Omnibus teipsum praebe. 
 Ne loquaris ad gratiam. 
 Ne tempori credideris. 
 Teipsum ne negligas. 
 Senior em r ever ere. 
 Mortem oppete pro patria. 
 
 Sapientum utere consuetudine. Ne quavis de re doleas. 
 
 Litem oderis. 
 
 Bonos in pretio habeto. 
 
 Arcanum cela. 
 
 Cede magnis. 
 
 Opportunitatem exspectato. 
 
 Ex ingenuis liberos crea. 
 Sperato tanquam mortalis : 
 Parcere tanquam immortalis 
 Ne efferaris gloria. 
 Largire cum utilitate. 
 
Dicta Sapientum. 3 
 
 Amicis utere. Dilige amicos. 
 
 Mortuum ne irrideto. Consule inculpate. 
 
 DICTA BIANTIS PRIENENSIS. 
 In speculo teipsum contempla- Quid sit autem ausculta. 
 
 re, et si formosus apparebis, Prius autem intellige ; et dein- 
 
 age quae deceant formam : de ad opus accede. 
 
 sin deformis, quod in facie Ne ob divitias laudaris virum 
 
 minus est, vel deest, id mo- indignum. 
 
 rum pensato pulchritudine. Persuasione cape, non vi. 
 Audito multa : Compara in adolescentia qui- 
 
 Loquere pauca. dem modestiam, in senectu- 
 
 De Numine ne male loquaris : te verd prudentiam. 
 
 DICTA PITTA CI MITYLENAEI. 
 (aCUM facturus es, ea ne dixe- Infortunatum ne irriseris. 
 
 ris: frustratus enim rideberis. Audito libenter. 
 Depositum redde. Ne lingua praecurrat mentem. 
 
 Desidiosus ne esto. Ne festines loqui. 
 
 A familiaribus in minutis rebus Nosce teipsum. 
 
 laesus, feras. Legibus pare. 
 
 Amico ne maledixeris. Voluptatem coerce. 
 
 Inimicum ne putes amicum. Ne quid nimis. 
 Uxori dominare [Christiane]. Inimicitiam solve. 
 Quae feceris parentibus^ eadem Ante omnia venerare Numen. 
 
 a liberis exspecta. Parentes reverere. 
 
 Inter amicos ne fueris judex. Quae fieri non possunt, cave 
 Ne contende cum parentibus, concupiscas. 
 
 etiamsi justa dixeris. Uxorem ducito ex aequalibus ; 
 
 Ne geras imperium, priusquam ne, si ex ditioribus duxeris, 
 
 parere didiceris. dominos tibi pares, non af- 
 
 fines. 
 
 DICTA CLEOBULI LINDII. 
 
 A e sis unquam elatus. Suspicionem abjicito. 
 
 Domus curam age. Parentes patientia vince. 
 
 Libros evolve. Beneficii accepti memento. 
 
 Juste judicato. Inferiorem ne rejicias. 
 
 Bonis benefacito. Aliena ne concupiscas. 
 
 Liberos tibi charissimos erudi. Ne teipsum praecipites in dis- 
 A maledicentia temperato. crimen. 
 
4? Dicta Sapient mn. 
 
 Res amici diligas, ac perinde Citius ad infortunatos amicos, 
 
 serves ut tuas. quam ad fortunatos, proficis- 
 
 Lapis auri index, aurum ho- cere. 
 
 minum. Mendax calumnia vitam cor- 
 
 Quod oderis, alteri ne feceris. rumpit. 
 Voto nihil pretiosius. Mendaces odit quisque prudens 
 
 Ne cui miniteris ; est enim et sapiens. 
 
 muliebre. 
 
 DICTA CHILONIS LACEDAEMONII. 
 
 ^N o s c e teipsum. Sapientia utere. 
 
 Ne cui invideas mortalia. Multitudini place. 
 
 Temperantiam exerce. Oderis calumnias. 
 
 Turpia fuge. Ne quid suspiceris. 
 
 Tempori parce. Moribus probatis esto, 
 
 Juste rem para. Ne fueris onerosus. 
 
 DICTA SOLONIS ATHENIENSIS. 
 Deum cole. Legibus pareto. 
 
 Parentes reverere. Cogita quod justum est. 
 
 Amicis succurre. Iracundiae moderare. 
 
 Veritatem sustineto. Virtutem laudato. 
 
 Ne jurato. Malos odio prosequitor. 
 
 DICTA THALETIS MILESIL 
 
 x eincipem honora. Gloriam sectare. 
 
 Amicos probato. Vitae curam age. 
 
 Similis tui sis. Pacem dilige. 
 
 Nemini promittito/ Laudatus esto apud omnes. 
 
 Quod adest boni consulito. Susurronem ex aedibus ejice. 
 
 A vitiis abstineto. 
 
 GULIELMI LILII MON1TA PAEDAGOGICA; 
 
 SIVE, CARMEN DE MORIBUS AD SUOS DISCIPULOS. 
 
 W,u i mihi discipulus, puer, es, cupis atque doceri, 
 
 Hue ades, haec animo concipe dicta tuo. 
 Mane citus lectum fuge, mollem discute somnum ; 
 
 Templa petas supplex, et venerare Deum. 
 Attamen in primis facies sit lota manusque ; 
 
 Sint nitidae vestes, comptaque caesaries. 
 Desidiam fugiens, cum te schola nostra vocarit, 
 
 Adsis ; nulla pigrae sit tibi causa morae. 
 
GuL Lilii Carmen De Moribus. 
 Me praeceptorem cum videris, ore saluta, 
 
 Et condiscipulos ordine quosque tuos. 
 Tu quoque fac sedeas, ubi te sedisse jubemus : 
 
 Inque loco, nisi sis jussus abire, mane. 
 Ac magis ut quisque est doctrinae munere clarus, 
 
 Hoc magis is clara sede locandus erit. 
 Scalpellum, calami, atramentum, charta, libelli, 
 
 Sint semper studiis arma parata tuis. 
 Si quid dictabo, scribes ; at singula recte : 
 
 Nee macula, aut scriptis menda sit ulla tuis. 
 Sed tua nee laceris dictata aut carmina chartis 
 
 Mandes, quae libris inseruisse decet. 
 Saepe recognoscas tibi lecta, animoque revolvas : 
 
 Si dubites, nunc hos consule, nunc alios. 
 Qui dubitat, qui saepe rogat, mea dicta tenebit ; 
 
 Is qui nil dubitat, nil capit inde boni. 
 Disce, puer, quaeso ; noli dediscere quidquam : 
 
 Ne mens te insimulet conscia desidiae. 
 Sisque animo attentus : quid enim docuisse juvabit, 
 
 Si mea non firmo pectore verba premas ? 
 Nil tarn difficile est, quod non solertia vincat : 
 
 Invigila, et parta est gloria militiae. 
 Nam veluti flores tellus, nee semina profert, 
 
 Ni sit continuo victa labore manus : 
 Sic puer, ingenium si non exercitet, ipsum 
 
 Tempus et amittit, spem simul ingenii. 
 Est etiam semper lex in sermone tenenda, 
 
 Ne nos offendat improba garrulitas. 
 Incumbens studio, submissa voce loqueris ; 
 
 Nobis dum reddis, voce canorus eris. 
 Et quaecunque mihi reddes, discantur ad unguem ~ 9 
 
 Singula et abjecto verbula redde libro. 
 Nee verbum quisquam dicturo suggerat ullum ; 
 
 Quod puero exitium non mediocre park. 
 Si quicquam rogito, sic respondere studebis, 
 
 Ut laudem dictis et mereare decus. 
 Non lingua celeri nimis, aut laudabere tarda ; 
 
 Est virtus medium, quod tenuisse juvat. 
 Et quoties loqueris, memor esto loquare Latine ; 
 
 Et veluti scopulos barbara verba fuge. 
 Praeterea socios, quoties te cunque rogabunt, 
 
 Instrue ; et ignaros ad mea vota trahe. 
 
6 Qui. Lilii Carmen De Morions. 
 
 Qui docet indoctos, licet indoctissimus esset, 
 
 Ipse brevi reliquis doctior esse queat. 
 Sed tu nee stolidos imitabere Grammaticastros, 
 
 Ingens Romani dedecus eloquii : 
 Quorum tarn fatuus nemo, aut tarn barbarus ore est, 
 
 Quern non auctorem barbara turba probet. 
 Grammaticas recte si vis cognoscere leges, 
 
 Discere si cupias cultius ore loqui : 
 Addiscas veterum clarissima scripta virorum, 
 
 Et quos auctores turba Latina docet. 
 Nunc te Virgilius, nunc ipse Terentius optat, 
 
 Nunc simul amplecti te Ciceronis opus : 
 Quos qui non didicit, nil praeter somnia vidit, 
 
 Certat et in tenebris vivere Cimmeriis. 
 Sunt quos delectat (studio virtutis honestae 
 
 Posthabito) nugis tempora conterere : 
 Sunt quibus est cordi, manibus, pedibusve sodales, 
 
 Aut alio quovis solicitare modo : 
 Est alius, qui se dum clarum sanguine jactat, 
 
 Insulso reliquis improbat ore genus. 
 Te tarn prava sequi nolim vestigia morum : 
 
 Ne tandem factis praemia digna feras. 
 Nil dabis, aut vendes, nil permutabis emesve, 
 
 Ex damno alterius commoda nulla feres. 
 Insuper et nummos, irritamenta malorum, 
 
 Mitte aliis ; puerum nil nisi pura decent. 
 Clamor, rixa, joci, mendacia, furta, cachinni, 
 
 Sint procul a vobis ; Martis et arma procul. 
 Nil penitus dices, quod turpe aut non sit honestum * 
 
 Est vitae ac pariter janua lingua necis. 
 Ingens crede nefas cuiquam maledicta referre, 
 
 Jurare aut magni nomina sacra Dei. 
 Denique servabis res omnes atque libellos, 
 
 Et tecum, quoties isque redisque, feres. 
 Effuge vel causas faciunt quaecunque nocentem, 
 
 In quibus et nobis displicuisse potes. 
 
DIONYSIl CATONIS 
 
 DISTICHA DE MOEIBUS, AD FILIUM I 
 
 Recognita de novo ad Metaphrasin Jos. Scaligeri, ejusdemque 
 D. Erasmi, P. Scriverii, et M. Zuer. Boxhornii Kotas et 
 Castigationes, a T. R. 
 
 IN USUM SCHOLARUM. 
 
 Illis quae cecinit Themis aut Thymbraeus Apollo, 
 Non canit hicce catus deteriora Cato. 
 
 Praefatio cum brevissimzs Praeceptis. 
 (xuum animadverterem quam plurimos homines graviter er- 
 rare in via morum, succurrendum et consulendum eorum opin- 
 ion! existimavi, maxime ut gloriose viverent, et honorem con- 
 tingerent. Nunc te (fili charissime) docebo, quo pacto mores 
 animi tui componas. Igitui- praecepta mea ita legito, ut in- 
 telligas : Legere enim, et non intelligere, negligere est. 
 
 Xtaque Deo supplica. Mutuum dato. 
 
 Parentes ama. 
 
 Cognatos cole. 
 
 Magistrum metue. 
 
 Datum serva. 
 
 Foro te para. 
 
 Cum bonis ambula. 
 
 Ad consilium ne accesseris, 
 
 antequam voceris. 
 Mundus esto. 
 Saluta libenter. 
 Majori cede. 
 Minori parce. 
 Rem tuam custodi. 
 Verecundiam serva 
 Diligentiam adhibe. 
 Libros lege. 
 
 Quae legeris memento. . 
 Familiam cura. 
 Blandus esto. 
 Irasci ab re noli. 
 Neminem irriseris. 
 Miserum ne irriseris. 
 
 Cui des videto. 
 
 In judicium adesto. 
 
 Conjugem ama. 
 
 Liberos erudi. 
 
 Patere legem quam ipse tule- 
 
 ris. 
 Pauca in convivio loquere. 
 Convivare raro. 
 Quod satis est dormi. 
 Jusjurandum serva. 
 Vino te tempera. 
 Pugna pro patria. 
 Nil temere credideris. 
 Tu te consule. 
 Meretricem fuge. 
 Liter as disce. 
 Nihil mentiri debes. 
 Bonis benefacito. 
 Maledicus ne esto. 
 Existimationem retine. 
 Aequum judica. 
 Parentes patientia vince. 
 
8 Lib. DisticJwrum Catonis 
 
 Beneficii accepti memor esto. Aleas fuge. 
 
 Ad praetorium stato. Nihil ex arbitrio virium feceris. 
 
 Consultus esto. Minorem te ne contempseris. 
 
 Utere virtute. Aliena concupiscere noli. 
 
 Iracundiam tempera. Illud stude quod justum est. 
 
 Trocho lude. Amorem libenter ferto. 
 
 DISTICHORUM DE MORIBUS 
 
 LIBER I. 
 
 Dei cultus praecipuus. 
 !Si Deus est animus, nobis ut carmina dicunt, 
 Hie tibi praecipue sit pura mente colendus. 
 
 Somnolentia vitanda. 
 Plus vigila semper, nee somno deditus esto : 
 Nam diuturna quies vitiis alimenta ministrat. 
 
 Cohibenda lingua. 
 Virtutem primam esse puta, compescere linguam ; 
 Proximus ille Deo, qui scit ratione tacere. 
 
 Sibi ipsi conveniendum. 
 Sperne repugnando tibi tu contrarius esse : 
 Conveniet nulli qui secum dissidet ipse. 
 
 Nemo temere culpandus. 
 Si vitam inspicias hominum, si denique mores, 
 Cum culpas alios, nemo sine crimine vivit. 
 
 Utilitas clivitiis anteponenda. 
 Quae nocitura tenes, quamvis sint chara, relinque : 
 Utilitas opibus praeponi tempore debet. 
 
 Mores pro tempore mutandi. 
 
 Et *levis et constans, ut res expostulat, esto : *al. Con. 
 
 Temporibus mores sapiens sine crimine mutat. s * aas aut * e 
 
 Uxori non semper assentiendum. > 7 P &' 
 
 __.. v * . , . j . nante metro 
 
 Nil temere uxon de serves crede querenti : 
 
 Saepe etenim mulier, quern conjux diligit, odit. 
 
 Instandum correctioni amici. 
 Cumque mones aliquem, nee se velit ipse moneri, 
 Si tibi sit charus, noli desistere coeptis. 
 
 Stulti verbis non vincuntur. 
 Contra verbosos noli contendere verbis : 
 Sermo datur cunctis, animi sapientia paucis. 
 
 Amicus sibi quisque primus. 
 Dilige sic alios, ut sis tibi charus amicus, 
 Sic bonus esto bonis, ne te mala damna sequantur 
 
Distichorum Catonis Lib. I. 
 
 Rumores spargere vetitum. 
 Rumores fuge, ne incipias novus auctor haberi : 
 Nam nulli tacuisse nocet, nocet esse locutum. 
 
 Fides aliena non promittenda. 
 Rem tibi promissam certo promittere noli : 
 Rara fides ideo est, quia multi multa loquuntur. 
 
 Judex quisque sit sui. 
 Cum te aliquis laudat, judex tuus esse memento : 
 Plus aliis de te, quam tu tibi credere noli. 
 
 Beneficiorum ratio. 
 Officium alterius multis narrare memento : 
 Atque aliis cum tu benefeceris, ipse sileto. 
 
 Senio bene gesta referenda. 
 Multorum cum facta senex et dicta recenses, 
 Fac tibi succurrant, juvenis quae feceris ipse. 
 
 Suspicionis labes. 
 Ne cures si quis tacito sermone loquatur : 
 Conscius ipse sibi de se putat omnia dici. 
 
 In prosperis de adversis cogitandum. 
 Cum fueris felix, quae sunt adversa caveto : 
 Non eodem cursu respondent ultima primis. 
 
 Mors alterius non speranda. 
 Cum dubia et fragilis sit nobis vita tributa, 
 In morte alterius spem tu tibi ponere noli. 
 
 Animus in dorio aestimandus. 
 Exiguum munus cum dat tibi pauper amicus, 
 Accipito placide, plene et laudare memento. 
 
 Paupertas toleranda. 
 Infantem nudum cum te natura crearit, 
 Paupertatis onus patienter ferre memento. 
 
 Mors non formidanda. 
 Ne timeas illam, quae vitae est ultima finis : 
 Qui mortem metuit, quod vivit perdit id ipsum. 
 
 Amicorum ingratitudo fugienda. 
 Si tibi pro meritis nemo respondet amicus, 
 Incusare Deum noli, sed te ipse coerce. 
 
 Frugalitas. 
 Ne tibi quid desit, quaesitis utere parce : 
 Utque quod est serves, semper tibi deesse putato, 
 
 Promissio iterata molesta. 
 Quod praestare potes, ne bis promiseris ulli : 
 Ne sis ventosus, dum vis bonus ipse videri. 
 
 Ars arte deludenda. 
 Qui simulat verbis, nee corde est fidus amicus, 
 Tu quoque fac simile ; sic ars deluditur arte. 
 
 F 
 
10 Distickorum Catonis Lib, I. 
 
 Blandiloquentia suspecta. 
 Noli homines blando nimium sermone probare : 
 Fistula dulce canit, volucrem dum decipit auceps. 
 
 Liberi artibus instruendi. 
 Cum tibi sint nati, nee opes ; tunc artibus illos 
 Instrue, quo possint inopem defendere vitam. 
 
 Res quomodo aestimandae. 
 Quod vile est, carum ; quod carum est, vile putato : 
 Sic tibi nee cupidus, nee avarus habeberis ulli. 
 
 Culpata non facienda. 
 Quae culpare soles, ea tu ne feceris ipse : 
 Turpe est doctori cum culpa redarguit ipsum. 
 
 Concedenda petenda. 
 Quod justum est petito, vel quod videatur honestum : 
 Nam stultum est petere id quod possit jure negari. 
 
 Nota ignotis non commutanda. 
 Ignotum tibi tu noli praeponere notis : 
 Cognita judicio constant, incognita casu. 
 
 Dies quisque supremus putandus. 
 Cum dubia incertis versetur vita periclis, 
 Pro lucro tibi pone diem * quocunque laboras. * at. qui- 
 
 Obsecundandum amicis. cunque. 
 
 Vincere cum possis, interdum cede sodali : 
 Obsequio quoniam dulces retinentur amici. 
 
 Amieitiae mutua officia. 
 Ne dubites, cum magna petas, impendere parva : 
 His etenim rebus conjungit gratia charos. 
 
 Amicitia rixas odit. 
 Litem inferre cave, cum quo tibi gratia juncta est : 
 Ira odium generat, concordia nutrit amorem. 
 
 Castigatio sine ira. 
 Servorum ob culpam cum te dolor urget in iram, 
 Ipse tibi moderare, tuis ut parcere possis. 
 
 Patientia vincendum. . 
 
 Quem superare potes, interdum vince ferendo : 
 Maxima enim morum semper patientia virtus. 
 
 Quaesita sunt servanda. 
 Conserva potius, quae sunt jam parta labore : 
 Cum labor in damno est, crescit mortalis egesta, 
 
 Consulendum sibi in primis. 
 Dapsilis interdum notis, et charus amicis, 
 Cum fueris felix, semper tibi proximus est©. 
 
Distichorum Catonis Lib, IT. 11 
 
 LIB. II. PRAEFATIO. 
 
 Xelluris si forte velis cognoscere cultus, 
 Virgilium legito. Quod si mage nosse laboras 
 Herbarum vires, Macer has tibi carmine dicet, 
 Corporis ut cunctos possis depellere morbos. 
 Si Romana cupis et civica noscere bella, 
 Lucanum quaeras, qui Martis proelia dixit. 
 Si quis amare velis, vel discere amare legendo, 
 Nasonem petito. Sin' autem cura tibi haec est, 
 Ut sapiens vivas, audi quae discere possis, 
 Per quae semotum vitiis traducitur aevum. 
 Ergo ades, et quae sit sapientia disce legendo. 
 
 De omnibus bene raerendum. 
 !Si potes, ignotis etiam prodesse memento : 
 Utilius regno est meritis acquirere amicos. 
 
 Arcana Dei non scrutanda. 
 Mitte arcana Dei, coelumque inquirere quid sit: 
 Cum sis mortalis, quae sunt mortalia cura. 
 
 Mortis timor gaudia vitae pellit. 
 Linque metum lethi : nam stultum est tempore in omni, 
 Dum mortem metuis, amittere gaudia vitae. 
 
 Iracundia cavenda. 
 Iratus de re incerta contendere noli : 
 Impedit ira animum ne possit cernere verum. 
 
 Expendendum ubi opus est. 
 Fac sumptum propere, cum res desiderat ipsa : 
 Dandum etenim est aliquid, cum tempus postulat aut res. 
 
 Fortuna modica tutior. 
 Quod nimium est fugito, parvo gaudere memento : 
 Tuta mage est puppis modico quae flumine fertur. 
 
 Occulta vitia reticenda. 
 Quod pudeat, socios prudens celare memento : 
 Ne plures culpent id, quod tibi displicet uni. 
 
 Occulta tandem revelantur. 
 Nolo putes pravos homines peccata lucrari : 
 Temporibus peccata latent, sed tempore * parent. * *"■ e. appa- 
 Imbecillitas virtute compensatur. rent > vul g° P a " 
 Corporis exigui vires contemnere noli : tent ' . conira 
 
 Consilio pollet cui vim natura negavit. me n esem ' 
 
 Cedendum potiori ad tempus. 
 Cui scieris non esse parem te, tempore cede , 
 Victorem a victo superari saepe videmus. 
 
 F2 
 
12 Distichorum Catonis Lib. II. 
 
 Rixandum cum familiaribus non esse. 
 Adversus notum noli contendere verbis : 
 Lis minimis verbis interdum maxima crescit. 
 
 Fortuna non quaerenda sorte. 
 Quid Deus intendat, noli perquirere sorte : 
 Quid statuat de te, sine te deliberat ipse. 
 
 Luxus odium generat. 
 Invidiam nimio cultu vitare memento : 
 Quae si non laedit, tamen hanc sufferre molestum est. 
 
 Animus non deponendus ob iniquum judicium. 
 Esto animo forti, cum sis damnatus inique : 
 Nemo diu gaudet, qui judice vine it iniquo. 
 
 Reconciliatis lis non refricanda. 
 Litis praeteritae noli maledicta referre : 
 Post inimicitias iram meminisse malorum est. 
 
 Teipsum neque lauda neque culpa. 
 Nec te collaudes, nee te culpaveris ipse : 
 Hoc faciunt stulti, quos gloria vexat inanis. 
 
 Parsimonia. 
 Utere quaesitis parce, cum sumptus abundat : 
 Labitur exiguo, quod partum est tempore longo. 
 
 Supercilium nonnunquam deponendum. 
 Insipiens esto, cum tempus postulat, aut res : 
 Stultitiam simulare loco, prudentia summa est. 
 
 Neque prodigus, neque avarus. 
 Luxuriam fugito, simul et vitare memento 
 Crimen avaritiae; nam sunt contraria famae. 
 
 Loquaci parum credendum. 
 Noli tu quaedam referenti credere semper : 
 Exigua iis tribuenda fides qui multa loquuntur. 
 
 Ebrius vinum non accuset. 
 Quae *potu peccas, ignoscere tu tibi noli: * a l. potu 
 
 Nam nullum crimen vini est, sed culpa bibentis. 
 
 Amicis consilia credenda. 
 Consilium arcanum tacito committe sodali; 
 Corporis auxilium medico committe fideli. 
 
 Successus malorum ne te offendat. 
 Indignos noli successus ferre molester 
 Indulget fortuna malis ut laedere possit. 
 
 Futuros casus praevidendos. 
 Prospice, qui veniunt, hos casus esse ferendos : 
 Nam laevius laedit, quicquid praevidimus ante. 
 
 Animus in adversis spe fovendus. 
 Rebus in adversis animum submittere noli: 
 Spem retine; spes una hominem nee morte relinquit. 
 
Distichorum Catonis Lib. III. 13 
 
 Opportunitas cum contingit tenenda. 
 Rem tibi quam noscis aptam, dimittere noli : 
 Fronte capillata, post est occasio calva. 
 
 Futura ex praeteritis colligenda. 
 Quod sequitur specta, quodque imminet ante videto 
 Ilium imitare Deum, qui partem spectat utramque. 
 
 Vitae ratio habenda. 
 Fortius ut valeas, interdum parcior esto : 
 Pauca voluptati debentur, plura saluti. 
 
 Multitudini cedendum. 
 Judicium populi nunquam contempseris unus : 
 Ne nulli placeas, dum vis contemnere multos. 
 
 Valetudo curanda. 
 Sit tibi praecipue, quod primum est, cura salutis : 
 Tempora ne culpes, cum sis tibi causa doloris. 
 
 Somnia non observanda. 
 Somnia ne cures : Nam mens humana quod optat, 
 Dum vigilans sperat, per somnum cernit id ipsum. 
 
 LIB. III. PRAEFATIO. 
 Hoc quicunque voles carmen cognoscere, lector, 
 Quum praecepta ferat quae sunt gratissima vitae, 
 Commoda multa feres. Sin autem spreveris illud, 
 Non me scriptorem, sed te neglexeris ipse. 
 
 Dandam esse operam Uteris. 
 Instrue praeceptis animum, nee discere cesses : 
 Nam sine doctrina vita est quasi mortis imago. 
 
 Moribus captanda fama. 
 Fortunae donis semper parere memento : 
 Non opibus bona fama datur, sed moribus ipsis. 
 
 Recte agendo aliorum linguam ne timeas. 
 Cum recte vivas, ne cures verba malorum : 
 Arbitrii nostri non est quod quisque loquatur. 
 
 Amici crimen celandum. 
 Productus testis, salvo tamen ante pudore, 
 Quantumcunque potes, celato crimen amici. 
 
 Blandiloquentia suspecta. 
 Sermones blandos blaesosque cavere memento : 
 Simplicitas veri * sana est, fraus ficta loquendi. t * Seed, fama, 
 
 Ignava vita fugienda. L e * indicium, 
 
 Segnitiem fugito, quae vitae ignavia fertur : ai ' norm£U 
 
 Nam cum animus languet, consumit inertia corpus. 
 
 Animus fessus relaxandus. 
 Interpone tuis interdum gaudia curis ; 
 Ut possis animo quemvis sufferre laborem. 
 
 Fs 
 
14? Distichorum Catonis Lib. III. 
 
 Malo anirao neminem reprehendas. 
 Alterius dictum, aut factum, ne carpseris unquam: 
 Exemplo simili ne te derideat alter. 
 
 Haereditas augenda. 
 Quod tibi sors dederit tabulis suprema notato ; 
 Augendo serva ; ne sis quem fama loquatur. 
 
 Senectus sit munifica. 
 Cum tibi divitiae superant in fine senectae ; 
 Munificus facito vivas, non parcus amicis. 
 
 Verba attendenda, non os loquentis. 
 Utile consilium dominus ne despice servi, 
 Nullius sensum, si prodest, tempseris unquam. 
 
 Praesenti utendum fortuna. 
 Rebus et in censu si non est quod fuit ante, 
 Fac vivas contentus eo quod tempora praebent, 
 
 Uxor spe dotis non quaerenda. 
 Uxorem fuge ne ducas sub nomine dotis ; 
 Nee retinere velis, si coeperit esse molesta. 
 
 Alieno sapere exemplo. 
 ^lultorum disce exemplo quae facta sequaris, 
 Quae fugias : vita est nobis aliena magistra. 
 
 Nihil ultra vires. 
 Quod potes, id tentes : operis ne pondere pressus 
 Succumbat labor, et frustra tentata relinquas. 
 
 Consentire videtur qui tacet. 
 Quod nosti haud recte factum, nolito silere, 
 Ne videare malos imitari velle tacendo. 
 
 Rigor favore temperandus. 
 Judicis auxilium sub iniqua lege rogato : 
 Ipsae etiam leges cupiunt ut jure regantur. 
 
 Feras quae tua culpa pateris. 
 Quod meritd pateris, patienter ferre memento : 
 Cumque reus tibi sis, ipsum te judice damna. 
 
 Multa legenda, sed cum judicio. 
 Multa legas facito : perlectis *perlege multa : * a l. elige. 
 
 Nam miranda canunt, sed non credenda, poetae. 
 
 Modeste in convivio loquendum. 
 Inter convivas fac sis sermone modestus : 
 Ne dicare loquax dum vis urbanus haberi. 
 
 Iracundia uxoris non formidanda. 
 Conjugis iratae nolito verba timere : 
 Nam lachrymis struit insidias, dum foemina plorat. 
 
 Quaesitis utendum, non abutendum. 
 Utere quaesitis, sed ne videaris abuti : 
 Qui sua consumunt, cum deest, aliena sequuntur. 
 
Distichorum Catonis Lib. II. 
 
 Mors non formidanda. 
 Fac tibi proponas mortem non esse timendam : 
 Quae bono si non est, finis tamen ilia malorum est. 
 
 Uxor proba, si loquax, ferenda. 
 Uxoris linguam, si frugi est, ferre memento : 
 Namque malum est te nolle pati, hanc non posse tacere* 
 
 Pietas erga parentes. 
 Aequa diligito charos pietate parentes : 
 Nee matrem offendas, dum vis bonus esse parenti. 
 
 LIB. IV. PRAEFATIO. 
 
 ISecuram quicunque cupis traducere vitam, 
 Nee vitiis haerere animum, quae moribus obsunt ; 
 Haec praecepta tibi semper relegenda memento 
 Invenies aliquid quo * te nitare magistro. 
 
 Divitiarum contemptus. 
 JL)espice divitias, si vis animo esse beatus ; 
 Quas qui suspiciunt, mendicant semper, avari. 
 
 Vivere secundum naturam optimum. 
 Commoda naturae nullo tibi tempore deerunt, 
 Si contentus eo fueris quod postuiat usus. 
 
 Res ratione regenda. 
 Cum sis incautus, nee rem ratione gubernes, 
 Noli fortunam, quae * nulla est, dicere caecam. 
 
 Amor pecuniae ad usum. 
 Dilige *denarium, sed parce dilige formam, 
 Quam nemo sanctus, nee honestus captat * habere. 
 
 In valetudine ne opibus parcas. 
 Quum fueris locuples, corpus curare memento : 
 Aeger dives habet nummos, *sed non habet ipsum. 
 
 Castigatio paterna ferenda. 
 Verbera cum tuleris discens aliquando magistri, 
 Fer patris imperium, cum verbis exit in iram. 
 
 Certa et utilia agenda. 
 Res age quae prosunt : rursus vitare memento 
 In quibus error inest, nee spes est certa laboris. 
 
 Libenter donandum. 
 Quod donare potes, gratis * concede roganti : 
 Nam recte fecisse bonis in parte *lucrosum est. 
 
 Suspicio statim expendenda. 
 Quod tibi suspectum est, confestim discute quid sit 
 Namque solent primd quae sunt neglecta nocere. 
 
 Venus abstinentia cohibenda. 
 Cum te detineat Veneris damnosa voluptas, 
 Indulgere gulae noli, quae ventris arnica est. 
 
 F4 
 
 15 
 
 *al. quovi- 
 tae utare. al. 
 tu te utare. 
 
 * al. non est 
 
 *al. denarii. 
 * al. ab aere. 
 
 * al. se. 
 
 * al. ne vende. 
 
 * al. lucrorum. 
 
16 Distichorum Catonis Lib. IV. 
 
 Homo malus, fera pessima. 
 Cum tibi proponas animalia cuncta timere, 
 Unum hominem tibi praecipio plus esse timendum. 
 
 Sapientia fortitudini praeferenda. 
 Cum tibi praevalidae fuerint in corpore vires, 
 Fac sapias ; sic tu poteris vir fortis haberi. 
 
 Amicus cordis medicus. 
 Auxilium a notis petito, si forte laboras : 
 Nee quisquam melior medicus, quam fidus amicus. 
 
 Sacrificium spiritus dejectus. 
 Cum sis ipse nocens, moritur cur victima pro te ? 
 Stultitia est morte alterius sperare salutem. 
 
 Amicus ex moribus deligendus. 
 Cum tibi vel socium, vel fidum quaeris amicum, 
 Non tibi fortuna est hominis, sed vita petenda. 
 
 Avaritia vitanda. 
 Utere quaesitis opibus ; fuge nomen avari : 
 Quid tibi divitiae prosunt, si pauper abundas ? 
 
 Voluptas inimica famae. 
 Si famam servare cupis, dum vivis, honestam ; 
 Fac fugias animo, quae sunt mala gaudia vitae. 
 
 Sen em etiam delirum ne irriseris. 
 Cum sapias animo, noli irridere senectam ; 
 Nam quicunque senet, sensus puerilis in illo est. 
 
 Opes fluxae, ars perpetua. 
 Disce aliquid ; nam ciim subito fortuna recessit, 
 Ars remanet, vitamque hominis non deserit unquam. 
 
 Mores ex verbis cogniti. 
 Perspicito tecum tacitus, quid quisque Ioquatur : 
 Sermo etenim mores et celat et indicat idem. 
 
 Ars usu juvanda. 
 Exerce studium, quamvis perceperis artem : 
 Ut cura ingenium, sic et manus adjuvat usum. 
 
 Vitae contemptus. 
 Multum ne cures venturi tempora fati : 
 Non metuit mortem qui scit contemnere vitam. 
 
 Discendum et docendum. 
 Disce, sed a doctis : indoctos ipse doceto : 
 Propaganda etenim rerum doctrina bonarum est. 
 
 Bibendi ratio. 
 Hoc bibe quod possis, si tu vis vivere sanus : 
 Morbi causa mali nimia est *quandoque voluptas. * a l quae- 
 
 Ne damnes quod probaveris. cunque. 
 
 Laudaris quodcunque palam, quodcunque probaris, 
 Hoc vide ne rursus levitatis crimine damnes. 
 
Distichorum Catonis Lib. IV. 17 
 
 Circumspectus utraque fortuna esto. 
 Tranquillis rebus quae sunt adversa *timeto : * al. caveto. 
 
 Rursus in adversis melius sperare memento. 
 
 Studio crescit sapientia. 
 Discere ne cesses ; cura sapientia crescit : 
 Rara datur longo prudentia temporis usu. 
 
 Parce laudandum. 
 Parce laudato : nam quern tu saepe probaris, 
 Una dies, qualis fuerit, monstrabit amicus. 
 
 Discere non pudeat. 
 Ne pudeat, quae nescieris, te velle doceri : 
 Scire aliquid laus est ; *turpe est nil discere velle. * al. culpa. 
 
 Rebus utendum ad sobrietatem. 
 Cum Venere et Baccho lis est, sed juncta voluptas . 
 Quod blandum est ammo complectere, sed fuge lites. 
 
 Tristibus et tacitis non fidendum. 
 Demissos animo, ac tacitos vitare memento : 
 Qua flumen placidum est, forsan latet altius unda. 
 
 Sors sorti conferenda. 
 Cum tibi displiceat rerum fortuna tuarum, 
 Alterius specta * quo sis discrimine pejor. *al. qui sis. 
 
 Ultra vires nihil aggrediendum. 
 Quod potes id tenta : nam littus carpere remis 
 Tutius est multo, quam *velis tendere in altum. * al. velum. 
 
 Cum justo inique non contendendum. 
 Contra hominem justum prave contendere noli : 
 Semper enim Deus injustas ulciscitur iras. 
 
 Fortuna utraque aeque ferenda. 
 Ereptis opibus noli tu flere querendo : 
 Sed gaude potius, *tibi si contingat habere. * al. si nil. 
 
 Ab amico quid ferendum. 
 Est jactura gravis, quae sunt, amittere damnis : 
 Sunt quaedam, quae ferre decet patienter amicum. 
 
 Tempori non confidendum. 
 Tempora longa tibi noli promittere vitae : 
 Quocunque ingrederis sequitur mors, corpus ut umbra. 
 
 Deus quibus placandus. 
 * Thure Deum placa ; vitulum sine crescat aratro : * al. Ture. 
 Ne credas placare Deum, dum caede litatur. 
 
 A potentioribus laesus dissimula. 
 Cede locum laesus, fortunae cede potenti : 
 Laedere qui potuit, prodesse aliquando valebit. 
 
 Castiga teipsum. 
 Cum quid peccaris, castiga te ipse subinde : 
 Vulnera dum sanas, dolor est medicina doloris. 
 
 F5 
 
18 Disticliorum Catonis Lib, IV. 
 
 Amicus mutatus non vituperandus. 
 Damnaris nunquam, post longum tempus, amicum : 
 Mutavit mores ; sed pignora prima memento. 
 
 Beneficiis collatis attende. 
 Gratior officiis, quo sis mage charior, esto ; 
 Ne nomen subeas quod dicitur * offi ciperda. *al. officiperdae. 
 
 Suspicionem tolle. 
 Suspectus care sis, ne sis miser omnibus horis : 
 Nam timidis et suspectis aptissima mors est. 
 
 Humanitas erga servos. 
 Cum fueris famulos proprios mercatus in usus, 
 Ut servos dicas, homines tamen esse memento. 
 
 Occasionem rei commodae ne praetermittas 
 Quamprimum rapienda tibi est occasio prima, 
 Ne rursus quaeras, quae jam neglexeris ante. 
 
 Non laetandum repentino obitu. 
 Morte repentina noli gaudere malorum : 
 Felices obeunt quorum sine crimine vita est. 
 
 Pauper simulatum vitet amicum. 
 Cum tibi sit conjux, *ne res et fama laboret, * a l. nee. 
 
 Vitandum ducas inimicum nomen amici. 
 
 Junge studium. 
 Cum tibi contigerit studio cognoscere multa 
 Fac discas multa, et vites *nil velle doceri. * at. non. 
 
 Brevitas memoriae arnica. 
 Miraris verbis nudis me scribere versus ? 
 Hos brevitas sensus fecit conjungere binos. 
 
 JOANNIS SULPITII VERULANI, 
 
 DE MORIBUS ET CIVILITATE PUERORUM, 
 
 Carmen. 
 Qu o s decet in vita mores servare docemus, 
 
 Virtuti ut studeas, literulisque simul. 
 Quae te igitur moneo, miti, puer, indole serva : 
 
 Praeque tuis oculis haec mea jussa tene. 
 Omnibus in rebus studeas precor, esse modestus : 
 
 Sis avidus laudis, sit tibi cura boni. 
 Sis pius ac sanctus, nee non venerare parentes : 
 
 Et noceas nulli, surripiasque nihil. 
 Futilis et mendax nunquam, nee credulus esto : 
 
 Dedecus et metuas, et r ever ere bonos. 
 Improba pestiferi fugias commercia coetus : 
 
 Sic et honorus eris, sic eris ipse bonus. 
 
Joannis Sulpitii Carmen. 19 
 
 Nee maledicta refer, nee promas turpia dictu : 
 
 Est stomachosa quidem dicere turpe tibi. 
 Segnitiem fugito, quae vitae commoda pellit : 
 
 Parce gulae turpi, luxuriamque fuge. 
 Parce et avaritiae ; bilem fraenare memento, 
 
 Atque animi fastus, invidiamque simul. 
 Fidus sis audensque bonis ; temerarius esse 
 
 Despice : non audax sis, timidusve nimis. 
 Esto verecundus : rectum te lectus habebit ; 
 
 Detege nee socium, nee tua membra, puer. 
 Nee sis difneilis nimium, nimiumque severus ; 
 
 Sed bonus et blandus conspiciare, puer. 
 Nee penitus mutum, nee te decet esse loquacem : 
 
 Convenit ille toro, convenit iste foro. 
 Haec te servantem vitae laus spesque futurae ; 
 
 Spernentem turpis poenaque morsque manent. 
 Nunc faciles aures, animum quoque trade serenum ; 
 
 Morigerare mihi, mollia jussa dabo. 
 Sit sine labe toga, et facies sit lota manusque ; 
 
 Stiria nee naso pendeat ulla tuo. 
 Et nihil emineat, sint et sine sordibus ungues ; 
 
 Sit coma, sit turpi calceus absque luto. 
 Linguaque non rigeat, careant rubigine dentes : 
 
 Atque palam pudeat te fricuisse caput ; 
 Exprimere et pulices, scabiemque urgere nocentem 
 
 Ne te sordidulum, qui videt ista, vocet. 
 Seu spuis, aut mungis nares, nutasve, memento 
 
 Post tua concussum vertere terga caput* 
 Mucorem haud tangas digitis, sputumve resorbas : 
 
 Panniculo nasum mungere nempe decet. 
 Et ructare cave, quin os in terga reflectas : 
 
 Stringe os, et crepitum comprime, quaeso, puer. 
 Munditiaeque tibi placeant ; medio quoque cultu 
 
 Utere, ne turpis vel videare levis. 
 Non sum qui laudem summo te accumbere mane : 
 
 Judice conveniens me dabit hora cibum. 
 Nee vos ante focum coenas producite longas : 
 
 Esse decet vivas, vivere non ut edas. 
 Nee sis vinosus, quamvis potasse Catonem 
 
 Fama refert ; fugias sumere vina mera. 
 Namque cibus nimius, potus quoque, maxima poena; 
 
 Corporis et vires ingeniique rapit. 
 
 V 6 
 
20 Joannis Sulpitii Carmen. 
 
 Insternas mensam : nitidas imponito quadras, 
 
 Atque salem et Cererem, flumina, vina, dapes. 
 Deinde precare Deum, qui nobis cuncta benigne 
 
 Suggerit, ut sanctos det tibi mane cibos. 
 Atque, puer, jubeo, sedeas vel raro, sed astans 
 
 Pocula porge celer, tolle, repone dapes. 
 Juraque convivas super importare, minister 
 
 Effuge ; nam turpis saepe fit inde toga. 
 Quodque jubebit herus, facilis semperque subito : 
 
 Quemque tibi dederit, tu tibi sume locum. 
 Et licet antiqui cubuissent pectore prono, 
 
 Te colla haec aetas recta tenere jubet. 
 Et sinito mensae cubitis haerere potentes : 
 
 Tu tantum faciles pone, repone manus. 
 Quodque vir egregius pavido tibi porrigit, illud 
 
 Sume lubens, grates aptaque verba refer. 
 Esto tribus digitis, magnos nee sumito morsus 
 
 Nee duplices offas mandere utrinque juvet. 
 Te vitare velim, cupidus ne ut lurco sonoras 
 
 Contractes fauces : mandere rite decet. 
 Gausape non macules, aut pectus ; nee tibi mentum 
 
 Stillet ; sitve tibi ne manus uncta, cave. 
 Saepe ora et digitos mappa siccabis adepta ; 
 
 In quadra faciat nee tua palma moram. 
 Quod tibi vicinum fuerit, tu sume : sodali 
 
 Cede tuo, referat dum tamen ille manum. 
 Dumque in frusta secat, caveas sumpsisse recisa : 
 
 Lurco legit dulces absque rubore bolos. 
 Non, manibus gremio immissis, tibi vellicet unguis 
 
 Quod sumes : residens non agitato pedes. 
 Incidasque prius quam dens contundat ofellam : 
 
 Tingantur rursum ne tibi morsa cave. 
 Ne lingas digitos, nee rodas turpiter ossa, 
 
 Ast ea cultello radere rite potes. 
 Sive super mensam cortex cumuletur, et ipsa 
 
 Ossa, vel in quadram, prae pedibusve jace. 
 Nee digitis tenta, nee pinguia delige frusta : 
 
 Et quocunque manus, hue tibi lumen eat. 
 Nee socium torve inspicias, quidve ederit ille 
 
 Advertas : gestus inspice saepe tuos. 
 Pocula cum sumes, tergat tibi mappa labella ; 
 
 Si tergas manibus, non mihi charus eris. 
 
Joannis Sulpitii Carmen. 21 
 
 Una manus sumat pater am, ni hanc jactet in hostem 
 
 * Theseus, aut Beli sint monumenta patris : * Vid. Ovid. 
 
 Hanc binis quod si manibus captabis, id apte ^ 12# *' 2 { 
 
 Efficies : digitis pocula sume tribus. v ^33, 
 
 Ac teneas oculos, nee supra pocula fare : 
 
 Plena aliquo vites sit tibi bucca cibo. 
 Deme merum cyatho, multum ne forte supersit, 
 
 Quod nolit socius sumere forte tuus. 
 Qui sapit, extinguet multo cum fonte Falernum, 
 
 Et parco lympham diluet ille mero. 
 Haud facias binos haustus, nee fessus anheles, 
 
 Sibila nee labiis stridula prome tuis. 
 Nee citd sorbebis, velut ovi lutea grati : 
 
 Nee nimium tarda sume Falerna mora. 
 Unum, sive duo, ad summum tria pocula sumes : 
 
 Si hunc numerum excedas, jam mihi potus eris. 
 Fac videas quodcunque bibes, modicumque pitissa : 
 
 Crater, sive calix, det tibi vina, brevis. 
 Os quoque tergebis semper post pocula : palmas 
 
 Ablue, quum mensam deseris, atque labra. 
 Denique jam grates pro donis reddito Christo, 
 
 Qui aeternas nobis praeparat unus opes ; 
 Inflectensque genu, jungens et brachia, PROSIT 
 
 Dicito ; mox tolles ordine quaeque suo. 
 
 3 
 Q 
 
 REGIMEN MENSAE HONORABILE. 
 
 NEMO CIBUM CAPIAT, DONEC BENEDICTIO FIAT. 
 
 Vultus hilar es habea- 
 Sal cultello capia- 
 Quod edendum sit, ne peta- 
 Non nisi depositum capia- 
 Rixas et murmura fugia- 
 Manibus erectis sedea- 
 Mappam mundam tenea- 
 Ne scalpatis cavea- 
 Aliis partem tribua- 
 Morsus non rejicia- 
 Modicum sed crebro biba- 
 Grates DEO per CHRISTUM refera- 
 Privetur mensd, qui spreverit haec documenta. 
 
RUDIMENTA PIETATIS. 
 
 In nomine Dei, Patris, Filii, et Spiritus Sancti. Amen. 
 ORATIO DOMINICA, Matth. vi. 
 
 xater noster, qui es in coelis, 1. Sanctificetur nomen tuum. 2. 
 Veniat regnum tuum. 3. Fiat voluntas tua, quemadmodum in 
 eoelo, sic etiam in terra. 5. Panem nostrum quotidianum da 
 nobis hodie. 5. Et remitte nobis debita nostra, sicut et nos re- 
 mittimus debitoribus nostris. 6. Et ne nos inducas in tenta- 
 tionem, sed libera nos a malo : quia tuum est regnum, et po- 
 tentia, et gloria, in secula. Amen, 
 
 SYMBOLUM APOSTOLICUM. 
 
 Credo in Deum Patrem omnipotentem, Creatorem coeli et 
 terrae: 2. Et in Iesum Christum, filium ejus unigenitum, 
 Dominum nostrum ; 3. Qui conceptus est de Spiritu Sancto, 
 natus ex Maria Virgin e ; 4. Passus sub Pontio Pilato, crucifix- 
 iiSj mortuus, et sepultus, descendit ad inferna; 5. Tertio die 
 resurrexit a mortuis ; 6. Ascendit ad coelos, sedet ad dextram 
 Dei Patris omnipotentis ; 7. Inde venturus est judicatum vi- 
 vos et mortuos. 8. Credo in Spiritum Sanctum. 9. Credo 
 Sanctam Ecclesiam catholicam; Sanctorum communionem ; 
 10. Remissionem peccatorum ; 11. Carnis resurrection em; 12. 
 Et vitam aeternam. Amen. 
 
 DECALOGUS, SIVE LEX DEI. 
 
 Locutus est DEUS omnia verba haec. Exod. xx. 
 
 Ego sum Dominus Deus tuus, qui eduxi te ex Aegypto, e do- 
 mo servitutis : 
 
 I. Non habebis deos alienos in conspectu meo. 
 
 II. Ne sculpas tibi simulacrum, nee ullam imaginem effingas 
 eorum, quae aut supra sunt in coelo, aut infra in terra, aut in 
 aquis sub terra : neque incurves te illis, neque colas ea. Ego 
 enim sum Dominus Deus tuus, fortis, zelotes, vindicans peccata 
 
Rudimenta Pietatis. 23 
 
 patrum in.filios, idque in tertia et quarta progenie eorum qui 
 oderunt me, et misericordia utens in millesimam eorum qui 
 diligunt me, et observant praecepta mea. 
 
 III. Ne usurpes nomen Domini Dei tui temere. Neque 
 enim Dominus dimittet eum impunitum, qui nomen ejus vane 
 usurpaverit. 
 
 IV. Memento diem Sabbati sanctifices. Sex diebus opera- 
 beris, et facies omne opus tuum. At septimo die Sabbatum 
 erit Domino Deo tuo. Non facies ullum opus, nee tu, nee 
 films tuus, nee filia tua, nee servus tuus, nee ancilla tua, nee 
 jumentum tuum, nee advena qui est intra portas tuas. Nam 
 sex diebus fecit Deus coelum, terram, et mare, et quaecunque 
 in iis sunt; requievit autem die septimo, ideoque benedixit 
 diei Sabbati, et sanctificavit eum. 
 
 V. Honora patrem tuum, et matrem tuam, ut diu vivas in 
 terra, quam tibi Dominus Deus tuus daturus est. 
 
 VI. Non occides. 
 
 VII. Non committes adulterium. 
 
 VIII. Non furaberis. 
 
 IX. Non dices contra proximum tuum falsum testimonium. 
 
 X. Non concupisces domum proximi tui, non concupisces 
 uxorem proximi tui, nee servum ejus, nee ancillam, nee bovem, 
 nee asinum, nee quicquam eorum quae sunt proximi tui. 
 
 SUMMA LEGIS, 
 
 Matth. xxii. 34. 
 Pharismu quum audivissent quod IESUS silentium imposuisset 
 Sadducaeis, congregati sunt pariter : 35. Et mterrogamt eum 
 unus ex iis qui erat legis peritus, tentans eum, et dicens, 36. 
 Praeceptor, Quod praeceptum maximum est in lege f 
 
 37. IESUS autem dixit illi, Ut diligas Dominum Deum 
 tuum, ex toto corde tuo, et ex tota anima tua, et ex omni co- 
 gitatione tua. 38. Hoc est praeceptum maximum et primum. 
 39. Secundum autem est simile illi : nempe, Ut diligas proxi- 
 mum tuum sicut teipsum. 
 
 40. Ex his duobus praeceptis pendent Lex et Prophetae. 
 
 Quot sunt Christianae Ecclesiae Sacramento, f 
 
 Duo. 
 
 Quae sunt ilia ? 
 
 Baptismus et Sacra Coena Domini. 
 
24? Rudimenta Pietatis. 
 
 INSTITUTIO BAPTISMI. 
 
 Cujus haec sunt verba. Matth. xxviii. 19. Mark xvi. 16. 
 
 Ite, et docete omnes gentes, baptizantes eos, In nomine Pa- 
 tris, et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti. Qui crediderit, et baptizatus 
 fuerit, servabitur : Qui non crediderit, condemnabitur. Et 
 docete eos, ut custodiant quicquid mandavi vobis : et ecce ego 
 vobiscum sum, omnibus diebus, usque ad consummationem se- 
 culi. 
 
 Haec promissio repetitur cum Scriptura Baptismum nominat 
 Lavacrum regenerationis, et ablutionem peccatorum. Tit, iii. 
 5. Act. xxii. 16. 
 
 INSTITUTIO COENAE DOMINI. 
 
 Cujus haec sunt verba. 1 Cor. xi. 23. 
 
 Ego enim accepi a Domino nostro id quod tradidi vobis : 
 Quod Dominus noster Iesus Christus, ea nocte qua proditus 
 est, accepit panem ; et, gratiis actis, fregit, ac dixit, Accipite; 
 manducate, hoc est corpus meum, quod pro vobis frangitur : Hoc 
 facite ad memoriam met. Itidem et poculum, postquam coe- 
 nasset, dicendo, Hoc poculum est novum illud foedus per meum 
 sanguinem : Hoc facite, quotiescunque biberitis y in mei recorda- 
 tionem. Quotiescunque enim ederitis panem hunc, et pocu- 
 lum hoc biberitis, mortem Domini annunciabitis, usque quo ve- 
 nerit. Itaque quisquis ederit panem hunc, vel biberit pocu- 
 lum Domini indigne, reus est corporis et sanguinis Domini. 
 Probet autem quisque seipsum, et ita de pane illo edat, et de 
 poculo illo bibat. Nam qui edit et bibit indigne, damnationem 
 sibi ipsi edit et bibit, quia non decernit corpus Domini. 
 
 Haec promissio a Paulo exprimitur, cum inquit, 
 
 x oculum gratiarum actionis, quo gratias agimus, nonne com- 
 munio est sanguinis Christi? Panis quem frangimus, nonne 
 communio est corporis Christi ? Quoniam unus panis, unum 
 corpus, multi sumus. Nam omnes unius panis participes su 
 mus. 
 
SUMMULA CATECHISMI. 
 
 TRIPLEX HOMINIS STATUS : 
 
 1. In sanctitate et sanitate. 
 
 2. Sub peccato et morte. 
 
 3. Sub Chris ti gratia. 
 
 >-». Quaestio. 
 
 laCuiS hominem creavit ? 
 Responsio. DEUS. 
 
 Q. Qualem creavit eum? 
 
 R. Sanctum et sanum, raun- 
 dique dominum. 
 
 Q. In quern usum creatus est? 
 
 R. Ut Deo inserviret. 
 
 Q. Quod servitii genus ab eo 
 exigebat Deus ? 
 
 R. Legis suae praestationem. 
 
 Q. Num in legis Dei prae- 
 statione perstitit ? 
 
 R. Nequaquam: sed earn 
 foede transgressus est. 
 
 Q. Quae hujus transgressionis 
 poena ? 
 
 R. Mors aeterna, cum ani- 
 mae, turn corporis, et ipsi et 
 posteris. 
 
 Q. Quomodo hide liber amur? 
 
 R . Mer a D ei gratia in Chris- 
 to IesUj absque nostris men- 
 tis. 
 
 Q. Cujusmodi persona est 
 Christus ? 
 
 R. Vere Deus, vereque ho- 
 mo, in persona una. 
 
 Q. Quomodo nos liberavit? 
 
 R. Morte sua : mortem e- 
 nim nobis debitam pro nobis 
 subiit, nosque eripuit. 
 
 Q. Num omnes liberantur 
 per Christum? 
 
 R. Minime, sed ii tantum 
 qui fide eum amplectuntur. 
 
 Q. Quid est fides? 
 
 R. Cum mihi persuadeo De- 
 um me omnesque sanctos ama- 
 re, nobisque Christum cum om- 
 nibus suis bonis gratiis donare. 
 
 Q. Recense summam tuae Ji- 
 dei. 
 
 R. Credo in Deum Patrem, 
 $c. 
 
 Q. Quis operatur hanc fidem 
 in nobis ? 
 
 R. Spiritus Sanctus per Ver- 
 bum et Sacramenta. 
 
 Q. Quomodo earn operatur 
 per Verbum et Sacramenta ? 
 
 R. Aperit cor, ut Deo lo- 
 quenti in Verbo et Sacramen- 
 tis credamus. 
 
 Q. Quid est Dei verbum ? 
 
 R. Quicquid veteris ac novi 
 Testamenti libris continetur. 
 
 Q. Verbi Dei quot partes ? 
 
 R. Duae, Lex et Evange- 
 lium. 
 
 Q. Quid est Lex? 
 
 R. Doctrina Dei, debitum 
 a nobis exigens, et quia non 
 sumus solvendo, damnans. 
 
26 Summula 
 
 Q. Quid Evangelium ? 
 
 R. Doctrina Christum cum 
 omnibus suis bonis nobis offe- 
 rens, debitumque nostrum ab 
 eo solutum, nosque liberos esse 
 proclamans. 
 
 Q. Quid Sacramento, ? 
 
 R. Sigilla Dei, significantia 
 et donantia nobis Christum 
 cum omnibus suis bonis. 
 
 Q. Quae haec Christi bona ? 
 
 R. Amor Dei, Spiritus Sanc- 
 tus, unio nostri cum Christo : 
 unde remissio peccatorum, sa- 
 natio naturae, spiritualis nutri- 
 tio,et vita aeterna, promanant. 
 
 Q. Quot sunt novi Testa- 
 menti Sacramento, ? 
 
 R. Duo, Baptismus et Sa- 
 cra Coena. 
 
 Q. Quid est Baptismus ? 
 
 R. Sacramentum insitionis 
 nostrae in Christum, et abluti- 
 onis a peccatis. 
 
 Q. Quid insitio nostri in 
 Christum ? 
 
 R. Unio nostri cum Chri- 
 sto : unde manat remissio pec- 
 catorum et perpetua resipis- 
 centia. 
 
 Q. Baptismus quid juvat fi- 
 dem ? 
 
 R. Testatur, ut aqua corpus 
 abluitur, sic, operante Spiritu 
 Sancto, a peccatorum reatu et 
 radice, per fidem in sanguine 
 Christi, nos repurgari. 
 
 Q. Quid est Sacra Coena? 
 
 R. Sacramentum Spiritualis 
 nutritionis nostrae in Christo. 
 
 Q. Coena Domini quid juvat 
 fidem? 
 
 Catechismi. 
 
 R. Testatur, ut pane et vino 
 corpora nostra aluntur et au- 
 gescunt ; sic animas nostras 
 corpore et sanguine Christi 
 crucifixi ali et corroborari ad 
 vitam aeternam. 
 
 Q. Corpore et sanguine Chri- 
 sti quomodo alimur ? 
 
 R. Dum fide percipimus, et 
 Spiritus Sancti, qui una adest, 
 vi, ea nobis applicamus. 
 
 Q. Quando fide percipimus, 
 et nobis applicamus corpus Chri- 
 sti crucifixi ? 
 
 R. Dum nobis persuademus 
 Christi mortem et crucifixio- 
 nem non minus ad nos perti- 
 nere, quam si ipsi nos pro pec- 
 catis nostris crucifixi essemus : 
 Persuasio autem haec est verae 
 fidei. 
 
 Q. Vera fides quomodo dig- 
 noscitur? 
 
 R. Per bona opera. 
 
 Q. Quomodo cognoscuntur 
 bona opera ? 
 
 R. Si Dei legi respondeant. 
 
 Q. Recita Dei legem ? 
 
 R. Audi, Israel ! Ego sum 
 Dominus, Sfc. 
 
 Q. Haec lex de quibus te ad- 
 monet ? 
 
 R. De officio meo erga De- 
 um, et erga proximum. 
 
 Q. Quid officii debes Deo ? 
 
 R. Supra omnes eum ut a- 
 mem. 
 
 Q. Quid debes proximo ? 
 
 R. Eum ut amem tanquam 
 meipsum. 
 
 Q. Potis es haec prae stare ? 
 
 R. Minime gentium ; nam 
 
Summula 
 tantisper dum hie vivimus, 
 habitat in nobis peccatum. 
 
 Q. In Dei film quid hinc ex- 
 istit ? 
 
 R. Perennis pugna inter 
 earnem et spiritum. 
 
 Q. In hac pugna quomodo 
 nobis versandum ? 
 
 R. Assidue orandum, ut De- 
 us peccata nobis remittat, im- 
 becillitatemque sustentet. 
 
 Q. Quomodo orandum? 
 
 R. Ut nos docuit Christus, 
 Pater noster, qui es, fyc. 
 
 Catechismi. 27 
 
 Q. Qui tibi persuades, De» 
 um donaturum quae petis ? 
 
 R. Quia orare jussit, pollici- 
 tusque est, quicquid peterem 
 in Christi nomine, se mihi lar- 
 giturum. 
 
 Q. Quid debes Deo pro tot 
 beneficiis ? 
 
 R. Ut ei gratias agam, per- 
 petuoque serviam. 
 
 Q. Quomodo Deo servien- 
 dum ? 
 
 R. Ex verbi ipsius praescrip- 
 to, ut jam dictum est. 
 
 PRAECIPUA CAPITA 
 
 CHRISTIANAE RELIGIONIS, 
 
 Desumpta e Sacra Scriptura Veteris ac Novi Testamenti. 
 I. De DEO. 
 
 Joan. iv. 2. JL)eus est Spiritus. 
 
 Apoc. iv. 8. Sanctus, Sanctus, Sanctus, Dominus Deus omnipo- 
 tens, qui fuit, qui est, et qui venturus est. 
 
 Psal. cxlvii. 5. Dominus noster est magnus, multarumque virium, et 
 sapientia ejus est immensa. 
 
 JExod. xxxiv. 6. Jehova, Jehova Deus, misericors et exorabi- 
 
 lis, longanimis, et abundans benignitate et fide, 
 
 Vers. 7. Custodiens misericordiam millibus, condonans iniquitatem, 
 transgressionem et peccatum, et qui nullo pacto absolvet nocentem. 
 
 Deut. vi. 4. Jehova Deus noster est unus Jehova. 
 
 1 Joan. v. 7. Tres sunt qui testantur in coelo, Pater, Sermo, et Spiri- 
 tus Sanctus ; et hi tres sunt unum. 
 
 II. De creatione, lapsu, peccato, etmiseria hominis. 
 
 Gen. i. 2. Jc^t Deus dixit, Faciamushominemadimaginemnostram, 
 secundum similitudinem nostram. 
 
 Vers. 27. Itaque Deus creavit hominem ad imaginem suam, ad ima- 
 ginem Dei creavit eum. 
 
 Eccl. vii. 29. Deus fecit hominem rectum. 
 
 Rom. v. 12. Peccatum intravit in mundum per unum hominem, et 
 mors per peccatum ; et ita mors pervasit ad omnes homines, quatenus 
 omnes peccarunt. 
 
 Rom. iii. 23. Omnes peccaverunt, ac deficiuntur gloria Dei. 
 
 Psal. li. 5. En, formatus sum in iniquitate, et in peccato mater mea 
 concepit me. 
 
28 Praecipua Capita 
 
 III. De Redemptione generis humani per Iesum Christum, 
 
 Joan. iii. 16.JDeus sic amavit mundum, ut dederit Filium suum 
 unigenitum, ut quisquis credit in eum, non pereat, sed habeat vitam 
 seternam. 
 
 1 Jo. iv. 9. Amor Dei patuit erga nos in hoc, quod Deus misit Fi- 
 lium suum unigenitum in mundum, ut vivamus per eum. 
 
 V. 10. In hoc est amor, non quod nos dilexerimus Deum, sed quod 
 ipse dilexerit nos, et miserit Filium suum, ut esset piaculum pro pec- 
 catis nostris. 
 
 1 Pet. iii. 18. Christus quoque passus est semel pro peccatis, Justus 
 pro injustis, ut adduceret nos ad Deum. 
 
 1 Pet. ii. 24. Qui ipsemet sustulit peccata nostra in suo corpore su- 
 per lignum, ut nos mortui peccatis, viveremus justitiee ; cujus vibici- 
 bus sanati sumus. 
 
 Tit. ii. 14. Qui dedit seipsum pro nobis, ut redimeret nos ab omni 
 iniquitate, et purificaret sibi ipsi populum peculiarem, accensum stu- 
 dio bonorum operum. 
 
 IV. Deiis quae Deus a nobis exigit, ut salutem per Christum 
 consequamur. 
 
 Act. xvii.30. JDixit, Domini, quid faciendum est mihi, ut sim salvus ? 
 
 Vers. 31. Et illi dixerunt, Crede in Dominum Iesum, et salvus eris. 
 
 ^c^. iii. 19. Resipiscite, et convertimini, ut peccata vestra deleantur, 
 cum tempora recreationis venient a conspectu Domini. 
 
 Isa. Iv. 6. Quaerite Jehovam dum possit inveniri ; invocate eum 
 dum est propinquus. 
 
 Vers. 7. Improbus derelinquat viam suam, et vir iniquus cogitationes 
 suas : revertaturque ad Jehovam, et miserebitur illius ; et ad Deum 
 nostrum, quia plurimum condonabit. 
 
 Luc. vs.. 23. Si quis vult venire post me, ipse abneget se, tollatque 
 suam crucem quotidie, et sequatur me. 
 
 Matth. xi. 28. Venite ad me omnes qui laboratis et onerati estis, et 
 ego recreabo vos. 
 
 Vers. 29. Attollite jugum meum in vos, et discite a me, quia mitis 
 sum et humilis corde ; et invenietis requiem animabus vestris. 
 
 Vers. 30. Jugum enim meum est facile, et onus meum est leve. 
 
 Heb. v. 9. Perfectus factus est auctor salutis aeternae omnibus obe- 
 dientibus sibi. 
 
 Jo. xiv. 15. Si amatis me, servate praecepta mea. 
 
 Jo. xv. 14. Vos estis amici mei, si feceritis quaecunque ego praeci- 
 pio vobis. 
 
 Tit. ii. 11. Gratia Dei, quae salutem adfert, apparuit omnibus 
 hominibus ; 
 
 Vers. 1 2. Erudiens nos, ut, abnegata impietate et mundanis cupidita- 
 tibus, vivamus sobrie, juste, et pie, in hoc praesenti seculo. 
 
 Mic. vi. 8. Indicavit tibi, O homo ! quod sit bonum ; et quid exigit 
 Jehova a te, nisi ut aequum facias, et ames misericordiam, et ambules 
 submisse cum Deo tuo ? 
 
 Col. iii. 5. Mortificate igitur vestra membra terrestria ; scortationem> 
 impuritatem, libidinem, cupiditatem malam, et avaritiam, quae est 
 idololatria : 
 
 Vers. 6. Propter quae, ira Dei venit super filios contumaces. 
 
 Vers. 8. Deponite haec omnia, iram, excandescentiam, malitiam, 
 
 maledicentiam, obscoenitatem verborum ex ore vestro. 
 
Christianae Religionis. 29 
 
 Vers, 9. Ne mentimini alii aliis. 
 
 Vers. 12. Induite igitur (utelecti Dei, sancti, amatique) viscera mise- 
 ricordiae, benignitatem, submissionem animi, lenitatem, patientiara ; 
 
 Vers. 15. Sufferentes alii alios, et condonantes alii aliis; siquisha- 
 bet querelam ad versus aliquem, quemadmodum Christus condonavit 
 vobis, sic quoque vos facite. 
 
 Vers. 14. Super omnia autem induite charitatem, quae est vincu- 
 lum perfectionis. 
 
 1 Thess. iv. 11. Et ut studeatis esse quieti, et agere res vestras, et 
 operari propriis manibus, sicut praecepimus vobis. 
 
 1 Pet. ii. 27. Timete Deum, honorate regem. 
 
 Rom. xiii. 1. Omnis anima esto subjecta potestatibus supereminen- 
 tibus : nulla enim est potestas nisi a Deo : potestates quae sunt, sunt 
 ordinatae a Deo. 
 
 Vers. 2. Itaque quisquis obsistit potestati, obsistit ordinationi Dei : 
 qui autem obsistunt, accipient condemnationem sibi ipsis. 
 
 1 Thess. v. 12. Rogamus autem vos, fratres, ut agnoscatis eos qui 
 laborant inter vos, et praesunt vobis in Domino, et admonent vos. 
 
 Vers. 13. Et faciatis eos maximi cum amore, propter opu sipsorum. 
 
 Heb. xiii. 17. Parete gubernatoribus vestris, et obsequimini: namii 
 vigilant pro animabus vestris, tanquam reddituri rationem: ut faciant 
 id cum gaudio, et non cum dolore ; id enim est inutile vobis. 
 
 Col. iii. 18. Uxores, submittite vos viris vestris, ut convenit in 
 Domino. 
 
 Vers. 1 9. Viri, diligite uxores, et ne estote amarulenti adversus eas. 
 
 Eph. vi. 1. Liberi, obedite parentibus vestris in Domino ; id enim 
 aequum est. 
 
 Vers. 4. Et vos, patres, ne provocate liberos vestros ad iram, sed edu- 
 cate eos in disciplina et admonitione Domini. 
 
 Col. iii. 22. Servi, obedite dominis vestris in omnibus secundum 
 carnem, non serviendo ad oculum, ut captantes gratiam hominum, sed 
 cum simplicitate cordis, timentes Deum. 
 
 Vers. 25. Ac quicquid facitis, agitote id ex animo, tanquam Domi- 
 no, et non hominibus. 
 
 Col. iv. 1. Domini, praestate jus et aequum servis vestris, scientes 
 vos quoque habere dominum in coelis. 
 
 Matth. vii. 12. Quaecunque igitur volueritis ut homines faciant vo- 
 bis, vos facite etiam ita eis. 
 
 Matth. xxiv. 15. Qui sustinuerit ad finem, is servabitur. 
 
 Gal. vi. 9. Ne defetiscamur recte faciendo ; nam debito tempore 
 metemus, si non fatigemur. 
 
 Apoc. ii. 10. Esto fidelis usque ad mortem, et dabo tibi coronam vitae. 
 
 V. De necessitate haec praestandi. 
 
 Jo. iii. 36. Qui credit in Filium, habet vitam aeternam; qui vero 
 non credit Filio, non videbit vitam, sed ira Dei manet super eum. 
 
 Luc. xiii. 5. 5. Nisi resipiscatis, omnes similiter peribitis. 
 
 Ezek. xxxiii. 11. Sic egovivam, inquit Dominus Jehova, nondelec- 
 tor morte impii, sed ut impius recedat a via sua, et vivat. Recedite, 
 recedite a malis viis vestris ; cur enim moreremini ? 
 
 Ezek. xviii. 30. Resipiscite, et avertite vos ab omnibus peccatis ves- 
 tris ; ita iniquitas non erit exitio vobis. 
 
 V. 31. Abjicite a vobis omnes transgressiones vestras, quibus trans- 
 
30 Praecipua Capita 
 
 estis ; et facite vobis cor novum, et spiritual novum ; nam quare 
 moreremini ? 
 
 Vers. 32. Non enim delector morte morientis, dicit Dominus Jeho- 
 va ; convertite igitur vos, et vivite. 
 
 Jo. iii. 3. Nisi quis denuo natus merit, non potest videre regnum Dei. 
 
 Matth. xviii. 3. Nisi convertamini, et fiatis ut pueruli, non intrabitis 
 in regnum coelorum. 
 
 Luc. vi. 46. Quid vero vocatis me, Domine, Domine, et non facitis 
 quae dico ? 
 
 Heb. xii. 14. Sectamini pacem cum omnibus, et sanctimoniam, sine 
 qua nemo videbit Dominum. 
 
 1 Cor. vi. 9. An ignoratis injustos non esse possessuros regnum Dei ? 
 
 Ne errate ; neque scortatores, nee idololatrae, nee adulteri, nee mol- 
 les, nee paedicones. 
 
 Vers. 10. Nee fures, nee avari, nee ebriosi, nee conviciatores, nee ra- 
 paces, possidebunt regnum Dei. 
 
 Heb. x. 38.— —Si quis se subtraxerit, non erit acceptus animo meo. 
 
 VI. De modis obtinendi gratiam a Deo, viresque ad haec facienda . 
 
 Luc. xi. 9. X etite, et dabitur vobis ; quaerite, et invenietis; pulsate, 
 et aperietur vobis. 
 
 Vers. 10. Quisquis enim petit, accipit ; et qui quaerit, invenit ; et 
 aperietur pulsanti. 
 
 V. 13. Si vos, qui maliestis, sciatis dare bona dona vestrisliberis,quan- 
 to magis Pater vester coelestis dabit Sanctum Spiritum petentibus a se ? 
 
 1 Pet. iii. 21. Cui rei eonsimilisfigura, nempe Baptismus, nuncquo- 
 que servat nos, non detractio sordium corporis, sed stipulatio bonae 
 conscientiae apud Deum, per resurrectionem Christi. 
 
 1 Cor. xi. 23. Dominus Iesus, ea nocte qua proditus est, accepit panem : 
 
 V. 24. Et gratiis actis, fregit, ac dixit, Accipite, comedite : hoc est 
 meum corpus, quod frangitur pro vobis ; hoc facite, ad memoriam mei. 
 
 Vers. 25. Itidem accepit poculum postquam coenasset, dicens, Hoc 
 poculum est novum foedus per meum sanguinem ; hoc facite, quoties 
 biberitis, ad memoriam mei. 
 
 Vers. 26. Quoties enim ederitis panem hunc, et biberitis poculum 
 hoc, annunciatis mortem Domini donee veniat. 
 
 1 Cor. x. 16. Poculum benedictionis cui benedicimus, nonneestcom- 
 munio sanguinis Christi ? Panis quern frangimus, nonne est commu- 
 nio corporis Christi ? 
 
 Psal. cxix. 9. Quomodo puer purificabit semitam suam ? observando 
 earn secundum verbum tuum. 
 
 V. 1 1. Recondidi sermonem tuum in animo meo, ut non peccem in te. 
 
 V.59. Recogitavi meos mores, et con verti pedes meos ad tuatestimonia. 
 
 V. 60. Festinavi, ac non cunctatus sum, observare mandata tua. 
 
 Prov. iii. 5. Confide Jehovae toto corde, neve innitere tuae prudentiae. 
 
 Vers. 6. Agnosce eumin omnibus viis tuis, et is diriget gressus tuos. 
 
 VII. Dc quatuor ultimis, viz. de Morte et Judicio, Coelo et Inferno. 
 Heb. ix. 27. Otatutum est omnibus hominibus ut semel moriantur, 
 
 postea vero judicium. 
 
 Joan. v. 28. Hora venit, in qua omnes qui sunt in monumentis suis, 
 audient ejus vocem. 
 
Christianae Religionism 31 
 
 Vers. 29. Et prodibunt ; qui fecerint bona, in resurrectionem vitae ; 
 qui vero egerint mala, in resurrectionem condemnationis. 
 
 2 Cor. v. 10. Comparendum est nobis omnibus ante tribunal Chris - 
 ti, ut unusquisque accipiat ea quae fecerit in corpore, congruenter ad 
 ea quae fecerit, sive bonum sive malum. 
 
 Matth. xxv. 34. Tunc dicet Rex iis qui erunt ad dextram ejus, Ad- 
 este, benedicti Patris mei, possidete regnum paratum vobis a jacto 
 fundamento mundi. 
 
 Vers. 41. Tunc dicet etiam iis qui erunt ad sinistram, Facessite a 
 me, execrati, in aeternum ignem, paratum diabolo et angelis ejus. 
 
 Vers. 46. Et isti abibunt in aeternum supplicium, justi vero in 
 aeternam vitam. 
 
 2 Thess. i. 7. Dominus Iesus revelabitur de coelo cum potentibus 
 angelis suis. 
 
 Vers. 8. In flammante igne, sumens ultionem de iis qui nesciunt 
 Deum neque obediunt Evangelio Domini nostri Iesu Christi. 
 
 Vers. 9. Qui dabunt poenas aeterno exitio, a facie Domini, et a 
 gloria potentiae ejus : cum venerit, ut glorificetur in Sanctis suis, et 
 ut sit admirandus omnibus credentibus. 
 
 Two Prayers to be taught unto Children at School, with a 
 
 Form of blessing God before and after Meat, 
 
 Morning Prayer. 
 
 God [ I praise thee for the creation of the world, and for the re- 
 demption of mankind by the Lord Jesus, and for thy many favours 
 bestowed on me. Thou didst safely take me from the womb, and 
 hast ever since cared for me : Thou hast, by thy mercy, caused me to 
 be born within thy church, where I was early given to thee in bap- 
 tism : Thou hast afforded me the means of grace, and called me to 
 the hope of glory. 
 
 But, O most merciful Father ! I, a poor and miserable sinner, con- 
 ceived in sin, and brought forth in iniquity, have gone astray from thee. 
 
 1 have not cared to know thee, and to do thy will ; but have done my 
 own will, and followed my foolish and sinful inclinations, and do there- 
 fore deserve thy wrath and curse. O Lord, have mercy upon me, — 
 turn me unto thee, and grant me repentance and forgiveness of all my 
 sins, for Jesus' sake. Let it from henceforth become my chiefest 
 care to please thee, and to seek thy kingdom and righteousness. Work 
 in me a true faith, a lively hope, and a fervent charity ; make me 
 humble, meek, patient, sober, and just, and loving to all men ; sub- 
 missive and obedient to them that are over me, and well content and 
 thankful in every condition of life. Grant that I may daily grow in 
 knowing, loving, fearing, and obeying thee. Create in me a clean 
 heart, O God ! and renew a right spirit within me. 
 
 I thank thee, O Lord ! for thy care of me this night ; watch over 
 me this day ; keep me mindful that I am always in thy sight, that 1 
 may be in thy fear all the daylong ; and giant that through the whole 
 course of my life I may be holy and harmless in all manner of conver- 
 sation, that when this short and frail life is at an end, I may be made par- 
 taker of everlasting life, through the merits of Jesus Christ, our Lord; 
 in whose name and words I pray, Our Father which art in heaven, &c. 
 
Evening Prayer. 
 
 JVJLost gracious God ! what shall I render unto thee for thy many 
 and great benefits bestowed upon me ! Though I have been an un- 
 dutiful and disobedient servant unto thee, thou hast continued thy 
 care and kindness for me ever since I was born, and hast preserved me 
 this day : Let me never forget thy goodness, but grant that thereby I 
 may be led to repentance and amendment of life. Preserve me from 
 every thing that is displeasing to thee, O Lord ! keep me from cursing, 
 swearing, and lying, — from pride, stubbornness, and idleness. Work 
 in me an utter dislike of all uncleanness, of gluttony, and drunken- 
 ness, of all malice and envy, of strife and contention, of deceit and 
 covetousness. Give me grace to deny all ungodliness and worldly 
 lusts, and to live godly, righteously, and soberly, in this present world. 
 Cause me to understand and consider the laws and life of Jesus, that 
 I may do his will, and follow his steps. Let never the cares of this 
 life, nor the love of riches, nor evil company, nor the corrupt custom 
 of the world, withdraw me from the obedience of thy laws ; but 
 strengthen and establish me by thy Holy Spirit, that I may live and 
 die thy faithful servant. 
 
 O Lord ! send thy gospel through the world : pour out plenteously 
 the spirit of truth, holiness, and peace, on all people : bless the church 
 and kingdom : preserve the king, and all the royal family : guide our 
 judges and magistrates : sanctify and assist the ministers of the gospel : 
 visit all that are in trouble, and sanctify their afflictions to them : be 
 gracious to all my kindred, friends, and neighbours : and bless and 
 forgive all mine enemies. 
 
 Lord ! watch over me this night, and keep me ever mindful that I 
 am shortly to die and come to judgement, that I may without delay 
 turn to thee, and pass the time of my sojourning here in thy fear. 
 Good Lord ! hear me, and grant these my desires, and what else thou 
 knowest to be needful for me, for the sake of Jesus ; in whose name 
 and words I pray, Our Father, &c. 
 
 Grace before Meat. 
 
 O LoRn, be merciful unto us, and pardon our sins : sanctify these 
 thy good benefits, that we, by the sober and thankful use of them, may 
 be enabled for thy service, through Jesus Christ our Lord and Saviour. 
 Amen. 
 
 Grace after Meat. 
 
 W e thank and praise thee, O Lord, the giver of all good ! who hast 
 at this time fed our bodies : stir up in us a greater care for our souls; 
 and grant that our short lives, which are so carefully sustained by thy 
 bounty, may be spent in doing thy will. Lead us safely through this 
 vain and sinful world, in which we are pilgrims and strangers ; and at 
 length bring us to everlasting rest, through Jesus Christ. Amen. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
PARSING INDEX 
 
 RUDDIMAN'S RULES OF SYNTAX. 
 
PARSING INDEX 
 
 TO 
 
 RUDDIMAN'S RULES OF SYNTAX. 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 With a view to assist young beginners in making out the 
 Parts of Speech, the following Index has been drawn up, 
 on a plan which, from its conciseness and simplicity, (it is 
 hoped) will meet with the approbation of those who have 
 the care of directing their studies. All the Words, as they 
 occur in Ruddiman's Examples, are arranged in alphabeti- 
 cal order, with their designation immediately after, in a dif- 
 ferent character; and the other principal parts connected 
 with them are subjoined within parentheses. To guard a- 
 gainst improper pronunciation, the most important of the 
 quantities are accurately marked. 
 
 W. D. 
 
 Ediru March Is*, 1824. 
 
 Abbreviations used in this Index. 
 
 abl. ablative 
 
 ace. accusative 
 
 act. active 
 
 adj. adjective 
 
 adv. adverb 
 
 com. common gender 
 
 compar. comparative de- 
 gree 
 
 conj. conjunction 
 
 dat. dative 
 
 dep. deponent verb 
 
 f. ox fern, feminine gen- 
 der 
 
 Jut. future tense 
 
 gen. genitive, or gender 
 
 ger. gerund 
 imper. imperative mood 
 imperf. imperfect tense 
 impers. impersonal verb 
 indecl. indeclinable 
 ind. indicative mood 
 inf. infinitive mood 
 inter, interjection 
 irr. irregular verb 
 m. or masc. masculine 
 
 gender 
 n. or neut. neuter 
 nom. nominitive 
 part, participle 
 pass, passive 
 
 perf. perfect tense 
 
 plup. pluperfect tense 
 
 pi. or plur. plural num- 
 ber 
 
 prep, preposition 
 
 pres. present tense 
 
 pron. pronoun 
 
 sing, singular number 
 
 subj. subjunctive mood 
 
 sub. substantive 
 
 sup. supine 
 
 superh superlative de- 
 gree 
 
 v. verb. 
 
 voc. vocative 
 
 The figures after substantives denote the declension, and after verbs, the 
 over a vowel, here and throughout the book, shows that the 
 
 person. 
 The mark 
 
 syllable is long ; u that it is short ; and a that two syllables are contracted 
 into one. — This last also distinguishes the ablative singular of the first de- 
 clension, and the genitive singular of the fourth. 
 
Index to Ruddimaris Syntax, 
 
 A 
 
 A, and ab, prep. 
 Aberdonia, abl. sing, (Aberdo- 
 nia, 3d) suh.f, 1. 
 Abfuit, 3. sing, per/, ind. (Ab- 
 
 sum, fui, esse) v. irr. 
 Abiit, for abivit, 3. sing, perf. 
 
 ind, (Abeo, Ivi, itum, ire) v. 
 
 irr, 
 Absolvunt, 3. plur, pres. ind. 
 
 (Absolvo, vi, lutum, vere) v. 
 
 act. 
 Absterret, 3. sing. pr. ind. (Abs- 
 
 terreo, ui, itum, ere) v. ad. 
 Abundat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ab- 
 
 undo, avi, atum, are) v. n, 
 Abutitur, 3. sing, pres. ind, (Ab- 
 
 utor, usus, uti) v. dep* 
 Accuser, 1. sing, pres. ind. (atus, 
 
 ari) v. pass. 
 Ad, prep. 
 Adeamus, 1. plur. pres. subj. 
 
 (Adeo, Ivi, itum, Ire) v. irr, 
 iEstimo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (avi, 
 
 atum, are) v, act. 
 Agmina, ace. plur. (Agmen, mis) 
 
 sub. neut. 3. 
 Aliquis, nom. sing, masc, (qua, 
 
 quod or quid) pron. 
 Alta, nom. sing. fern. (Altus, a, 
 
 um) adj. 
 Ama, 2. sing. pres. imper. (Amo, 
 
 avi, atum, are) v, act. 
 Amabilis, nom. sing. m. or/, (e) 
 
 adj. 
 Amandus, nom. sing. masc. fut. 
 
 part, (a, um — Amor, atus, ari) 
 
 v. pass. 
 Amans, nom, sing. m. ox f, pres, 
 
 part, (antis — Amo, avi, atum, 
 
 are) v, act. 
 
 Ambulando, ger. abl, from 
 Ambiilo, 1. sing, pres, ind. (avi, 
 
 atum, are) v. act. 
 Amor, nom. sing, (oris^ sub. m. 
 
 3. 
 Arcessitus, nom. sing. m. perf. 
 
 part, (a, um — Arcessor, Itus, 
 
 i) v. pass. 
 Arguit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ar- 
 
 guo, ui, utum, uere) v. act, 
 Arma, ace. plur. (orum) sub. n. 
 
 2, wants sing. 
 Asse, abl. sing, and 
 Assibus, abl. plur. (As, assis) sub. 
 
 masc. 3. 
 Athenas, ace. plur. (Athenae, a- 
 
 rum) sub.f. I. wants sing. 
 Attentus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 
 
 um) adj. 
 Audiendum, ger. ace. (Audio, 
 
 Ivi, Itum, Ire) v. act. 
 Augetur, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Au- 
 
 geor, auctus, augeri) v. pass. 
 Avidus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 
 
 adj. 
 Auro, abl. sing. (Aurum, i) sub, 
 
 neut. 2. 
 
 B 
 
 Bello, k cfo£. sing. (Bellum, i) sub, 
 
 neut. 2. 
 Bene, adv. 
 Beneficiorum, gen. plur. (Bene* 
 
 ficium, i) sub, n. 2. 
 Bonus, nom, sing. masc. (a, um^ 
 
 adj. 
 
 Calamo, abl. sing. (Calamus, i) 
 
 sub. masc. 2. 
 Captus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 
 
Index to Ruddimaris Syntax. 
 
 part, (a, um — Capior, captus, 
 
 capi) v. pass. 
 Carens, nom. sing. masc. or fern. 
 
 pres. part, (entis) and 
 Caret, 3. sing, pres, ind. (Careo, 
 
 ui, ltum, and cassum, ere) v. 
 
 neut. 
 Carthagine, all. sing. (Carthago, 
 
 inis) sub.f. 3. 
 Casta, nom. sing. f. (Castus, a, 
 
 um) adj. 
 Charta, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
 Cicero, nom. sing, (orris) sub. m. 
 
 3. 
 Civium, gen. plur. (Civis, is) sub. 
 
 com. 3. 
 Colimus, 1. plur. pres. ind. (Co- 
 lo, colui, cultum, colere) v. 
 
 act. 
 Columna, nom. sing, (as) sub.f. I. 
 Comparatur, 3. sing. pres. ind. 
 
 (Comparor, atus, ari) v. pass. 
 
 from 
 Comparo, 1 . si?ig. pres. ind. (avi, 
 
 atum, are) v. act. 
 Condemno, 1. si?ig. pres. ind. 
 
 (avi, atum, are) v. act. 
 Constitit, 3. sing.perf. ind. (Con- 
 
 sto, stiti, stitum, and statum, 
 
 stare) v. neut. * 
 
 Contentus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 
 
 um) adj. 
 Convenienter, adv. 
 Cui, dat. sing. (Qui, quae, quod) 
 
 pron. 
 Cuique, dat. sing. (Quisque, quae- 
 
 que, quodque) pron. 
 Cujus, gen. sing. (Qui, quee, quod) 
 
 pron. 
 Culpa, abl. sing. (Culpa, a?) sub. 
 
 fern. 1. 
 
 Cupidus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 
 
 adj. from 
 Cupio, 1 . sing. pres. ind. (Ivi, I- 
 
 tum, ere) v. act. Hence 
 Cupit, 3. sing. pres. ind. act. 
 Cutem, ace. sing. (Cutis, is) sub. 
 
 f.3. 
 
 Deambulatum, sup. (Deambtilo, 
 
 avi, atum are) v. act. 
 Decet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 
 
 ere) v. impers. 
 Defessus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 
 
 part, (a, um — Defetiscor, fes- 
 
 sus, ci) v. dep. 
 Dei, gen. sing. (Deus, i) sub. m. 
 
 2. 
 Delectat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (a- 
 
 vit, are) v. impers. 
 Deliciae, nom. pi. (arum) sub. f. 
 
 1. wants sing. 
 Demosthenes, nom. sing, (is) sub. 
 
 masc. 3. 
 Deum, ace. sing, from 
 Deus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. 
 Dicere, pres. inf. (Dico, dixi, 
 
 dictum, dicere) v. act. Hence 
 Dictu, sup. 
 Diei, gen. sing, and 
 Dies, ace. pi. (Dies, ei) sub. m. 
 
 or/. 5. 
 Dignus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 
 
 adj. 
 Discam, ] . sing. pres. subj. and 
 Discendi, ger. gen. and 
 Discere, pres. inf. (Disco, didi- 
 
 ci, — , discere) v. act. 
 Discessit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Dis- 
 
 cedo, cessi, cessum, cedere) 
 
 v. neuU 
 
Index to Ruddiman's Syntax. 
 
 Discipulus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 
 
 2. 
 Discurro, 1. sing.pres. ind. (cur- 
 
 ri, cursum, currere) v. neui. 
 Dispersae, nom. pi. f. perf. part. 
 
 (Dispersus, a, um — Disper- 
 
 gor, sus, gi) v. pass. 
 Distat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Disto, 
 
 stiti, — , stare) v. neut. 
 Divitiis, abl. plur. (Divitias, a- 
 
 rum) sub.f. 1. wants sing. 
 Docendum, ger. ace. (Doceo,ui, 
 
 turn, ere) v. act. Hence 
 Doceor, 1. sing. pres. ind. (tus, 
 
 eri) v. pass, and 
 Docet, 3. sing. pres. ind. act. 
 Docti, nom. plur. masc. and 
 Doctum, ace. sing. masc. from 
 Doctus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 
 
 part, (a, um — Doceor, tus, 
 
 eri) v. pass. Hence 
 Doctissimus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 
 
 um) adj. superl. 
 Docuit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Do- 
 
 ceo, ui, turn, ere) v. act. 
 Domi, gen. sing, and 
 Domo, abl. sing, and 
 Domum, ace. si?ig. (Domus, us, 
 
 or i) sub.f. 2. and 4. 
 Diici, dat. sing. (Dux, diicis) sub. 
 
 com. 3. 
 Ducit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Du- 
 
 co, duxi, ductum, ducere) v. 
 
 act. 
 Dulce, nom. sing. neut. (Dulcis, 
 
 e) adj. Hence 
 Dulcior, nom. sing. masc. or /. 
 
 (us) adj. compar. 
 Duobus, abl. plur. masc. (Duo, 
 
 x, o) adj. 
 
 E, and ex, prep. 
 Edinburgo, abl. sing, from 
 Edinburgum, nom. sing, (i) sub. 
 
 neut. 2. 
 Ego, no m. sing. masc. or fern, 
 
 (mei) pron. 
 Egregie, adv. 
 
 Elegantissime, adv. superl. 
 Emi, 1. sing. perf. ind. (Emo, 
 
 emi, ptum, ere) v. act. 
 Eo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (Ivi, ltum, 
 
 Ire) v. irr. 
 Eripuit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Eri- 
 
 pio, ripui, reptum, ripere) v. 
 
 act. 
 Esse, pres. inf. and 
 Est, 3. sing.pres. ind. (Sum, fui, 
 
 esse) v. irr. 
 Et, conj. 
 Excolendo, ger. abl. (Excolo, 
 
 colui, cultum, ere) v. act. 
 Exeamus, 1. pi. subj. (Exeo, Ivi, 
 
 itum, Ire) v. irr. 
 Expedit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ivit, 
 
 Ire) v. wipers. 
 
 Fabiilam, ace. sing. (Fabiila, ae) 
 
 sub.f. 1. 
 Faciebat, 3. sing, imperf. ind. 
 
 (Facio, feci, factum, facere) 
 
 v. act. 
 Facile, nom. sing. neut. (Facilis, 
 
 e) adj. 
 Facta, nom. pi. neut. perf. part, 
 
 (Factus, a, um — Fio, factus, 
 
 fieri) v. pass. irr. 
 Fastlgia, ace. plur. (Fastlgium, i) 
 
 sub. neut. 2. 
 
Index to Ruddimaris Syntax. 
 
 Fa vet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Faveo, 
 
 vi, fautura, vere) v. act. 
 Fecit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Facio, 
 
 feci, factum, facere) v. act. 
 Fidelis, nom. sing. masc. (e) adj. 
 Flfa, abl. sing, and 
 Flfam, ace. sing. (Flfa, ae) sub. f. 
 
 1. 
 Filius, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. 
 Foemina, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
 Formose, voc. sing. masc. (For- 
 
 mosus, a, um) adj. 
 Fortibus, dat. plur. masc. or fern. 
 
 (Fortis, e) adj. Hence 
 Fortiter, adv. 
 
 Fortuna, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
 Fratrum, gen. plur. (Frater, tris) 
 
 sub. m. 3. 
 Fraude, abl. sing, and 
 Fraudis, gen. si?ig. (Fraus, audis) 
 
 sub.f. 3. 
 Fretus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 
 
 adj. 
 Fronde, abl. sing. (Frons, fron- 
 
 dis) sub. fern. 3. 
 Fiigiunt, 3. plur. pres. ind. (Fu- 
 
 gio, fugi, fugitum, fugere) v. 
 
 neut. 
 Furti, gen, sing. (Furtum, i) sub. 
 
 neut. 2. 
 
 Gaudeo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (gavi- 
 
 sus, gaudere) v. neut. pass. 
 Gentium, gen. plur. (Gens, gen- 
 
 tis) sub. fern. 3. 
 Glascua, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f 1, 
 Gloriae, gen. sing. (Gloria, ae) 
 
 sub.f. 1. 
 Grammaticam, ace. sing. (Gram- 
 
 matlca, ae) sub.f. l 
 
 H 
 
 Habitat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ha- 
 
 bito, avi, atum, are) v. neut. 
 Hei, interj. 
 Heu, interj. 
 Hie, nom. sing. masc. (haec, hoc) 
 
 pron. 
 Homero, dat. sing. (Homerus, i) 
 
 sub. m. 2. 
 Homicidii, gen. sing. (Homicldi- 
 
 um, i) sub. neut. 2. 
 Honora, 2. sing. pres. imper.lfio- 
 
 noro, avi, atum, are) v. act. 
 Honore, abl. sing. (Honor, oris) 
 
 sub. 7n. 3. 
 Hora, abl. sing. (Hora, ae) sub. 
 
 Id, ace. sing. neut. (Is. ea, id) 
 
 pron. 
 Ignarus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 
 
 adj. 
 Ilia, nom. sing, fern, and 
 Illius, gen. sing, and 
 Ilium, ace. sing. masc. (Ille, ilia, 
 
 illud) pron. 
 In, prep. 
 Incedit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (In- 
 
 cedo, cessi, cessum, cedere) 
 
 v. neut. 
 Incidit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Inci- 
 
 do, cidi, casum, cidere) v. n. 
 Indole, abl. sing, and 
 Indolis, gen. sing. (Indoles, is) 
 
 sub.f. 3. 
 Inertiae, gen. sing. (Inertia, ae) 
 
 sub.f. 1. 
 Injuriae, gen. sing, and 
 Injuriam, ace. sing. (Injuria, ae) 
 
 sub.f. 1. 
 
Index to Ruddiniaris Syntax. 
 
 Inops, nom. sing. com. gen. (6- 
 
 pis) adj. 
 InsTpientis, gen. sing. masc. or/. 
 
 (Insipiens, entis) adj. 
 Inter, prep. 
 Interest, 3. sing. pres. ind. (fuit, 
 
 esse) v. impers. 
 Ira, abl. sing, and 
 Irae, gen. sing. (Ira, ae) sub. f em. 
 
 1. 
 Iter, nom. and ace. sing, and 
 Itinere, abl. sing. (Iter, itineris) 
 
 sub. n. 3. 
 
 Joannes, nom. sing, (is) sub. m. 3. 
 
 Laodicea, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
 Lectionem, ace. sing, and 
 Lectionis, gen. sing. (Lectio, 5- 
 
 nis) sub.f. 3. 
 Legendi, ger. gen. and 
 Legit, 3. sing. pres. ind. from 
 Lego, 1. sing. pres. ind. (legi, 
 
 ctum, gere) v. act. 
 Lex, nom. sing, (legis) sub.f. 3. 
 Liber, nom. sing, and 
 Libri, nom. plur. and 
 Libris, abl. plur. and 
 Librum, ace. sing. (Liber, libri) 
 
 Sub. 111. 2. 
 
 Licet, 3. si7ig. pres. ind. (licitum, 
 
 licere) v. impers. 
 Littore, abl. sing. (Littus, oris) 
 
 sub. n. 3. 
 Londini, gen. sing. (Londinum, 
 
 i) sub. neut. 2." 
 Loquitur, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Lo- 
 
 quor, cutus, and quutus, qui) 
 
 v. dep. 
 
 Ludemus, 1. plur.fut. ind. (Lu- 
 do, si, sum, dere) v. act. 
 
 M 
 
 Magni, gen. sing. neut. (Magnus, 
 
 a, um) adj. 
 Manet, 3. sing. pres. ind. and 
 Mansit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Ma- 
 
 neo, raansi, mansum, manere) 
 
 v. neut. 
 Matrem, ace. sing, and 
 Matris, gen. sing. (Mater, tris) 
 
 sub.f. 3. 
 Me, ace. sing. (Ego, mei) pron. 
 Mea, ace. plur. neut. (Meus, a, 
 
 um) pron. 
 Meipsum,acc. sing. m. (Ego, mei, 
 
 and Ipse, a, um) pron. 
 Melle, abl. sing. (Mel, mellis) 
 
 sub. neut. 3. 
 Mlmor, nom. sing. com. gen. (o- 
 
 ris) adj. 
 Memoria, nom. sing, (ae) sub. 
 
 fern. 1. 
 MensTbus, abl. plur. (Mensis, is) 
 
 sub. masc. 3. 
 Metu, abl. sing. (Metus, vis) sub. 
 
 masc. 4. 
 Mihi, dat. sing. (Ego, mei) pron. 
 Militum, gen. plur. (Miles, itis) 
 
 sub. m. 3. 
 Millia, ace. pi. neut. (Mille, in- 
 
 declinable in sing. plur. Mil- 
 lia, um) adj. 
 Miserere, 2. sing. pres. imperat. 
 
 (Misereor, sertus, sereri) v. 
 
 dep. 
 Miseret, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 
 
 ere) v. impers. 
 Miserum,flcc. sing. masc. (Miser, 
 
 a, um) adj. 
 
Index to Ruddimans Syntax. 
 
 Moerria, ace. plur. (Mcenia, urn, 
 and orum) sub. n. 2. and 3. 
 wants sing. 
 
 More, all. sing. (Mos, moris) sub. 
 masc. 3. 
 
 Moriendum, ger. nom. (Morior, 
 mortuus, mori, and moriri) v. 
 dep. 
 
 Morti, dat. sing. (Mors, mortis) 
 sub. f. S. 
 
 Mortuus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 
 part, (a, um — Morior, mor- 
 tuus, mori, and moriri) v. dep. 
 
 Multum, nom. sing. neut. (Mul- 
 tus, a, um) adj. 
 
 Munere, abl. sing. (Munus, eris) 
 sub. neut. 3. 
 
 Musarum, gen. plur. (Musa, ae) 
 sub.f. 1. 
 
 N 
 Narras, 2. sing. pres. bid. (Nar- 
 
 ro, avi, atum, are) v. act. 
 Naturae, gen. and dat. sing. (Na- 
 
 tura, ae) sub.f. 1. 
 Natus, nom. sing. m. perf. part. 
 
 (a^ um — Nascor, natus, nasci) 
 
 v. dep. 
 Nee, conj. 
 Negligenti, dat. sing. masc. or/. 
 
 (Negligens, entis) adj. 
 Nemini, dat. sing. (Nemo, ivants 
 
 gen. dat. ini, wants plur.) sub. 
 
 com. 3. 
 Noceas, 2. sing. pres. subj. (No- 
 
 ceo, ui, ltum, ere) v. act. 
 Non, adv. 
 Nostrum, gen. plur. (Ego, mei) 
 
 pron. 
 Nullus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um, 
 
 gen. ius, dat. i) adj. 
 
 O, interj. 
 
 Obliviscor, 1. sing. pres. ind. (ob- 
 
 lltus, oblivisci) v. dep. 
 Octavus,wo?w. sing. masc. (a, um) 
 
 adj. 
 Oculis, abl. plur. (Ociilus,i) sub. 
 
 masc. 2. 
 Omni, abl. sing. fern, and 
 Omnia, nom. plur. neut. and 
 Omnibus, dat. plur. masc. or /. 
 
 and 
 Omnium, gen. plur. masc. or /. 
 
 (Omnis, e) adj. 
 Opere, abl. sing. (Opus, eris) sub. 
 
 neut. 3. 
 Orator, nom. sing. (Orator, oris) 
 
 sub t m. 3. 
 Oriente, abl. sing. masc. pres. 
 
 part. (Oriens, entis) and 
 Ortus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 
 
 part, (a, um — Orior, ortus, 
 
 orlri) v. dep. 
 
 Pace, abl. sing, and 
 
 Pacem, ace. sing, and 
 
 Pacis, gen. sing. (Pax, pacis) sub. 
 
 fern. 3. 
 Palleo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (ui, 
 
 — , ere) v. neuU 
 Parentes, ace. plur. (Parens, en- 
 tis) sub. com. 3. 
 Parere, pres. inf. (Pareo, ui, i- 
 
 tum, ere) v. neut. 
 Parlsiis, abl. plur. (Parish*, orum) 
 
 sub. m. 2. wants sing. 
 Parvo, abl. sing. neut. (Parvus, 
 
 a, um) adj. 
 Passuum, gen. plur. (Passus, us) 
 
 sub. masc. 4. 
 
Index to Ruddinian's Syntax. 
 
 Patre, abl. sing, and 
 
 Patrem, ace. sing, and 
 
 Patri, dat. sing. (Pater, tris) sub. 
 
 m. 3. 
 Patriam, ace. sing. (Patria, ae) 
 
 sub.f. 1. 
 Patris, gen. sing. (Pater, tris) 
 
 sub. m. 3. 
 Pauca, ace. plur. neut. and 
 Paucos, ace. plur. masc. (Pauci, 
 
 ae, a) adj. wants sing. 
 Pax, nom. sing, (pacis) sub.f. 3. 
 Peccando, ger. abl. and 
 Peccare, pres. inf. (Pecco, avi, 
 
 atum, are) v. act. 
 Peccati, gen. sing. (Peccatum, i) 
 
 sub. neut. 2. 
 Pecuniae, gen. sing. (Pecunia, ae) 
 
 sub.f. 1. 
 Pedes, ace. plur. (Pes, pedis) 
 
 sub. m. 3, 
 Per, prep. 
 Peracto, abl. sing. neut. perf. 
 
 part. (Peractus, a, urn — Per- 
 
 agor, actus, agi) v. pass. 
 Perniciosus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 
 
 um) adj. 
 Petenda, abl. sing. fern, and 
 Petenda, nom. sing. fern, and 
 Petendae, gen. sing. fern, and 
 Petendam, ace. sing. fern. fut. 
 
 part. (Petendus, a, um — Pe- 
 
 tor, petltus, peti) v. pass. 
 
 Hence also 
 Petendi, ger. gen. and 
 Petendum, ger. nom. and accus. 
 
 and 
 Petendo, ger. abl. (Peto, ivi, I- 
 
 tum, ere) v. act. 
 Petrum, ace. sing, from 
 Petrus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. | 
 
 Philosophorum, gen. plur. (Phi 
 
 losophus, i) sub. m. 2. 
 Plenus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 
 
 adj. 
 Pluris, gen. sing. (Plus, pluris) 
 
 adj. neut. in sing, plural, plu- 
 
 res, a, and ia. 
 Poena, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
 Pcenitet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 
 
 ere) v. impers. 
 Pomum, nom. sing, (i) sub. n. 2, 
 Posce, 2. sing. pres. imper. (Pos- 
 
 co, poposci, — , poscere) v. 
 
 act. 
 Praeceptor, nom. sing, (oris) sub. 
 
 m. 3. 
 Praeditus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 
 
 um) adj. 
 Praestantior, nom. sing. masc. or 
 
 fern, (us) adj. compar. 
 Pridie, adv. 
 
 Proba, abl. sing. fern, and 
 Probae, gen. sing. fern. (Probus, 
 
 a, um) adj. 
 Procurare, pres. inf. (Procuro, 
 
 avi, atum, are) v. act. 
 Profectus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 
 
 part, (a, um — Proficiseor, fec- 
 
 tus, ficisci) v. dep. 
 Promptus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 
 
 um) adj. 
 Prudentia, abl. sing. (Prudentia, 
 
 ae) sub.f. I. Hence 
 Prudentiae, gen. sing. 
 Puer, nom. sing, (eri) sub. masc. 
 
 2. 
 Pugnans, nom. sing. masc. or /. 
 
 pres. part, (antis Pugno, 
 
 avi, atum, are) v. act. 
 Punire, pres. inf. (Punio, Ivi, I- 
 
 tum, Ire) v. act. 
 
Index to Ruddiniaris Syntax. 
 
 Putaram, contracted for putave- 
 ram, 1. sing.plusq. ind. (Puto, 
 avi, atum, are) v. act. 
 
 Q 
 
 Quanti, gen. sing. neut. (Quan- 
 
 tus, a, um) adj. 
 Quem, ace. sing, masc.from 
 Qui, wo??*, sing. masc. (quae, quod) 
 
 pron. 
 Quid, nom. sing. neut. from 
 Quis, nom. sing. masc. (qua? 
 
 quod, or quid) pron. 
 Quo, abl. sing, masc, (Qui, quae, 
 
 quod) pron. 
 
 R 
 Rationis, gen. sing. (Ratio, o- 
 
 nis) sub.f. 3. 
 Rebelles, ace. plur. masc. or fern. 
 
 (Rebellis, e) adj. 
 Recordor, 1. sing. pres. ind. (si- 
 tus, ari) v. dep. 
 Recte, adv. 
 Reciibo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (ui, 
 
 ltum, are) v. neut. 
 Rediit, contracted for redivit, 
 
 3. sing. perf. hid. (Redeo, Ivi, 
 
 itum, ire) v. irr. 
 Refert, S. sing. pres. ind. (tulit, 
 
 latum, ferre) v. wipers. 
 Regibus, abl. plur. (Rex, regis) 
 
 sub. masc. 3. 
 Regina, nom. sing, (as) sub. f. 1. 
 Regis, gen. sing. (Rex, regis) 
 
 sub. m. 3. 
 Rei, gen. sing. (Res, re'i) sub.f. 5. 
 Re'ipublicae, gen. sing. (Res, rei, 
 
 sub.f. 5. and Publica, as, adj. 
 
 fern, of Publicus, a, um) sub. 
 
 f. 1. and 5. 
 
 Rerum, gen. plur. (Ties, rei) sub. 
 
 f.5. 
 Reverere, 2. smg. pres. imperat. 
 
 (Revereor, veritus, vereri) v. 
 
 dep. 
 Revertitur, S. sing. pres. ind. 
 
 (Revertor, versus, verti) v. 
 
 dep. 
 Rixari, pres. inf. (Rixor, atus, 
 
 ari) v. dep. 
 Romae, gen. sing. (Roma, as) sub. 
 
 f. 1. 
 Romanorum, gen. plur. masc. 
 
 (Romanus, a, um) adj. 
 Rure, ail. sing, and 
 Ruri, abl. sing, and 
 Rus, ace. sing. (Rus, runs) sub. 
 
 neut. 3. 
 
 Saperes, 2. sing, imperf. subj. 
 
 and 
 Sapientum, gen. plur. masc. adj. 
 
 from pres. part. (Sapiens, en- 
 ds) and 
 Sapit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Sapio, 
 
 Ivi, and ui, — , ere) v. neut. 
 Satagit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Sata- 
 
 go, egi, — , agere) v. neut. 
 Satis, adv. 
 Schola, abl. sing. (Schola, ae) sub. 
 
 f. 1. Hence 
 Scholam, ace. sing. 
 Scio, 1. sing. pres. ind. (Ivi, I- 
 
 tum, Ire) v. act. 
 Scotia, abl. sing. (Scotia, ae) sub. 
 
 f. 1. Hence 
 Scotia m, ace. sing. 
 Scribendo, ger. dat. and 
 Scribis, 2. sing. pres. ind. and 
 Scribit, 3. sing. pres. ind. from 
 
Index to Ruddimaris Syntax, 
 
 Scribo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (scrip- 
 si, scriptum, scribere) v. act. 
 
 Sedens, nom. sing. masc. or fern, 
 pres. part, (entis) from 
 
 Sedeo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (sedi, 
 sessum, sedere) v. neut. 
 
 Senior, nom. sing. masc. (oris) 
 adj. compar. from Sen ex, se- 
 nis, com. 
 
 Servus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. 
 
 Sex, adj. indecl. 
 
 Sexaginta, adj. indecl. 
 
 Similis, nom. sing. m. (e) adj. 
 
 Sole, abl. sing. (Sol, solis) sub. 
 m. 3. 
 
 Studere, pres. inf. and 
 
 Studuit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Stu- 
 deo, ui, — , ere) v. act. 
 
 Suae, gen. sing. fern, and 
 
 Suarum, gen. plur. fern. (Suus, 
 a, um) pron. 
 
 Sub, prep. 
 
 Subter, prep. 
 
 Sum, 1. sing. pres. ind. (fui, es- 
 se) v. irr. 
 
 Summa, abl. sing. fern, and 
 
 Summae, gen. sing. fern. (Sum- 
 mus, a, um) adj. 
 
 Sunt, 3. plur. pres. ind. (Sum, 
 fui, esse) v. irr. 
 
 Suo, abl. sing. masc. (Suus, a, 
 um) pron. 
 
 Super, prep. 
 
 Surdo, dat. sing. masc. (Surdus, 
 a, um) adj. 
 
 Suum, ace. sing. neut. (Suus, a, 
 um) pron. 
 
 Tasdet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 
 ^er-taesum, ere) v. impers. 
 
 Talento, abl. sing. (Talentum, i) 
 sub. neut. 2. 
 
 Te, ace. sing. (Tu, tui) pron. 
 
 Tecti, gen. sing. (Tectum, i) sub. 
 n. 2. 
 
 Tempus, nom. sing, (oris) sub. n. 
 3. 
 
 Tendit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ten- 
 do, tetendi, sum and turn, de- 
 re) v. act. 
 
 Tenebrae, nom. plur. (arum) sub. 
 f. wants sing. 
 
 Tertia, abl. sing. fern. (Tertius, a, 
 um) adj. 
 
 Transit,/or transiit, and this for 
 translvit, 3. sing. perf. ind. 
 (Transeo, Ivi, itum, ire) v. 
 irr. 
 
 Tribuito, 2. sing. pres. imperat. 
 (Tribuo, ui, utum, uere) v. act. 
 
 Triginta, adj. indecl. 
 
 Tu, nom. sing, and 
 
 Tui, gen. sing. (Tu, tui, tibi) 
 pron. 
 
 Tuorum, gen. plur. masc. and 
 
 Tuum, nom. sing. neut. (Tuus, a, 
 um) pron. 
 
 U 
 
 Ubique, adv. 
 
 Umbra, abl. sing. (Umbra, ae) sub. 
 
 Una, nom. sing. fern, and 
 Unlus, gen. sing. (Unus, a, um, 
 
 gen. lus, dat. i) adj. 
 Urbe, abl. sing, and 
 Urbem, ace. sing, from 
 Urbs, nom. sing, (urbis) sub.f. 3, 
 Ut, conj. 
 Utilis, nom. sing. masc. or /. (e) 
 
 adj. 
 
Utlnam, conj. 
 
 Utitur, 3. sing, pres. ind. (Utor, 
 usus, uti) v. dep. 
 
 Index to Ruddimans Syntax. -2 iJZ/¥ ' $ 
 plur. vires, ium, ibus) sub. f. 
 Viridi, abl. sing. fern. (Viridis, e) 
 
 Vae, interj. 
 
 Valere, pres. inf. (Valeo, ui, 1- 
 
 tum, ere) v. neut. 
 Vel, conj. 
 Venae, nom. plur. (Vena, ae) sub. 
 
 Vendidit, 3. sing. per/, ind. (Ven- 
 
 do, didi, ditum, dere) v. act. 
 Veniam, ace sing. (Venia, ae) sub. 
 
 fern. 1. 
 Venit, 3. sing. per/, ind. (Venio, 
 
 veni, turn, Ire) v. act. 
 Verborum, gen. plur. (Verbum, 
 
 i) sub. n. 2. 
 Vir, nom. sing, (viri) sub. in. 2. 
 Virgilium, ace. sing, from 
 Virgilius, nom. sii2g. (i) sub. m. 2. 
 Viribus, abl, plur, (Vis, vim, vi, 
 
 Virtute, abl. sitig. and 
 Virtutem, ace. sing. (Virtus, li- 
 tis) sub.f. 3. 
 Virum, ace. sing. (Vir, viri) sub. 
 
 masc. 2, 
 Vitae, gen. sing. (Vita, ae) sub.f. 
 
 1. 
 Vivendum, ger. nom. and 
 Vivere, pres. inf. and 
 Vivimus, 1. plur. pres. ind. and 
 Vivit, 3. sing. pres. ind. and 
 Vixit, 3. sing. perf. ind.. (Vivo, 
 
 vixi, victum, vivere) v. neut. 
 
 3. 
 Vobis, dat. plur. (Tu, tui) pron. 
 Vocaris, 2. sing. pres. ind. (Vo- 
 
 cor, atus, ari) v. pass. 
 Voluptati, dat. sing. (Voluptas> 
 
 atis) sub.f. 1. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 Edinburgh : 
 Du "an Stevenson, Printer. 
 
 ^-Oj^ 
 
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 PreservationTeehnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 1 1 1 Tnomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724) 779-21 1 1